Home

PROMULA - Great Migrations

1. Value Def Proc Line PROMULA Source Statement 24 20 2 OPEN SEGMENT DEMO XEQ STATUS NEW 24 20 3 DEFINE PROGRAM A Demo Program 24 25 4 DEFINE SET 24 25 5 month 12 Months of the Year 54 25 6 acnt 3 Profit and Loss Ledger Accounts 78 25 7 END SET 78 25 8 DEFINE VARIABLE 11 78 25 9 mp month acnt TYPE REAL 12 2 Profit amp Loss Figures 47 98 25 10 mn month YPE STRING 12 Month Names 83 114 25 11 acn YPE STRING 12 Profit amp Loss Accounts 92 135 25 12 amp YPE REAL 10 2 Average Monthly Profit 93 154 25 13 END VARIABLE 93 154 25 14 DEFINE RELATION 93 154 25 15 KEY month mn 93 154 25 16 KEY acnt acn 93 154 25 17 END RELATION 263 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 93 54 25 18 READ mn 4 93 54 34 19 JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC 93 54 25 20 READ acn 6 93 54 34 21 Sales Costs Profit 93 54 25 22 DEFINE PROCEDURE profits 93 160 25 23 SELECT acnt Sales 93 160 29 24 EDIT mp TITLE Please enter the monthly sales 93 160 46 25 SELECT acnt Costs 93 160 50 26 EDIT mp TITLE Pleas nter the monthly costs 93 160 67 29 SELECT acnt 93 60 70 28 mp m 3 mp m 1 mp m 2 93 60 89 29 amp SUM m mp m 3 12 93 60 101 30 WRITE mp 93 60 106 31 WRITE amp 93 160 11
2. transno TRANSACTION NO YPE REAL 5 0 stkcode STOCK CODE TYPE STRING 5 stkdesc STOCK DESCRIPTION YPE STRING 32 stkqty STOCK QUANTITY YPE REAL 5 0 stkcost STOCK UNIT COST YPE MONEY 11 END VARIABLE purtrx Display entire random file DEFINE PROCEDURE shotrx OPEN purtrx purtrx ran DO purtrx WRITE transno stkcode 7 stkdesc stkqty stkcost END purtrx END PROCEDURE shotrx Execution of procedure rdt rx produces the output below 100 ADP3 Adapter 3 Galv Steel URD 5 1 20 101 ADP5 Adapter 5 Galv Steel URD 10 100 95 102 ADPAU Adapter Amp URD 8 4 80 103 BLTCA Bolts Carriage 1 2 X 6 50 0 80 104 BLTOE Bolts Oval Eye 5 8 X 12 15 2 89 105 ADP5 Adapter 5 Galv Steel URD 10 100 95 106 BLTCA Bolts Carriage 1 2 X 6 100 0 80 107 CAB12 Cable 412 solTWwire 200 0 04 108 ADP5 Adapter 5 Galv Steel URD 10 100 95 255 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 3 Read a single record in a random file using a numeric record number DEFINE VARIABLE rn Record Number END DEFINE PROCEDURE seltrx SELECT purtrx rn READ purtrx WRITE transno stkcode 7 stkdesc stkqty stkcost END PROCEDURE seltrx The third record of file purt rx may be displayed using procedure seltrx as shown in the dialog below rn 3 seltrx 102 ADPAU Adapter Amp URD 8 4 80 4 Select records from a random file using
3. A dialog with procedure nu11 is shown below 197 Promula Application Development System User s Manual null Enter the Lower Limit 200 There are no months with value greater than 200 ry again Enter the Lower Limit 100 Monthly values MN 11 110 MN 12 120 See the section on file management functions for an example of how to use the DO IF NULL statement to detect a no match condition from the GETDIR function 3 7 50 DO INVERT Purpose Compute the inverse of a matrix Syntax DO INVERT row col arr Remarks row is the identifier of a set dimensioning the matrix to be inverted col is the identifier of a set dimensioning the matrix to be inverted arr is the square subarray to be inverted arr must be dimensioned by the sets row and col The results of the inversion will overwrite arr The ranges of row and co1 must be equal in size when DO INVERT is called and the solution process will be restricted to the first selected entry of the remaining sets subscripting arr Example DEFINE SET DEFINE VARIABLI a page arow acol A matrix YPE REAL 10 6 ia page arow acol INVERT A YPE REAL 10 6 um page brow bcol UNIT MATRIX YPE REAL 10 6 END VARIABLE 198 Promula Application Development System User s Manual SELECT
4. DEFINE VARIABLE val state year YPE REAL 15 0 State Values staten state YPE CODE 2 State Names END VARIABLE SELECT KEY state staten READ staten 3 OH CA IL val i j i j 100000 DEFINE PROCEDURE slcvar SELECT VARIABLE val WRITE val END PROCEDURE slcvar A sample dialog with procedure slcvar is shown below DO slcvar Which of the 3 state entry s do you want list Identifier Description 1 OH 2 CA 3 IL Which of the 3 state entry s do you want CA Which YEAR entry s do you want 1990 2010 State Values 1990 to 2010 1990 2000 2010 CA 200 000 400 000 600 000 276 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 3 7 97 SORT Purpose Sorts the elements of a set based on the values of a variable subscripted by that set Syntax SORT order set USING var Remarks order is the order in which the set will be sorted and may be one of the following ASCENDING sorts the specified set according to the values of var ordered from low to high This is the default order DESCENDING sorts the specified set from high to low set is the identifier of the set whose elements are being sorted var is the identifier of a variable whose values are used to determine the order of the set The variable var must be classified by set i e it must have set a
5. DEFINE PROCEDURE writxt a 12345 WRITE LEFT a CENTER a RIGHT CENTER a 15 3 A a A a 25 3 A a A a 35 3 A a CLEAR 1 GOTOXY 0 8 CURSOR OFF CENTER CLEAR 1 Waits for a key press then ns clears Wf the screen GOTOXY 0 8 puts the cursor on row 8 why in column 0 CURSOR OFF turns off the cursor Wy display WRITE CENTER centers this text ue END PROCEDURE writxt 291 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The procedure writxt writes the lines below then pauses because of the CLEAR 1 option A 12 345 A 12 345 A 12 345 A 12 345 000 A 12 345 A 12 345 000 A 12 345 A 12 345 000 A 12 345 If the user presses a key PROMULA clears the Main Screen and writes the display below CLEAR 1 Waits for a key press then clears the screen GOTOXY 0 8 puts the cursor on row 8 in column 0 CURSOR OFF turns off the cursor display WRITE CENTER centers this text A 12 345 000 3 7 109 WRITE TEXT Purpose Displays free form text in the Main Screen Syntax WRITE TEXT text END Remarks text is any text that you want to display in the Main Screen 292 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The keyword END must be entered starting in column 1 and must be
6. Example 6 IMAGE Copy The dialog below illustrates the use of the COPY IMAGE statement The file arrlorg dba is an array file on disk DEFINE FILE demo TYPE ARRAY END FILE OPEN demo arrlorg dba STATUS OLD COPY demo EFINE FILE EMO TYPE ARRAY D EN DEMO DEMO dba STATUS NEW EFINE SET DEMO RS 4 yrs IC 4 SiC Z iw EFINE VARIABLE DEMO P SIC YRS TYPE REAL 8 0 Employment by Industry ICST SIC TYPE STRING 30 Names for Industrial Categories EAR YRS TYPE STRING 5 Years Z EFINE RELATION DEMO EY YRS YEAR EY SIC SICST WAAROUAKHNHEAUANKUOHUY Z i Notice no sets or variables are available before the COPY IMAG AUDIT SET AUDIT VARIABLI EH The COPY demo IMAGE statement will read in the set variable and relation definitions in the array file for virtual access 132 Promula Application Development System User s Manual COPY demo IMAGI Notice all the sets and variables in arrlorg dba are now available for use after the COPY IMAGE AUDIT SET Ident Description YRS yrs SIC SIC AUDIT VARIABLE Ident Description YEAR Years S ICST Names for Industrial Categories P Employment by Industry WRITE emp E
7. 192 5 7460 DO 5 193 5 747 DO TE LEER 194 5 746 DO TF KEY PRESS 195 5 749 DO TEINGEL 197 3 7 90 198 SF DD DOTS OLVE TE 200 17 92 DO proc dure C 202 5 733 DOREGRESS ss 203 SEF TAs SCD 206 RAS PO UNT DET 207 5 7360 DDO WHILE 208 JUL OZ SEDIT menu RR RI ER EU EINE 209 37 28 EDIT itd E ihi e es t e E E bei m ritus 210 J DD EDITVSaridble ARDOR IR ERREUR O NN SI S 211 3 7 00 END tirs ete et eR I Ee 217 3 7501 END PROGRAM RR UNE I NIIS 218 3 74 02 END SEGMENT ee ERI M a OV re t RUE UI 219 3 4 03 3EEVEL m iR REN RIMIS ER IU RN NISUS 220 3 7 04 OPEN file ede n EI DR Cree QU ener deb unas ene ENTER REVERSA EUR Er ev D ene ess 221 OPEN SEGMENT 5 es era due HII I UAE 223 3 7 00 OPEN WIN DOW iet RU RH EEE S NU RUE QUII i en 224 JUAOZ A a E OY EEEE EE AE TID IM QI RUM 225 3 7568 RATE iai usd etit dun HIRING SR OI MES 231 3 7269 READ DISK 5 suona nh dun te
8. Copy the result vectors B i page into the vectors X i page Solve system of linear equations for each page DO LSOLVE arow acol page a x Verify the Results A i j X i p should equal B i p y i p SUM j a i 3 x j p WRITE a 2 WRITE b 2 WRITE x 2 WRITE y 2 END PROCEDURE test The results of procedure test are displayed in the dialog below test Coefficient Matrix ACOL 1 ACOL 2 ACOL 3 AROW 1 1 00 2 00 3 00 AROW 2 2 00 2 00 3 00 AROW 3 3 00 3 00 3 00 Result Vectors 1 PAGE 2 AROW 1 6 00 14 00 AROW 2 7 00 15 00 AROW 3 9 00 18 00 Solution Vectors PAGE 1 PAGE 2 AROW 1 1 00 1 00 AROW 2 1 00 2 00 AROW 3 1 00 3 00 Test Result Vectors 201 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 1 PAGE 2 AROW 1 6 00 14 00 AROW 2 7 00 15 00 AROW 3 9 00 18 00 7 52 DO procedure Purpose Executes a procedure Syntax DO proc SUBTITLE text Remarks proc isthe identifier of a procedure text is a string of characters that will be appended to the titles of reports produced by procedure proc Example This example illustrates several title modification options and the variable L notation Notice that the displayed title TITLE parameter first followed by the scenario name the run identifi
9. 27 Promula Application Development System User s Manual A COLUMN relation between a set and a variable tells PROMULA to use the variable s values to label columns classified by the set in displays of array variables After defining initializing and relating labels to the program sets a display of any variable dimensioned by the sets is much more meaningful For example the display of variable expns is shown in the dialog below as an example WRITE expns Monthly Expenses by Category ENT FOOD CAR SERVICE UTILITIE CAR I R 5 5 HONE JAN 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 FEB 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 MAR 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 APR 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 MAY 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 JU 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 JUL 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 AUG 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 SEP 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 OCT 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 NOV 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 DEC 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 For more information about relations between sets and variables refer to Chapter 3 of this manual especially the sections covering the PROMULA noun Relation and the READ set DEFINE RELATION and SELECT RELATION statements 2 2 2 Program Control KEY TOPICS Procedures Linear Flow Conditional Branches Looping One of the most important tasks facing an application programmer is setting up struc
10. date a b E option EQ 30 ompute Product a b E option EQ 40 isplay Results zi zi zm oU Q O QU titt tu m H RITE Name Date A Value B Value Product of A B RITE name 1 date 11 a 21 b 31 prd 41 RITE Press any key to continue CLEAR 1 END option ctrl END ctrl Before using the menu you must open up a window to the main screen using the statement OPEN wwind MAIN Executing procedure ct r1 produces the display below Main Selection Menu R eturn E dit C alculate D isplay RETURN Return to PROMULA A bounce bar highlights the 1st selection R eturn which is the text between the two backslashes in the definition of menu pick The descriptions of the selection fields appear in the screen area twind You may press the selection characters R E C or D to make a selection or use the movement keys and the Enter key to pick a selection Pressing the E key will execute the statement EDIT data name date a b which produces the following screen 151 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Main Selection Menu R eturn E dit C alculate D isplay kkxkxkxkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk A Data Menu kkkxkxkxkxkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Enter Edit Inputs Name Date 00 00 00 A Value B Value kk ck KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK E
11. 2 1 2 6 F6 Run a Program from the Console An executable program may be run in one of two ways interactively or in batch Interactive execution proceeds as follows the program issues prompts via menus ASK statements and other interactive commands on the console and expects a response from the user before it continues execution In batch mode on the other hand program execution proceeds without pausing for user input from the keyboard In this mode all of your responses are expected to have been saved in a disk file called the batch input file Main Menu option 6 is used to execute a compiled PROMULA program interactively i e directly from the console and the keyboard Selecting Main Menu option 6 results in a dialog such as the one shown below Enter the filename of the program to be executed DEMO XEO DEMO XEQ is the name of the executable program that was produced by compiling the DEMO PRM source program using Main Menu option 5 The default extension for executable file names is XEQ Execution of DEMO XEQ results in the following dialogue Pleas nter the monthly sales figures 13200 12100 14800 16200 15200 17200 18060 18960 19900 20900 21950 23050 Pleas nter the monthly cost figures 9200 8600 10400 11300 10700 12100 12700 13350 14000 14700 15440 16210 Monthly Profit and Loss Figures Sales Costs Profit January 13 200 9 200 4 000
12. PROMULA Application Development System User s Manual and Reference Copyright 1985 2007 Great Migrations LLC ALL RIGHTS RESERVED COPYRIGHT NOTICE for PROMULA Application Development System Version 9 38 Released May 2007 Published by Great Migrations LLC 7453 Katesbridge Ct Dublin Ohio 43017 614 761 9816 This User s manual for the PROMULA Application Development System is the property of Great Migrations LLC It embodies proprietary confidential and trade secret information The User s manual and the files of the PROMULA Application Development System machine readable distribution media are protected by trade secret and copyright laws The use of the PROMULA Application Development System is restricted as stipulated in the Great Migrations LLC License Agreement which came with the PROMULA Application Development System product and which you completed and returned to the Great Migrations LLC The content of the machine readable distribution media and the User s manual may not be copied reproduced disclosed transferred or reduced to any electronic machine readable or other form except as specified in the License Agreement with the express written approval of Great Migrations LLC The unauthorized copying of any of these materials is a violation of copyright and or trade secret law DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES AND LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITIES THIS USER S MANUAL IS PROVIDED ON AN AS IS BASIS EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANT
13. DEFINE SET point 4 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE a point x coordinates b point y coordinates x y tj ND VARIABLI DEFINE FUNCTION stepf a b ND FUNCTION tj READ a 140 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 1 0 000011 READ b eu i 11 define the step function y stepf x shown below e 1 L1 9 The step discontinuity at 0 0 is represented approximately to within e 0 00001 For an arbitrary argument x the expression y stepf x yields a value y as follows 1 IF x gt 0 00001 y 1 IF 0 0 y 1 IF x lt 0 0 This is illustrated by the dialog below x 10 y stepf x WRITE y 1 x 10 y stepf x WRITE y 1 2 Consider the arbitrary function shown below 141 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Y An Arbitrary Function What are the values of y when x is 4 1 5 or 2 6 What are the values of x when y is 18 2 22 or 34 The dialog below shows how to answer these questions DEFINE SET dpnt 7 Points Defining Function xpnt 3 Arbitrary Points END SET DEFINE VARIABLE fx dpnt Function X Values YPE REAL 10 2 VALUE 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 fy dpnt Function Y Values YPE REAL 10 2
14. Examples 274 Promula Application Development System User s Manual DEFINE SET month 12 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE mv month Vector by Month END VARIABLE READ mv 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 SELECT month IF mv NE 0 After the selection the selected values of the set may be illustrated by writing a variable subscripted by the set WRITE mv Vector by Month MONTH 1 MONTH 4 MONTH 7 MONTH 1 MONTH 1 PRPPPR The SELECT statement above selects only those months for which the value of variable mv is not equal to zero 3 7 96 SELECT VARIABLE Purpose Asks the user a series of set selection questions based on the sets structuring a specified variable Syntax SELECT VARIABLE var Remarks var is the identifier of an array variable that will serve to define a series of set selection questions The order and identity of set selection questions will be defined by the order and identity of sets structuring var This statement provides an alternative to the ASK statement as a way of allowing the user to make set element selections Upon execution the SELECT VARIABLE statement will pose a series of set selection questions to the user for each set dimensioning var Each question will be of the form Which setdesc entry s do you want Where setdesc is the descriptor of the set being selected If no set descriptor was specified when the s
15. Purpose Defines a system of n equations and n unknowns for later solution where n can be as large as you can fit in your working space Syntax DEFINE SYSTEM sys DEFINE PARAMETER xl desc1 x2 desc2 xN descn END eqnl eqn2 eqnN END sys Remarks sys is the system identifier 1 is the identifier of the 1st unknown x2 is the identifier of the 2nd unknown xN is the identifier of the Nth unknown descl isa descriptor for the 1st unknown desc2 isa descriptor for the 2nd unknown eqnl isthe Ist equation of the system eqn2 isthe 2nd equation of the system equN isthe Nth equation of the system Equations are written in the usual algebraic notation f x1 x2 g xl x2 where and g are arbitrary real continuous functions of x1 x2 A system sys with parameters x1 x2 may be solved by simply entering its name and specifying an ordered list of scalar variables a1 a2 containing guesses for the unknowns sys al a2 The number and order of variables in the variable list must agree with the number and order of the parameters as defined in system sys 169 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The solution of a system is obtained by an iterative process base If it exists the solution of system sys will be returned as the values of the variables al a2 If the attempt to solve system sys does not converge aft
16. Since the access time for primary memory is faster than disk memory primary memory is more expensive than disk memory and thus it is available in relatively small quantities At the time of this printing a system memory of one Megabyte enough to store about one million characters is average for a typical personal computer Disk memory on the other hand is relatively inexpensive and comes in the form of removable diskettes or fixed disks which can hold many megabytes of data the smallest disk drives can hold ten Megabytes of data the largest can hold several thousand Megabytes The extension of your programs to disk memory is inevitable and for large scale programing applications necessary The reasons for this are 1 Programs written and compiled now need to be saved for use later 2 Large scale programs are usually data intensive often manipulating millions of data values during a single execution cycle It is usually impossible to store all of these values within the central memory of the machine so off line disk storage is needed to extend the data storage area required by the execution of the program 3 PROMULA data files need to be used by other software systems or programs written in other languages 4 PROMULA programs need to use data created by other software or programs written in other languages PROMULA has a database manager and a program segment manager to help you manage your program if it becomes so large that it
17. WRITE CLEAR 1 Press any key e g Enter e SELECT picmnu opt expecting a keypress choose option E Edit EDIT datmnu a b press enter for data entry mode 1 2 Provide data for first field of menu 1 2 EDIT datmnu a b press enter for data entry mode 6 0 Provide data card for second field of menu b 6 0 e EDIT datmnu a b press end to exit C SELECT picmnu opt expecting a keypress choose option C Compute D SELECT picmnu opt expecting a keypress choose option D Display WRITE CLEAR 1 Press any key e g Enter 0 SELECT picmnu opt expecting a keypress choose option Quit 2 1 4 PROMULA Keyboard Conventions Depending on context special keys have various effects Local PROMULA prompts describe what the actions of the various keystrokes are Most special keys are used in browsing and editing operations or in picking from menus The PgUp PgDn and Home keys are used for paging through multi screen displays browsing The Ctrl key is used with the PrtSc key to toggle the printer on and off The function keys or numeric keys are used for making selections off pick menus The function keys are also used for interactively paging through the dimensions of multidimensional reports The Alt or Shift key is used with the function 18 Promula Application Development System User s Manual keys to make selections off pick menus that have more than ten options it is a
18. XLABEL T i m e YLABEL Time Series Values ij TITLE A Scatter Plot of Actual and Log Values EGEND Absolutes Log of Absolute PLOT yv ts tl XLABEL T ime YLABEL Time Series Values ITLE An XY Plot with Marked Observations Of the Absolute and Log Actual value Log of Value M DH PLOT BAR ts tl XLABEL T ime ITLE A Parallel Bar Chart of Actual and Log Values of a Time Series EGEND Actual Log PLOT STACK ts tl XLABEL T i m e ITLE A Stacked Bar Chart of Actual and Log Values of a Time Series EGEND Actual Log END PROCEDURE plotdemo A Point Plot A Line Plot With Its Points Marked A Parallel Bar Plot A Stacked Bar Plot 229 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The code below generates a pie chart of variable y PROMULA pie charts can have up to nine sectors The variable that has a ROW relation to the set subscripting the variable being plotted will be used for the legend The percentage of each sector is automatically calculated and displayed DEFINE SET pnt 9 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE x pnt X Values y pnt Y Values YPE REAL 8 2 pntn pnt Point Names YPE STRING 15 pntl pnt Point Legend TYPE STRING 15 END VARIABLE x i i
19. A more detailed example of program segmentation is given in Chapter 4 See also DEFINE PROGRAM END PROGRAM OPEN SEGMENT READ SEGMENT and END SEGMENT 3 7 34 DEFINE SET Purpose Defines an enumerated set of elements Syntax DEFINE SET file set n desc option END Remarks file is the identifier of an array file that has been physically opened to a location on disk with the OPEN file statement If file is specified the set definition will become part of the array file structure set is the set identifier n is the number of elements in the set desc is a descriptor for the set option is used to associate information with the set elements and is one of the following TIME m1 m2 mn Where a is a positive number specifying the beginning point of the time series b is a positive number greater than a specifying the ending point of the time series m1 m2 mn increasing positive values for the time series 165 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The TIME option on the DEFINE SET statement is used to create time series sets The values specified in the TIME option define values which are set in one to one correspondence with the set elements The list of values associated with the TIME option is processed as though it were fixed length therefore if the values points are evenly spaced they may be specified via the beginning and ending values a
20. A relation is not valid unless vec is an array variable having set as its first dimension The SELECT RELATION statement may also be used to define relations between sets and variables Examples The following example illustrates using variables and relations to create descriptors for sets and array variables DEFINE SET row 3 col 2 state 2 year 2 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE rows row Row Descriptors TYPE STRING 20 cols col Column Headings TYPE STRING 8 stcode state State Codes TYPE CODE 5 yearv year Year Values TYPE INTEGER 5 vara row col state year A 4 Dimensional Array VALUE 1 161 Promula Application Development System User s Manual END VARIABLE Given these definitions the statement WRITE vara produces the display below A 4 Dimensional Array STATE 1 YEAR 1 COL 1 COL 2 ROW 1 1 1 ROW 2 1 1 ROW 3 1 1 STATE 1 YEAR 2 COL 1 COL 2 ROW 1 1 1 ROW 2 1 1 ROW 3 1 1 STATE 2 YEAR 1 COL 1 COL 2 ROW 1 1 1 ROW 2 1 1 ROW 3 1 1 STATE 2 YEAR 2 COL 1 COL 2 ROW 1 1 1 ROW 2 1 1 ROW 3 1 1 Note here that the row column and page descriptors of vara are the default descriptors of the sets row column state and year In order to replace these labels with more meaningful ones the DEFINE RELATION statement may be used as shown below DEFINE
21. END OPEN FULCPY FULCPY dba STATUS NEW DEFINE SET FULCPY REC 4 COL 6 END DEFINE VARIABLE FULCPY A REC COL TYPE REAL 10 1 The A Matrix 128 Promula Application Development System User s Manual B REC COL TYPE REAL 10 1 The B Matrix RECN REC TYPE STRING 10 COLN COL TYPE STRING 10 END DEFINE RELATION FULCPY ROW REC RECN COLUMN COL COLN END READ A 12 E 1 100000E1 2 100000E1 3 100000E1 4 100000 1 5 100000E1 6 100000E1 1 200000E1 2 200000E1 3 200000E1 4 200000 1 5 200000E1 6 200000E1 1 300000 1 2 300000E1 3 300000E1 4 300000 1 5 300000E1 6 300000E1 1 400000 1 2 400000E1 3 400000E1 4 400000 1 5 400000E1 6 400000E1 READ B 12 E 1 100000E1 2 100000E1 3 100000E1 4 100000 1 5 100000E1 6 100000E1 1 200000E1 2 200000E1 3 200000E1 4 200000 1 5 200000E1 6 200000E1 1 300000 1 2 300000E1 3 300000E1 4 300000 1 5 300000E1 6 300000E1 1 400000E 2 400000E1 3 400000E1 4 400000 1 5 400000E1 6 400000E1 READ RECN 10 ROW 1 ROW 2 ROW 3 ROW 4 READ COLN 10 COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 COL 5 COL 6 The RAW copy is also useful for making a full working or backup copies of your databases and it is the fastest copy mode The copy will behave exactly as the original Example 3 COPY EXCLUDE COPY INCLUDE The
22. Initial Section Time 1990 158 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Rate Section Time 1 990 Total Population 990 100 000 Births per Year 990 650 Net Migrants per Year 990 100 Deaths per Year 990 5 000 Birth Rate Trend Value 990 1 0000 Migration Rate Trend Value 990 1 0000 Death Rate Graph Value 990 1 0000 Level Section Time 1 991 Total Population 1991 95 750 Rate Section Time 1 991 Total Population 1991 95 750 Births per Year 1991 597 Net Migrants per Year 1991 96 Deaths per Year 1991 4 596 Birth Rate Trend Value 1991 0 9600 Migration Rate Trend Value 1991 1 0000 Death Rate Graph Value 1991 0 9600 Level Section Time 1 992 Total Population 1992 91 847 Rate Section Time 1 992 Total Population 992 91 847 Births per Year 992 549 Net Migrants per Year 992 92 Deaths per Year 992 4 225 Birth Rate Trend Value 992 0 9200 Migration Rate Trend Value 992 1 0000 Death Rate Graph Value 992 0 9200 Level Section Time 1 993 Total Population 1993 88 080 Rate Section Time 1 993 Total Population 1993 88 080 Births per Year 1993 504 Net Migrants per Year 1993 88 Deaths per Year 1993 3 876 Birth Rate Trend Value 1993 0 8800 Migration Rate Trend Value 1993 1 0000 Death Rate Graph Value 1993 0 8800 Results for Dynamic Simulation DT 1 Year 1990 1991 1992 Total Population 100 000 95 750 91 847 Births 650 597 549 Deaths 5 000 4 596 4 225
23. PRESS A KEY TO CONTINUE I CLEAR 1 2 E H U zi 0 W hb ct Z g ROCEDURE ctrl EFINE PROCEDURE start 17 Promula Application Development System User s Manual PEN mw MAIN PEN pw PROMPT trl CLEAR MAIN C W EAR PROMPT RITE CLEAR 0 END PROCEDURE start ND PROGRAM DO start s Let s assume we want to run this program using Main Menu option 5 for two different sets of inputs The first set of inputs 15 1 5 b 4 0 the second set of inputs is 1 2 b 6 0 BATCH SCRIPT COMMENTS OPEN SEGMENT batche xeq Open the segment file containing the program READ SEGMENT MAIN Read the program into memory execution starts with procedure start m SELECT picmnu opt expecting a keypress escape to Main Menu 10 Main Menu select option 10 to go to command mode a 1 5 Command mode statement 1 5 b 4 0 Command mode statement b 4 0 m PROMULA expecting a card escape to Main Menu 7 Main Menu select option 7 to resume an interupted application c SELECT picmnu opt expecting a keypress choose option C Compute d SELECT picmnu opt expecting a keypress choose option D Display
24. The value of taxes should be greater than or equal to zero ELSE taxes GT 0 50 WRITE The value of taxes should be less than 0 5 END IF For more information on Branching refer to the sections covering the DO IF statement and the nouns Boolean Expression and Relational Expression in Chapter 3 of this manual 2 2 2 4 Looping Looping refers to the process of repeatedly performing a set of operations The basic components of a loop are the body of the loop and the DO condition for the loop The body of the loop is simply the set of instructions that are executed on each pass through the loop The DO condition for the loop is a true false expression that is evaluated before each iteration of the loop to determine if the instructions in the body of the loop should be performed PROMULA supports several types of looping control structures these include the DO WHILE DO UNTIL DO file and DO set statements and recursion DO WHILE loops execute the instructions in the body of the loop while the DO condition is true DO UNTIL loops execute the instructions in the body of the loop until the DO condition is false DO file loops are used with text or random files They execute the instructions in the body of the loop once for each record of the file and exit when the end of file is reached The DO set loop is unique to PROMULA it is a set controlled looping structure that executes the instructions in the body of the loop once for e
25. dcv dre dpr sdatl After the READ DISK statement the local variables values have the values of their associated disk variables The local variables may be used like other fixed or scratch variables as illustrated in the dialog below dsv equals dat1 2 3 2 WRITE dsv Dynamic Scalar 232 equals datl rec 3 2 WRITE Dynamic Vector by row ROW 1 132 ROW 2 232 ROW 3 332 dcv col equals dat1 2 col 2 WRITE dcv Dynamic Vector by col COL 1 212 COL 2 222 COL 3 232 COL 4 242 pag equals datl1 2 3 pag WRITE dpv Dynamic Vector by pag PAG 1 231 PAG 2 232 drc row col equals datl row col 3 WRITE drc Dynamic Array by row and col COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 ROW 1 112 122 132 142 ROW 2 212 222 232 242 ROW 3 312 322 332 342 dpc pag col equals datl 2 col pag WRITE dpc Dynamic Array by pag and col COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 306 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 1 211 221 231 241 PAG 2 212 222 232 242 equals 1 row 3 WRITE Dynamic Array by pag and row ROW 1 ROW 2 ROW 3 PAG 1 131 231 331 PAG 2 132 232 332 The values of dati on disk may be modified by changing the values of the associated dynamic local variables then performing a WRITE DISK statement For example the statements
26. droc r c WRITE DISK drc will replace page two pp 2 of dat1 with an r c product matrix and the statements dsv 1000 WRITE DISK dsv will assign the value 1000 to the page two pp 2 column three cc 3 rowtwo rr 2 cell of Notice that the values of the local variable 1dat1 are also modified since it is virtually related to dat 1 as illustrated in the dialog below WRITE ldatl A 3 dimensional Array PAG 1 COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 ROW 1 111 121 131 141 ROW 2 211 221 231 241 ROW 3 311 321 331 341 PAG 2 COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 ROW 1 1 2 3 4 ROW 2 2 4 1 000 8 ROW 3 3 6 9 12 The dynamic variable sdat1 is not automatically modified since it is not virtually related to dat 1 As illustrated below sdat1 still has the values of dat1 that were read in by the previous READ DISK statement WRITE sdatl Dynamic Array by row col and pag PAG 1 COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 ROW 1 111 121 131 141 ROW 2 211 221 231 241 ROW 3 311 321 331 341 307 Promula Application Development System User s Manual PAG 2 COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 ROW 1 112 122 132 142 ROW 2 212 222 232 242 ROW 3 312 322 332 342 In fact the values of the disk variable dat 1 may be restored to their original state by transferring the values of sdat1 back to disk with a WRITE DISK statement WRITE DISK sdatl Notice t
27. fexist FILEEXIST filel xxx WRITE fexist File Exist Status 0 60 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Delete a file The FILEDELETE Function fdelete FILEDELETE fname WRITE fdelete File Delete Status 1 fdelete FILEDELETE file2 xxx WRITE fdelete File Delete Status 0 Size of a random file The FILESIZE Function file3 is empty so it has a size of zero records FILESIZE file3 WRITE records Number of records in a random file 0 The GETDIR FILEEXT FILENAME and FILEPATH functions are illustrated by procedure ilefunc in the example below DEFINE VARIABLE srch YPE STRING 25 Search Path fspec YPE STRING 25 Selected File Specification fpath YPE STRING 25 Selected File Path fname YPE STRING 9 Selected File Nam fextn TYPE STRING 4 Selected File Extension El ND VARIABLE DEFINE PROCEDURE filefunc srch txt fspec GETDIR srch DO IF NULL WRITE NO FILES MATCH CLEAR 1 filefunc E NO FILE SELECTED CLEAR 1 EAK filefunc fpath FILEPATH fspec fname FILENAME fspec fextn FILEEXT fspec WRITE srch 25 WRITE fspec 25 WRITE fpath 25 WRITE fname 10 WRITE fe
28. pag Dynamic Vector by pag DISK filea dat1 rr cc pag The above definitions create three dynamic vector variables Variable may be used to access an arbitrary row vector of the disk variable dat 1 variable may be used to access an arbitrary col vector of dat 1 and variable may be used to access an arbitrary pag vector of dati Recall from Chapter 2 that a vector is simply a one dimensional or list structured variable Dynamic access is indicated because the reference to dat 1 in the DISK option is subscripted one set or pointer variable for each dimension of the actual disk variable The correspondence between the local sets and the sets dimensioning the actual disk variable is indicated by the placement of pointers and set identifiers in the reference to dat1 in the DISK option Thus for the variable dpv pag dat1 is referred to as dat1 rr cc pag indicating that the pag dimension of dpv corresponds to the third dimension of the actual disk variable Similarly for the variable dcv col dat1 is referred to as dat1 rr col pp indicating that the col dimension of corresponds to the second dimension of dat 1 on disk The dimensions of the disk variable which do not correspond to a dimension of the local variable are basepointed 1 assumed to take on an arbitrary single value as indicated by the use of scalar variables in the reference to the disk variable row vector of dat1 may be read into
29. varl isthe identifier of the variable whose data is first on each data line fmtl 15 the format specification for var1 and has the following syntax piw where p isan integer indicating the starting column on each data line where the value for var1 begins The backslash means start reading in column If omitted the value begins in column 1 w is an integer indicating the width of the value and it means read the next w columns If omitted the default width is the width of var1 as specified in its definition The format specification may be omitted in which case the data may be entered in free form In free form the values of variables may be entered anywhere on an input line provided they are separated by commas or blanks sets is an ordered list of the identifiers of the sets subscripting var1 The sets may be listed in any order If omitted the order of the sets is that which appears in the definition of 1 var2 isthe identifier of the variable whose data is second on each data line fmt2 15 format specification for var2 and may have the same form as mt 1 above Here if the format specification p is omitted reading begins at the character immediately following the last character of the preceding value data the data values for var1 var2 The data values are entered on input lines which can have a maximum width of 255 characters each Numeric data may be expressed using the N VALUE notation The
30. 1 110 1 210 1 310 1 410 ROW 2 2 110 2 210 2 310 2 410 ROW 3 3 110 3 210 3 310 3 410 WRITE ldatb A 3 dimensional Array PAG 1 COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 ROW 1 11 100 12 100 13 100 14 100 ROW 2 21 100 22 100 23 100 24 100 ROW 3 31 100 32 100 33 100 34 100 PAG 2 COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 ROW 1 11 200 12 200 13 200 14 200 ROW 2 21 200 22 200 23 200 24 200 ROW 3 31 200 32 200 33 200 34 200 305 Promula Application Development System User s Manual In order to use a dynamic variable which is a dimensional section of a disk variable it is necessary to assign values to each pointer variable that corresponds to a disk set Each pointer value must be greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to the size of the disk sets to which it corresponds REAL type pointer variables are rounded to the nearest integer For example variable rr is used as a pointer to the set drow 3 on disk rr may only take on the values 1 2 or 3 variable cc is used as a pointer to the set dcol 4 cc may only take on the values 1 2 3 or 4 and variable pp is used as a pointer to dpag 2 pp may only take on the values 1 or 2 The statements below set the drow pointer to 2 the dcol pointer to 3 and dpag pointer to 2 rr 2 3 pp 2 Once the pointers contain the desired values the selected data may be transferred from disk into the associated local variables via a READ DISK statement READ DISK dsv
31. 10 END DEFI VARIABLE Filex var row col page Data for Segment MAIN END DEFI PROCEDURE proc OPEN Filex segment dba STATUS OLD WRITE You are in Segment MAIN READ SEGME Segl DO procl READ SEGME Seg2 DO proc2 READ SEGME Seg3 DO proc3 END proc DEFINE SEGME Segl WkKKKK KKK KKK Begin Segl kk ck ck ck ck kk ck kk ko kk ko k ck k M DEFINE VARIABLE varl row col Data for Segment Segl END DEFINE PROCEDURE proci WRITE You are in Segment Segl READ SEGMEN Segll DO procll END proci DEFINE SEGMEN Segll kk kc KKK Begin Segll KAKKKKKK KKK KKK ck ck ck k DEFINE VARIABLE varll row page Data for Segment Segll END DEFINE PROCEDURE 11 WRITE You are in Segment Segl1 END 11 END SEGMENT Segll END SEGMENT Segl DEFINE SEGMENT Seg2 Begin Seg2 DEFINE VARIABLE 314 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Figure 4 2 A Segmented Program with a Database 11 622 62 41 var2 row page Data for Segment Seg2 5011 639 62 42 END 5011 639 62 43 DEFINE PROCEDURE proc2 5011 645 62 44 WRITE You are in Segment Seg2 5011 645 74 45 END proc2 5011 645 75 46 END SEGMENT Seg2 12 622 62 47 DEFINE SEGMENT Seg3 Begin Seg3 Ckck ck ck ckck ck ck kk k kk 622 62 48 DEFINE VARIABLE 11 622 62 49 var3 row col Data for Segment Seg3 5011 63
32. 10 2 Monthly Expenses by Category 5 payhr mons YPE REAL 10 0 Payable Hours per Month hr bonus mons YPE REAL 10 2 Monthly Income Bonus taxes YPE REAL 10 4 Fraction of Pay Lost to Taxes 23 Promula Application Development System User s Manual wager TYPE REAL 10 2 Hourly Wage Rate hr OUTPUTS incom mons YPE REAL 10 2 Monthly Income 5 expnm mons YPE REAL 10 2 Monthly Expenses balns mons YPE REAL 10 2 Monthly Balance aincom YPE REAL 10 2 Average Monthly Income aexpnm YPE REAL 10 2 Average Monthly Expense abalns YPE REAL 10 2 Average Monthly Balance END VARIABLE Figure 2 8 Definition of the Inputs and Outputs of the Budget Program The code above illustrates the basic elements of data definition in the PROMULA language The PROMULA statements displayed above are discussed in the following sections 2 2 1 3 Defining Sets In PROMULA a Set is an ordered list of elements that can serve as an index for and define the structure of array variables In other words sets are classification schemes for information For example the values in Figure 2 7 are classified by month and expense category these two classification schemes could be defined as sets in PROMULA In PROMULA sets are created with the DEFINE SET statement The sets required to structure the budge
33. 1999 Total Range 3 935 806 Minimum Value 5 052 46 Maximum Value 8 988 32 The statement DO DESCRIBE a 2 would use the default value for sets ie pag col row and would produce tables of statistics for variable a indexed by row for all combinations of pag and col in the following order PAG 1 COL 1 PAG 2 COL 1 PAG 1 COL 2 PAG 2 COL 2 The statement DO DESCRIBE row a 2 would produce a table of statistics for variable a indexed by row for the first active elements of sets of pag and col No pag or col descriptor subtitle would appear in the report title The statement DO DESCRIBE col row a 2 would produce a table of statistics for variable a indexed by row for each level of set col and the first active element of set pag Set 1 row descriptors would be used as a subtitle in the report titles COL 1 COL 2 The statement DO DESCRIBE col pag row a 2 would produce tables of statistics for variable a indexed by row for all combinations of pag and col in the following order COL 1 PAG 1 COL 2 PAG 1 COL 1 PAG 2 COL 2 PAG 2 185 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 3 7 41 DO DIRECTORY Purpose Executes a group of statements once for each file in the current directory that matches a given file specification Syntax DO DIRECTORY filespec INTO fname statement END Remarks is a str
34. CONSTANT EFINE VARIABLE ESSEION INPUTS x x oU Response Variable By Group and And Time Independent Variable 1 by Group and Time Independent Variable 2 by Group and Time tim grp tim grp tim grp EG R ESSION OUTPUTS tv trm grp trm grp Coefficients of the Regression Terms T Value for the Coefficients of the Regression Terms se trm grp sd grp rs grp ND VARIABLI Stderr Errror for the Coefficients of the Regression Terms Standard Deviation of Regression Model R Square of Regression Model s HH ELECT grp 1 ivl grp tim 17 4 18 4 16 8 18 9 17 1 17 3 18 2 21 3 21 2 20 7 18 5 iv2 grp tim 42 0 47 0 47 0 43 0 41 0 48 0 44 0 43 0 50 0 56 0 60 0 rsp grp tim 210 110 103 103 iv1 t 2 iv1 t 1 iv2 t 2 iv2 t 1 rsp t 2 rsp t 1 ELECT grp D Fi me its me S READ 16 7 READ 30 0 READ 91 76 73 70 68 53 45 31 RMS ROW 1 96 CONS EFINE PROC EDURE doregr Regression Report ox DO REGR ESS grp tim rsp ivl iv2 204 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Regression Save Output DO REGRESS grp tim rsp ivl iv2 COEFF cf TVALUE tv STDERR se STDDEV sd RSQUAR rs WRITE TABLE grp trm TITLE Regressi
35. END SET DEFINE VARIABLE smn stratum month Customers by Stratum and Month TYPE REAL 12 0 END VARIABLE OPEN inpt smn txt STATUS OLD DO stratum READ inpt month smn 6 0 stratum month END stratum CLEAR inpt 3 7 71 READ function Purpose Reads values into a function Syntax READ func Xl x2 xn yl v2 se yn Remarks func is the identifier of a function defined by a DEFINE FUNCTION or DEFINE LOOKUP statement 1 x2 xn are values to be read into the X variable of the function yl y2 yn are values to be read into the Y variable of the function Examples DEFINE SET pnt 4 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE x pnt The X values y pnt The Y values END VARIABLE 235 Promula Application Development System User s Manual DEFINE FUNCTION fx x y Y f x END FUNCTION READ fx 10 20 30 40 50 60 101 202 303 404 505 606 Given the above definitions the value of the function and its X and Y value vectors may be displayed via WRITE statements as shown in the dialog below WRITE fx 1 2 PNT 1 10 101 PNT 2 20 202 PNT 3 30 303 PNT 4 40 404 WRITE x The X values PNT 1 10 PNT 2 20 PNT 3 30 PNT 4 40 WRITE y The Y values PNT 1 101 PNT 2 202 PNT 3 303 PNT 4 404 3 7 72 READ menu Purpose Displays a data menu to let you
36. Promula Application Development System User s Manual PAG 1 PAG 2 PAG 1 PAG 2 ROW 2 Total COL 1 6 00 2 00 12 00 4 00 ROW 3 Total COL 1 9 00 3 00 18 00 6 00 COL 2 4 00 8 00 COL 2 6 00 12 00 Examples of the other WRITE VARIABLE options are presented with the discussion of the BROWSE VARIABLE statement 297 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 4 PROGRAM AND DATA MANAGEMENT A program that has too much data or too much code will not fit in your working space and will not run Fortunately in addition to its extensive interface design and modeling features PROMULA has considerable database management and program management capabilities Since these capabilities are required for large scale application development they are given special attention in this chapter This chapter is divided into two sections the first discusses the construction and use of PROMULA s array database files the second discusses PROMULA s program segment manager 4 1 Database Management in PROMULA In PROMULA a database is a file containing information The file s type may be TEXT ARRAY or RANDOM Databases allow your applications to use disk memory to permanently store a copy of program information Databases may be shared by several applications extended read from written to and manipulated by your computer operating system like other files Text files are the least structured type of da
37. RUN segll prm WRITE RUNNING seg2 prm 319 Promula Application Development System User s Manual RUN seg2 prm WRITE RUNNING seg3 prm RUN seg3 prm STOP PROMULA 320 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 5 CONFIGURING PROMULA Most of PROMULA s system options may be configured by each application through the SELECT option statement However the physical configuration of PROMULA s graphics modes may only be controlled through PROMULA s graphics configuration program PCONFIG XEQ This program is PROMULA application that provides a menu driven interface for configuring each of PROMULA s graphics modes to your hardware s capabilities and your preferences so that you can produce plots on your screen and printer The program provides the means to select predefined graphics configurations and to create and manage custom graphics configurations for hardware that does not work under one of the predefined configurations Typically you will only have to configure PROMULA s graphics once when you first install PROMULA on your system Currently PROMULA supports graphics configurations for the following types of devices CGA medium resolution 3 color graphics adapter CGA high resolution black amp white graphics adapter EGA 106 color high resolution graphics adapter 16 color high resolution graphics adapter IBM Epson printer high resolution landscape IBM Epson printer high resolution
38. The monthly expenses will be divided into six categories rent food car service utilities car insurance and phone For each month the program will compute the worker s Monthly Income from several other inputs Hourly Wage Rate hr the dollars earned per hour before taxes Payable Hours per Month the number of hours the worker expects to work each month Pay Lost to Taxes the fraction of wages lost to taxes Monthly Income Bonus a dollar amount earned by the worker independent of the number of hours worked or the tax rate If the worker is salaried this is the worker s monthly take home pay BUDGET PROGRAM OUTPUTS The worker s total monthly income and expenses will be computed from the program inputs The monthly expenses will be subtracted from the monthly income to give a monthly balance or the amount of money that will be left over each month for saving or spending on luxury items or emergencies In addition the annual totals and averages will be computed Having determined the inputs and outputs required for our program we may use PROMULA to create a framework for this information The figure below shows the PROMULA statements that can create the essential input and output variables of the budget program DEFINE SET mons 12 Months exps 6 Expense Categories END SET DEFINE VARIABLE INPUTS expns mons exps
39. The name of a window that you want to use for the screen of this functional type These two parameters are discussed below The screen parameter of the OPEN WINDOW statement specifies the functional screen to be assigned a window PROMULA supports five types of functional screens each one is used for a particular set of operations The five types of screens MAIN PROMPT COMMENT ERROR and HELP are discussed below 1 MAIN The Main Screen is used for most of the input output operations done by an application These operations are performed by the following statements ASK ELSE BROWSE WRITE TEXT AUDIT BROWSE EDIT WRITE variable BROWSE FILE AUDIT BROWSE SELECT SET PLOT in character mode AUDIT BROWSE SELECT VARIABLE SELECT ENTRY AUDIT BROWSE WRITE set SELECT indirect AUDIT COPY file Statistical Functions BROWSE EDIT SELECT WRITE menu table BROWSE EDIT WRITE TABLE variable GETDIR filespec BROWSE WRITE function WRITE text The PROMULA Text Editor uses the colors of the Normal Text in the Main Screen 2 PROMPT The Prompt Screen is used for displaying the prompts produced by the following PROMULA statements ASK CONTINUE BROWSE EDIT SELECT menu ASK ELSE BROWSE function BROWSE SELECT VARIABLE BROWSE EDIT TABLE BROWSE EDIT variable BROWSE TEXT BROWSE SELECT SET SELECT ENTRY BROWSE set SELECT indirect BROWSE FILE variable GETDIR filespec PROMULA s command mode prompt use
40. This is the total width of the plot area in pixels 8 Total height in pixels This is the total height of the plot area in pixels 9 Total width in standard units This is the total width of the plot including accompanying text in standard units typically inches 10 Total height in standard units 324 Promula Application Development System User s Manual This is the total height of the plot including accompanying text in standard units typically inches 11 Border color code In LINE and VALUES plots this is the color to be used for the border around the plot and all text displayed with the plot In all other plot styles i e PIE CHARTS MARKED POINT PLOTS and BAR PLOTS the entire image will be drawn in this color 12 Line color codes These six values specify the colors to be used for the plotted curves in LINE and VALUES plots The colors available depend on your hardware The color codes used by PROMULA are listed below SIXTEEN COLOR GRAPHICS CONFIGURATIONS 0 BLACK 1 BLUE 2 GREEN 3 CYAN 4 RED 5 PURPLE 6 YELLOW 7 WHITE 8 GREY 9 10 GREEN 11 LT CYAN 12 LT RED 13 LT PURPLE 14 YELLOW 15 LT WHITE THREE COLOR GRAPHICS CONFIGURATIONS 1 CYAN 2 MAGENTA 3 WHITE For monochrome monitors and printers the only valid color code is 1 13 Line patterns These six strings of twenty chara
41. and so forth End press the End key to exit editing mode or to exit browsing mode The WRITE TABLE statement and tables defined by the DEFINE TABLE statement will behave like the EDIT TABLE statement if a SELECT BROWSE VALUES ROW COLUMN statement has been executed Examples See the descriptions of the BROWSE TABLE and DEFINE TABLE statements for an example of a table 3 7 59 EDIT variable Purpose Displays a variable on the screen to let you 1 browse the variable by page 211 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 2 change its values in screen editing mode Syntax EDIT var fmt ORDER sets TITLE title DISPLAY dvar option Remarks var is the variable identifier fmt is a format specification indicating the width of row descriptors the width of the columns displayed and the number of decimals in real values as follows where p is an integer specifying the width in characters for row descriptors The default width is the width specifications of the row descriptors related to the set subscripting the rows of the display w is an integer specifying the width in characters for each column of values The default is the width specification in the definition of var A negative width parameter left justifies the values of var in each column d is an integer specifying the number of decimals to display for real numeric values The default is the decimal specification if appl
42. eit dete ei E ATE SA A E 137 3 97 20 DEFINE FUNCTION seti ceteri thea Sie nek eae ee sk UR Gan qu tb is is BRR EE os 139 3 2 DEFINE EOOKUP 5 ite bak hak a BEC Sia hs Gack EUER Cd in AE 143 6 DEFINEJAMENU 144 3 7 29 esaet reb cemere eur Chek aR cd ns a E EASES 152 3 7 30 DEFINE PROCEDURE a a nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nnns sna na a anas ana a anas ana ns s saa ana e sae 155 JAT DEFINE PROGRAM itecto hak aa aa 8k RRA Eve cdm Pr SRN A Er OR Be RRR EE 159 3 77 32 DEFINE RELATION ean wea hak EO eget Er Gan hin EE EE EDU RS 160 3 733 DEFINE SEGMENT teh ettet a a RR SRC NRE dE pepe Ee EU cor ER ERR ES 163 SOL SA S DERINE SED zd ette 165 32 35 DEFINE SYSTEM Sesh Faecal ead ga Se iicet adeste een etia edle e ve NER e deer ee 169 Table Of Contents 34 30 DEINE nep tomen acp n nde iiti iei iis 171 3A I7 DEFINE VARIABLE 174 SOS WIND OW EE 178 3 439 PO CORREDATE tava Gods ea ieritet fesso praepos e e iei 181 33740 DO DESCRIBE asiste st here tiere ceret e tv eret iere pede He er OB 183 3 541 DO DIRECTORY iis eost e eire tete Re ER iere eee e ev e ee ei 186 EE 187 SUL SUD OM cU 188 END ii eite tere nici eiit Ce 190 3 743 DO TF ERROR CETT
43. kk A Data Menu wX XXk kk kk kk kk kckck ck ck kk kk kk Enter Edit Inputs Name Date A Value B Value F F 0X F Ck ck ck Ck ck ck Ck KKK KKK ck Ck Sk ck Ck ck KR KKK KKK KKK KKK ck ck ck KKK KKK kk ck ck ok kk ck kk ck kk ck kk ko kk Sk kc k ko k kc KK KKK Define a Pick Menu DEFINE MENU pick KCkCkckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck kk k kk kk k A Pick Menu X XX XXk kk kk ck kckck kck ck kckckck ck kk Main Selection Menu Press the desired Function key F1 Return to PROMULA or F2 NEdit Input Values Xo X X F F X X X 0X F F X X X 1 Press the UP and DOWN arrow keys 147 Promula Application Development System User s Manual NCalculate Totals to move the bounce bar F4 NDisplay Results 2 Press the Enter key to pick ck ck ck ck kk ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk ck ck ck ck ck KKK KK KKK KKK kk KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KK ck kk ck ck ko ko ko ko ko ko ko ko ko kokok END Define a procedure to control the execution of menu pick and menu data DEFINE PROCEDURE start Select from Menu pick S ELECT pick option dit a Data Menu DO IF option EQ 2 EDIT data name date a b start END option 2 Compute Totals DO IF option EQ 3 tot atb start END option 3 Display Results DO IF option
44. or false if the result of the comparison is false It has either the value 1 if true or the value 0 if false Remarks The relational operators are OPERATOR EXPRESSION MEANING A less than B A less than or equal to B A equal to B A not equal to B A greater than or equal to B A greater than B Examples 1 The expression 5 LT 7 has the value 1 TRUE the expression 5 GT 7 has the value 0 FALSE 2 Given the following definitions DEFINE VARIABLE 10 B 10 END VARIABLE 1 i the equation B ALT 5 produces the following results D D LT 5 B A LT 5 True True True True False False False False False False PN COO Orr nd 66 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 3 1 9 File Definition A place on disk that stores information Remarks Files allow you to extend the storage available to your programs beyond the central memory of the computer Files also allow you to save information on disk for use at a later time In addition files are one means by which you may transfer data to and from other programs or computers Your computer has two kinds of memory 1 Primary memory also known as system memory central memory RAM Random Access Memory on line memory core or working space 2 Secondary memory also known as disk memory off line memory peripheral memory or mass storage
45. user The first question asks for the name of the file containing the source code to be compiled Any filename which is valid for the operating system is a valid entry for this question The default extension for source file names is PRM The second question asks where PROMULA should send the compilation listing The listing may be viewed on the screen sent to the printer saved in a file on disk or turned off Viewing the listing on the screen or printer may slow the compilation down but may make it easier to understand compilation errors If the listing is sent to the printer then the printer needs to be turned on and ready to go before the response to this question is entered PROMULA does not check to ensure that this is true and will compile the program without sending it to the printer if you fail to turn the printer on If the listing is to be saved on a disk file you must specify the name of the disk file in response to the next question as shown in the second example below If you want the code to compile as fast as possible and do not need to view the listing as the program is compiled enter N for the N one option The third question asks whether or not PROMULA should pause when a compilation error is encountered 1 If you respond Y for yes to the question then each time an error is encountered PROMULA will display the appropriate error message and will pause with the following message Press any key to continue At this poin
46. x is an array or array expression subs is a list of subscripts classifying the elements of x RANDOM arg Random number Result depends on number of parameters specified in arg ROUND x Integer nearest to x SIN x Sine of x x in radians SORT x Square root of x SUM subs x subs Sum over the elements of x where is an array array expression subs isa list of subscripts classifying the elements of x TAN x Tangent of x x in radians XMAX x y Examples Maximum of x y Minimum of x y 1 The ROUND FLOOR and IFIX functions are illustrated in the example below These three functions are similar in that they all return integers but they have subtle differences FLOOR x Returns the integer nearest to x that does not exceed x 54 Promula Application Development System User s Manual IFIX x Returns the integer nearest to x that does not exceed the magnitude of x In other words IFIX x truncates the decimal part of x ROUND x Returns the integer nearest to x DEFINE VARIABLE b END VARIABLE DEFINE PROCEDURE calc a FLOOR x b ROUND x c IFIX x WRITE x 5 2 a 12 2 b 12 2 c 12 2 END PROCEDURE calc DEFINE PROCEDURE test WRITE x FLOOR x ROUND x IFIX x WR I E x 2 25 calc x 2 50 calc 2 75 calc 2 25 calc x 2 50 calc 2 75 c
47. 000000E0 0 000000 0 0 000000E0 0 000000E0 0 000000 0 0 000000E0 0 000000E0 0 000000 0 0 000000E0 READ RECN 10 READ COLN 10 CLEAR prtcpy OPEN prtcpy prtcpy dba STATUS NEW COPY orignl INTO prtcpy INCLUDE coln recn DATA COPY prtcpy DATA DEFINE FILE PRTCPY TYPE ARRAY END OPEN PRTCPY PRTCPY dba STATUS NEW DEFINE VARIABLE PRTCPY RECN REC YPE STRING 10 COLN COL TYPE STRING 10 END READ RECN 10 ROW 1 ROW 2 ROW 3 ROW 4 READ COLN 10 COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 COL 5 COL 6 Example 4 Full Copy array file to text file The following example shows how to make a copy of a database definition in a text file on disk DEFINE FILE txtcpy TYPE TEXT TEXT File For Copy END FILE OPEN orignl original dba STATUS OLD OPEN txtcpy textcopy prm STATUS NEW COPY orignl INTO txtcpy DATA CLEAR txtcpy CLEAR orignl The file textcopy prm is shown below This text file could be edited or used directly to create a copy of the original database EFINE FILE RIGNL TYPE ARRAY PEN ORIGNL ORIGNL dba STATUS NEW EFINE SET ORIGNL EFINE VARIABLE ORIGNL REC COL TYPE REAL 10 1 The A Matrix REC COL TYPE REAL 10 1 The B Matrix ECN REC TYPE STRING 10 guPHEOZUOQHOU E o 130 Promula Application Develo
48. 409 409 409 409 409 409 409 409 409 409 409 286 64 276 76 280 81 294 05 286 98 275 43 269 81 289 93 261 35 258 71 250 12 272 28 143 171 166 28 134 35 99 55 88 13 152 85 103 88 127 67 l171 10 127 52 105 25 93 81 86 87 84 78 96 84 98 06 86 77 98 06 87 47 72 28 76 47 88 28 91 41 93 93 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 57 30 50 21 65 53 61 30 58 03 56 45 56 45 50 61 55 64 58 33 69 28 50 67 There is no need for formats or loops to read in the values of an array variable The definition of the variable contains all the information needed to control the read so that the data values are put into the appropriate cells of the array The examples above are simplistic and are based on reading from the source code of your program or from the keyboard PROMULA can also read data from complicated fixed and variable length text and binary random files These techniques are discussed in Chapter 3 in the sections covering the READ variable READ variables and READ file statements 2 2 3 2 Selecting Sets A common programming requirement is the selection of a subset of your data For example 1 to select the values of an array indexed by particular set sequence numbers before using the array in calculations or input output operations 2 toselect only those values of a variable that meet a given criteria 3 to put the values of an array into an order that is not directly possible by using PROMULA s SORT statement Whatever your needs having ac
49. 422 132 232 332 432 3 You may read selected data values by using the SELECT set statement before the READ statement SELECT row 1 SELECT page 1 READ a 111 121 131 This read operation is restricted to the first and the first page of variable a The values 111 121 and 131 are assigned to the first second and third columns respectively 4 As is the case for other READ statements numeric data values may be specified with the N VALUE notation as in the example below DEFINE SET row 3 col 10 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE x row col TYPE REAL 11 3 THE X ARRAY A END READ x 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 10 2 11 2512 2 13 2 14 2 15 The data values may be displayed by the statement WRITE x The output of this statement is shown below THE X ARRAY COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 COL 5 ROW 1 1 000 1 000 2 000 2 000 3 000 ROW 2 6 000 6 000 7 000 7 000 8 000 ROW 3 11 000 11 000 12 000 12 000 13 000 243 Promula Application Development System User s Manual COL 6 COL 7 COL 8 COL 9 COL 10 ROW 1 3 000 4 000 4 000 5 000 5 000 ROW 2 8 000 9 000 9 000 10 000 10 000 ROW 3 13 000 14 000 14 000 15 000 15 000 3 7 77 READ variables Purpose Read data into more than one variable Syntax READ varl fmt1 sets var2 fmt2 sets data Remarks
50. February 12 100 8 600 3 500 March 14 800 10 400 4 400 April 16 200 11 300 4 900 May 15 200 10 700 4 500 June 17 200 12 100 5 100 July 18 060 12 700 5 360 August 18 960 13 350 5 610 September 19 900 14 000 5 900 October 20 900 14 700 6 200 November 21 950 15 440 6 510 December 23 050 16 210 6 840 Average monthly Profit 5 235 00 Figure 2 3 Dialog produced by DEMO XEQ 11 Promula Application Development System User s Manual While running an application in interactive mode you may suspend program execution by pressing the Esc key at a program pause To resume execution at the point where you exited select option 7 from the Main Menu 2 1 2 7 F7 Resume an Interrupted Program You can interrupt an executing program by pressing the Esc key in response to any program prompt This gets you out of the program and returns you to the Main Menu At this point you have direct access to the program information and procedures From the Main Menu you can perform a number of useful operations like using the editor or using PROMULA in direct mode by selecting Main Menu option 10 to perform diagnostic or debugging operations In direct mode you may audit the contents of the program selectively or make other adjustments before resuming execution This is a very useful feature for developing and testing programs To return to the precise point of execution where you exited the program select option 7 off the Main Menu 2 1 2
51. NEW DEFINE VARIABLE arri varl rec Variable 1 YPE REAL 8 0 var2 rec Variable 2 YPE STRING 8 var3 rec Variable 3 YPE DATE 8 1 ND VARIABLE 1 DEFINE VARIABLE rn Record Number ND VARIABLI rs EJ rn 1 DO txtl READ txtl varl rn 8 var2 rn 8 var3 rn 8 rn rntl END txt1 3 Read from a random file and write to a text file DO rani WRITE txtl iteml1 8 item2 8 item3 8 END rani 4 Read from a random file and write to an array file 1 DO rani varl rn iteml var2 rn item2 var3 rn item3 rn rnt l END ranl 5 Read a two dimensional array from a text file using a DO set loop to drive the row dimension and a set identifier in the read statement to drive the column dimension Given the following data file with physical file name smn txt 11 15 11 17 10 12 10 14 20 25 27 28 22 31 50 32 41 19 21 17 T9 38 56 67 234 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 47 57 73 55 72 38 27 19 35 51 79 76 156 211 267 203 273 155 109 89 142 230 286 264 494 620 730 646 775 504 433 402 525 760 817 734 478 496 468 539 499 521 493 481 592 623 618 584 The following code will read the two dimensional data set DEFINE FILE inpt Data Input File TYPE TEXT END FILE DEFINE SET stratum 6 6 Usage Strata month 12 12 Months
52. Net Migrants 100 96 92 T990 to 1993 1993 88 080 504 3 876 88 3 7 34 DEFINE PROGRAM Purpose 159 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Defines the beginning of a program and an optional program descriptor Physically it clears working space and is the first instruction of the default executable program segment called MAIN Syntax DEFINE PROGRAM desc statement END PROGRAM DO proc STOP Remarks desc isa descriptor for the program Tabular reports produced by the program have desc as part of their page heading The SELECT HEADING statement turns the heading on and off proc is the identifier of a procedure that should be executed at startup of the program when the program segment is loaded The DEFINE PROGRAM statement is optional i e you do not have to use it if you do use it however it must be the first statement of your program If you plan to save the program on disk for later execution then you must use the DEFINE PROGRAM statement to specify the beginning of the executable program and the OPEN SEGMENT statement to open a file on disk in which to store the program The END PROGRAM statement specifies the end of an executable program and writes it to a previously opened segment file The default segment identifier of a saved executable program is MAIN The STOP statement simply stops execution of a program and returns control to the PROMULA Main Menu or t
53. POPUP END WINDOW DEFINE VARIABLE pick The menu selection 10 Promula menu fields YPE STRING 12 v 10 Promula menu selection values bar 10 Promula menu fields STRING 12 END VARIABLE bar 1 File bar 2 Edit bar 3 MainMenu bar 4 Help f 1 Exit f 2 Restart f 3 Tutorial f 4 Editor 5 Compile f 6 Xeq 7 Resume 8 Offline gt 9 Applications 10 Language v i i 11 DEFINE PROCEDURE test SELECT PULLDOWN pick w1 1 1 gt Source 101 Xeq 102 Prn 103 Save 2 Save as 3 Print 4 re Exit 535 bar 2 Undo 6 Cut bs Copy 8 Paste 9 Delete 10 bar 3 1 v 1 hy 2 v 2 3 v 3 4 v 4 5 v 5 268 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 6 v 6 7 v 7 8 Fred 201 George 202 Mark 203 Lors 204 9 v 8 bi 10 v 9 bar 4 Help for field 22 Extended help 237 Keys help 24 Help index 25 Tutorial 26 About P90 27 WRITE CLEAR 0 pick test END PROCEDURE test 3 7 92 SELECT RELATION Purpose Defines a relation between the elements of a set and the contents of an array variable
54. REAL END VARIABLE 10 0 X MATRIX 10 0 Y MATRIX 1 3 1 10 100 10 i j k i j k DEFINE PROCEDURE plotarr SELECT GRAPHICS HIGH SELECT row col 3 pag 2 230 Promula Application Development System User s Manual PLO INE x y ITLE PLOT OF X i 10 3 100 k 10 versus Y i j k PLOT BAR x y TITLE BAR PLOT OF X it 10 3 100 k 10 and Y i j k SELECT row 2 col pag 2 PLO LINE TITLE PLOT OF X it10 3 100 k 10 versus Y i j k PLOT BAR TITLE BAR PLOT OF X i410 j 100 k 10 and Y i j k END PROCEDURE plotarr The resultant plots are shown on the following pages In the first two plots the ranges of sets col and pag are restricted to single values so the values of variable x as subscripted by set row are used to scale the x axis In the next two plots the ranges of sets row and pag are restricted to single values so the values of variable x as subscripted by set co1 are used to scale the x axis 3 7 68 RATE Purpose Is used in dynamic simulation procedures and has two functions 1 It signals the start of the RATE section of a dynamic procedure 2 It declares the time dependent variables to be computed at each time point of the simulation by linear interpolation or extrapolation from spe
55. SCRATCH scr A Scratch Variable END VARIABLE 3 Defining disk variables on a file DEFINE VARIABLE file dsk A Disk Variable END VARIABLE file 4 Defining virtual variables in memory DEFINE VARIABLE dd fixed Disk Variable DISK file dsk END VARIABLE 5 Using variables in equations B SUM r c A r c PRODUCT r c A r c 6 Putting values into a variable with an equation A 1 A RANDOM 1000 2000 A i j j i i 1 j EQ 1 7 Reading values into a variable DEFINE SET 86 Promula Application Development System User s Manual row 3 col 2 END DEFINE VARIABLE a row col A 2 Dimensional Array END VARIABLE READ A 1 3 5 OY 8 Displaying a variable WRITE a A 2 Dimensional Array COL 1 ROW 1 1 ROW 2 3 ROW 3 5 WRITE a 2 col row TITLE Display of a L Display of A 2 Dimensional Array ROW 1 ROW 2 ROW 3 COL 1 1 00 3 00 5 00 COL 2 2 00 4 00 6 00 9 Using disk variables directly off an array database The file variable notation Suppose you have created an array database and you wish to access one of its variables The name of the database is array dba and the name of the variable is sales The example below shows how to browse the variable sales directly DEFINE FILE f1 END OPEN f1 array dba BROWSE f1 sa
56. STATUS NEW any file on the current directory with the same name as filespec will be deleted before the new file is opened An old file is one which already exists You may read from an old segment file and modify existing data values but you cannot add new data to it Once opened under the STATUS NEW option you may write to a new file using the DEFINE PROGRAM and DEFINE SEGMENT statements The actual write operation is done at the conclusion of the segment definition i e it is initiated by the END SEGMENT or END PROGRAM statement Once opened you may load program segments into your working space with the READ SEGMENT statements Examples 1 Define a segmented program OPEN SEGMENT program xeq STATUS NEW DEFINE PROGRAM Segmented Program statements of MAIN DEFINE SEGMENT segl statements of segl DEFINE SEGMENT segll statements of segll END SEGMENT segll END SEGMENT segl DEFINE SEGMENT seg2 statements of seg2 END SEGMENT seg2 END PROGRAM 223 Promula Application Development System User s Manual In the above code the file program xeq was opened on disk and a number of program segments were written in it These segments are organized into the following hierarchical tree structure The DEFINE PROGRAM and END PROGRAM statements define the beginning and end respectively of the MAIN se
57. Search Path txt Selected File Specification C PRMDOC NEWSTAT TXT Selected File Path C PRMDOC Selected Fil am NEWSTAT Selected File Extension TXT 3 1 5 3 The INDIRECT Function PROMULA allows you to assign place holder variables to other variables using the ASK statement and the SELECT indirect statement These place holder variables are called indirects Indirects are defined as scalar variables that have an asterisk following their identifier The INDIRECT function is used to determine if an indirect is assigned to a variable It is a useful accessory to both the ASK statement and the SELECT indirect statement The syntax and use of this function are described below Syntax INDIRECT indir varlist Remarks 62 Promula Application Development System User s Manual indir is the identifier of an indirect variable varlist is a list of variable identifiers The INDIRECT function returns one if indir is assigned to a variable in varlist otherwise it returns a zero Example Here is an example of using the INDIRECT function DEFINE VARIABLI A value YPE REAL 10 4 VALUE 1 b B value YPE REAL 10 4 VALUE 2 e C value YPE REAL 10 4 VALUE 3 indir 5 ND VARIABLI EH EFINE PROCEDURE selvar ELECT indir O IF END BREAK selvar END DO IF INDIRECT indir a WRITE You have s
58. The A Matrix b rec col YPE REAL 10 1 The B Matrix recn rec YPE STRING 10 coln col YPE STRING 10 END VARIABLE orignl DEFINE RELATION orignl ROW rec recn COLUMN col coln END RELATION orignl recn i ROW i coln i COL i a i j i 10 j b i j i 10 j Example 1 Copy to the Console Given the definition of file original dba above the statement COPY orignl will display the full definition of file original dba on the console This output shows the names of the sets variables and relations stored in the original database DEFINE FILE ORIGNL TYPE ARRAY END OPEN ORIGNL ORIGNL dba STATUS NEW DEFINE SET ORIGNL REC 4 COL 6 END DEFINE VARIABLE ORIGNL A REC COL TYPE REAL 10 1 The A Matrix B REC COL TYPE REAL 10 1 The B Matrix RECN REC TYPE STRING 10 COL TYPE STRING 10 END DEFINE RELATION ORIGNL ROW REC RECN COLUMN COL COLN END The statement 127 Promula Application Development System User s Manual COPY orignl EXCLUDE a b DATA will display a partial definition of file original dba The EXCLUDE option tells PROMULA to exclude the variables a and b from the report and the DATA option causes the values of the remaining variables to be displayed alo
59. To return to the interrupted application press the Esc key again to return to the PROMULA Main Menu and then select Main Menu option 7 Resume an interrupted program 2 1 4 2 Alt H Get Context sensitive Help Pressing the Alt H keys simultaneously will give you context sensitive help i e it will give you access to that topic within a help file that is pertinent to the particular point of the application that you are currently working with This kind of local context sensitive help for the user has to be programmed in advance i e a help file must be available and the logic to access a particular help topic must be coded into the procedure that you are working with See DEFINE DIALOG for instructions on how to build help files BROWSE DIALOG and BROWSE TOPIC for instructions on accessing help files and DO IF HELP and DO IF ERROR VALUE for instructions on how to detect a call for help and branch to field specific help accordingly 2 1 5 Line Editing When using PROMULA in direct mode or responding to prompts generated by the PROMULA editor READ EDIT or ASK statements you will use PROMULA s line editor All information entered while in the line editor is saved in the line editor s buffer so that you may recall previously entered commands and data for modification and re entry The following key conventions are used by the PROMULA line editor KEY ACTION Enter Enter a line for processing and put it on the bottom of the line edito
60. VALUE 20 0 10 16 20 24 30 x xpnt Arbitrary X Values YPE REAL 10 2 y xpnt Arbitrary Y Values YPE REAL 10 2 END VARIABLE DEFINE FUNCTION fun fx fy An Arbitrary Function ifun fy fx The Inverse of an Arbitrary Function END DEFINE PROCEDURE shofun WRITE TABLE xpnt TITLE Function Values y fun x BODY FORMAT 20 10 END READ x 4 41 5 246 y fun x shofun Function Values y fun x XPNT 1 XPNT 2 XPNT 3 Arbitrary X Values 4 00 1 50 2 60 Arbitrary Y Values 20 00 22 00 27 60 READ y 18 2 22 34 x ifun y shofun Function Values y fun x XPNT 1 XPNT 2 XPNT 3 Arbitrary X Values 0 55 1450 3 00 Arbitrary Y Values 18 20 22 00 34 00 142 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 3 7 27 DEFINE LOOKUP Purpose Defines a functional relationship between two sets of numbers Syntax DEFINE LOOKUP name np xyoption END LOOKUP Remarks name is the identifier of the function np is the number of X Y pairs that define the function xyoption is used to specify values for the ordered pairs in the function and is of the form X Xir 2 r Y Ya Yor Yop The X Y option on the DEFINE LOOKUP statement is used to specify the independent X and dependent Y values associated with the function Each list of values must contain the number of points defined for the function np The X and Y values that define a function may also be specified via th
61. WRITE a2 170 Promula Application Development System User s Manual WRITE a3 al 1 a2 2 a3 iter itertl END WHILE END solvl RRR Running the solv1 procedure produced the following dialog solvl Enter 3 values as your initial guess for the solution of sysl 1 X1 A solution for sysl is lst Unknown 5 00000 2nd Unknown 2 00000 3rd Unknown 1 00000 A solution for sysl is lst Unknown 1 00000 2nd Unknown 2 00000 3rd Unknown 0 20000 A solution for sysl is lst Unknown 5 00000 2nd Unknown 2 00000 3rd Unknown 1 00000 3 7 36 DEFINE TABLE Purpose Defines a multi variable tabular report for the program Syntax DEFINE TABLE tabl sets TITLE text FORMAT rw cw BODY textl1 varl fmt1 text2 var2 fmt2 END Remarks tabl is the identifier of the table sets is a list of the identifiers of the sets dimensioning the variables in the table Upon display the descriptors of the first set become the column headings of the table the descriptors of the other sets if any classify the pages of the table The descriptors of all sets missing from the list become the row descriptors of the table This list must contain at least one set text is any text you wish to show as a title for the table The title may include variables and other format characters according to the rules defined in the WRITE text state
62. a screen area that was opened to a static window only ends the association between the window and the screen The window and its contents remain on the screen To permanently erase a static window from the display after closing it you must clear the display with the statements CLEAR MAIN WRITE CLEAR 0 Alternatively you may erase a window by opening a static window on top of it 1 by covering it up See also DEFINE WINDOW and OPEN WINDOW statements and the discussion of Advanced Windows 3 7 22 COMPUTE Equation Purpose Makes the value or values of a variable equal to the value or values of a numeric or character expression Syntax COMPUTE var subs expression subs Remarks var is a variable identifier subs is a list of set identifiers or dummy subscripts When used such subscripts denote multiple equations that apply to the cells of multidimensional arrays expression is a numeric or character expression Examples 124 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The verb COMPUTE is required for use with the expressions involving the set colon operators For example given the definition below DEFINE SET 100 END SET the statements COMPUTE rec R 50 SELECT rec will redefine the default size of set xec changing it from 100 to 50 The length of the rec s selection vector may be set to 10 elements by the
63. a set Syntax SELECT set list or SELECT set Remarks set is the identifier of the set whose elements are selected list isalist of element selections and may be of the form k l m t where the notation m t means from m to t and where k 1 m and t are any of the following 1 integers from 1 to N where N is the size of the set 2 identifiers of scalar variables whose values are in the range from to N 3 the values of CODE or STRING type variables that have been related to set through a KEY relation 4 time values that have been related to the elements of the set through a TIME relation is an asterisk that means clear the present set selection and restore the set to its default size and order as defined by the DEFINE SET statement A set will be restored to a size other than its default size if you have executed a COMPUTE set R statement before the restore see the discussion of sets in Chapter 1 In its normal setting a set has a number of elements N that are ordered sequentially from 1 to N The SELECT set statement allows you to change both the range and the relative ordering of the set elements A set selection is in effect until a new set selection is specified Following a set selection all expressions involving variables that are subscripted by that set are restricted by the range and ordering of the set selection A set selection is valid only if it has values between 1 and N the size of the set E
64. abalns L abalns SELECT PRINTER OFF For more information about saving a report on disk refer to Chapter 3 of this manual especially the WRITE variable WRITE TABLE WRITE menu WRITE file and SELECT OUTPUT statements 2 2 4 3 Plotting Variables PROMULA s PLOT statement is used to generate graphs and charts For example the statement PLOT BAR balns TITLE Budget Program balns L abalns L abalns will display a bar chart of the monthly balance variable bains This sample PROMULA bar plot is displayed below The PLOT function has many options and is fully discussed in Chapter 3 of this manual 2 2 5 Interface Design KEY TOPICS 1 Interactive and Noninteractive Programs 2 Selections 3 Editing Data 4 Multi page Displays and Windowing 2 2 5 1 Interactive and Noninteractive Programs The interface of a program is the way in which it interacts with its users i e how it receives and transmits information Application program interfaces can be classified as being interactive noninteractive or a mixture of the two Noninteractive applications are controlled by the instructions they receive from an external text file These files usually contain information that tells the program what to do and what data values to use as inputs Noninteractive programs can be inflexible because they can only be told to do things that they can read from their command files They may also be
65. all you need to do is type in the topic headers and the tutorial text A dialog file is initially defined as a series of topics via the DEFINE DIALOG statement Upon execution of the BROWSE DIALOG statement the topic titles form a menu from which you may select and browse the topic texts A specific topic may be displayed with the BROWSE TOPIC statement Dialog files are demonstrated in the examples given in the DEFINE DIALOG statement 3 1 9 4 Access Methods PROMULA supports three basic ways to access the contents of a datafile 1 Sequential access In text files Here information is accessed in terms of variable length text records The records are accessed in sequence one record at a time starting at 1 and ending at N where N is the last record in the file Before accessing the N 1 th record you must first access the N th record 2 Random access In random files Here information is accessed in terms of structured fixed length binary records The records are accessed at random one record at a time by simply specifying the record number or by using an inverted file to select the records of the file that contain a field that matches a specified key 3 Direct access In array files Here information is accessed in terms of variables the notion of record does not apply The variables may be either single valued scalars or multi valued arrays Array file variables are value addressable i e you may access single data
66. allow you to modify the appearance of the screen to create professional looking and user friendly applications Custom designed help screens popup menus and flexible color control will improve the appearance and usability of your programs 1 3 19 Mathematical and Statistical Functions PROMULA supports a library of mathematical and statistical functions as well as a number of array matrix operations such as summation product minimum maximum sorting etc 1 3 20 Command Line Recall A buffer stores all commands entered at the keyboard so that they may easily be recalled for modification and reentry This feature greatly enhances the utility of PROMULA s Command Mode and its Text and Data Editors 1 3 21 Multi platform Performance PROMULA runs on most of the major computer platforms including IBM MSDOS VAX VMS Apple Macintosh IBM AIX SUN UNIX IBM TSO and platforms supporting the X Window System Your PROMULA applications can be used without modification wherever PROMULA runs Promula Application Development System User s Manual 2 PROMULA BASICS This chapter is intended to introduce computer users with little programming experience and no familiarity with PROMULA to the basics of the PROMULA language and the PROMULA Application Development System The first part of the chapter illustrates how to use the PROMULA application development shell to create and use applications the second part of the chapter covers the fundamen
67. approximately 40 pages of text may be stored in a single BROWSE COMMENT statement The keyword END must be entered starting in column 1 and must be capitalized The text will be shown by page in the Comment Screen of the display A prompt at the bottom of the Prompt Screen will describe how to browse the text For more details see the sections on Basic Windows and Advanced Windows See also the BROWSE menu statement 3 7 8 BROWSE DIALOG Purpose Displays a dialog menu for browsing the topics of a dialog file Syntax BROWSE DIALOG filespec Remarks 103 Promula Application Development System User s Manual filespec isa quoted string or string variable containing the name of the physical disk file where the dialog file that you want to browse is stored This name is formatted according to the file naming conventions for your operating system Upon execution the BROWSE DIALOG statement displays a menu whose selection fields are the titles of the topics contained in the dialog file From this menu you may browse any of the topics The display will be shown in the window opened to the Help Screen if one is active Examples The use of this statement is demonstrated in the context of the example given in the DEFINE DIALOG statement 3 7 9 BROWSE FILE Purpose Displays a text file for browsing Syntax BROWSE FILE filename Remarks filename is a quoted string or string variable containing the n
68. are executed by the statement SELECT PULLDOWN option menudesc where menudesc is the description of the pulldown menu and option is a variable that will contain the number of the selection picked In both cases the value of opcion may be used to determine alternative execution paths When displayed all pick menus contain a number of selection fields You may highlight the desired field by pressing the arrow keys To execute your selection press the Enter key For all pick menus you may also chose an option by positioning the mouse sprite over the desired field and clicking the mouse button Simple and popup pick menu fields may also be selected by single keypresses as described below Simple pick menus allow you to easily create a simple selection display In these menus a number of selection fields are laid out on a single screen template Each selection field in the menu is text that is bracketed by two backslashes V in the menu template The selection fields are ordered from 1 to n as you go from left to right and from top to bottom of the menu template When a simple pick menu is used in a SELECT menu statement PROMULA clears the window opened to the Main Screen displays the menu and highlights the first selection field Selections may be made using the function keys or the numeric keys directly The F1 numeric 1 key picks the first selection in the menu the F2 numeric 2 key picks the second selection and so fo
69. by the number of months used in the sum The notation mons N has a value equal to the number of elements in the selection vector for set mons which may be changed by a set selection statement It is also possible to define your own functions in PROMULA to use in equations Defining functions in PROMULA is done with the DEFINE FUNCTION and DEFINE LOOKUP statements For more information on writing equations see the discussion of the PROMULA nouns Equation and Expression and the COMPUTE statement 2 2 4 Report Generation KEY TOPICS 1 Writing Variables 2 Saving Reports on Disk 3 Plotting Variables Report generation is a critical part of any application program An application must be able to generate reports that are of interest to someone or it is not worth writing PROMULA provides several report generation statements that can manage multidimensional data for you as well as a flexible WRITE statement that can be used for complicated or fancy text report generation There is also a PLOT statement that can be used to generate a variety of graphic reports 2 2 4 1 Writing Variables The budget program computes the monthly expenses income and balance as well as the annual total and average expense income and balance These values can all be displayed in a single one page summary report There are several ways to generate such a report The technique used in the budget program is to collect the values of the three monthly variab
70. cells values in them or any connected subset of their values For example if A is a four dimensional variable classified by row column page and year then you have the following direct access options 1 You can access all values of A 2 Youcan access a three dimensional part of it say all the rows columns and pages for a particular year 3 Youcan access a two dimensional part of it say all the rows and columns for a particular page and year 4 You access a one dimensional part of it say all the years for a particular row column and page 5 You can access a single cell of it say the value for row 3 column 2 page 2 and year 10 This kind of selectivity is particularly useful when you have very large arrays in your disk database that do not fit in your working space In addition to the direct access method variables in array files may be accessed virtually or dynamically via local variables See Chapter 4 for details of this 3 1 9 5 File Names Each file has two names a logical name and a physical name 71 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The logical name is the name by which the file is referenced in a PROMULA program A logical name can be any string of alphanumeric characters whose first character is alphabetic Only the first six characters are significant The logical name for a segment file is introduced via the DEFINE SEGMENT statement For unsegmented programs the DEFINE PR
71. column descriptor values are used to label columns of values classified by the set in WRITE BROWSE and EDIT statements KEY specifies the variable whose values will serve as the codes for a set s elements If no ROW relation for the set is specified the code values also referred to as keys are used as the primary descriptors for the set If no COLUMN relation for the set is specified the code values are used as column descriptors In addition set codes may function as set element identifiers in displays of the set and in coded set selections TIME specifies the variable whose values will serve as the time values for a set s elements If no ROW relation for the set is specified the time values also referred to as keys are used as the primary descriptors for the set If no COLUMN relation for the set is specified the time values are used as column descriptors In addition time values may function as set element identifiers in displays of the set and in coded set selections If a set has a TIME relation it becomes a Time Series Set A related feature is PROMULA s TYPEcset option for variables A variable of this type displays the row descriptor of the set element which corresponds to its value For example if a variable ms has the type specification TYPE month 15 and ms contains the value 2 then the statement WRITE ms would display the word February with a width of 15 characters Furthermore if ms is assigned any value that
72. described One dimensional arrays vectors are treated as a single set of observations Two and higher dimensional arrays are partitioned into sets of observations fmt is an integer specifying the number of decimal digits for the reported statistics The default fmt is the number of decimals specified by the TYPE specification in the definition of the variable s specified in vars The report generator uses the following number of decimal digits for each statistic Format of reports produced by the DO DESCRIBE statement STATISTIC NUMBER OF DECIMALS DIGITS 1 Number of observations 0 2 Number of excluded observations 0 3 Number of valid observations 0 4 Arithmetic mean fmt 5 Variance fmt 6 Standard error fmt 1 7 Standard deviation fmt 1 183 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 8 Skewness fmt 2 9 Kurtosis fmt 2 10 Range fmt 11 Minimum value fmt 12 Maximum value fmt A title Descriptive Statistics for vardesc is printed at the top of each page vardesc is the descriptor of the array being described Subtitles that consist of the row descriptors for sets specified in sets appear when more than one report page is produced Examples The following code illustrates the DO DESCRIBE statement First a three dimensional variable a is defined and displayed DEFINE S row 4 col 2 pag 2 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE a row col pag VA
73. dialog below WRITE emps Employee List George 0 Fred 0 Lois 0 Mark 0 emps i i WRITE emps Employee List George George Fred Fred 177 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Lois Lois Mark Mark WRITE empc An Employee 0 empc 4 WRITE empc An Employee Mark 3 7 38 DEFINE WINDOW Purpose Define a window Syntax DEFINE WINDOW name area text border bar POPUP END Remarks name is the logical identifier of the window area is a list of four numbers defining the location and size of the window The syntax of this list is XL Y1 X2 Y2 where X1 defines the leftmost column of the window Y1 defines the topmost row of the window X2 defines the rightmost column of the window Y2 defines the bottom most row of the window For a 25 row by 80 column text screen row values must be in the range 0 to 24 and column values must be in the range 0 to 79 Any window area that is off the screen or is overlapped by another window will not be visible text is a list of up to four keywords separated by slashes that define the appearance of normal text in the window The syntax of this list is foregr backgr BRIGHT BLINK where foregr defines the foreground color backgr defines the background color BRIGHT causes the foreground to be bright BLINK causes the text to blink 178 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Valid colors
74. displays in Figure 2 9 are not complete because the default labels for the elements of sets mons and exps need to be replaced with more meaningful ones There are several methods of relating descriptive information to program sets One simple and flexible way is to define a vector variable that is dimensioned by the set whose elements you want to label then assign appropriate set element descriptions to the values of the variable and relate the variable to the set Let s do this for set mons First define a vector variable to contain the set element labels 26 Promula Application Development System User s Manual DEFINE VARIABLE monsn mons TYPE STRING 4 Month Names END VARIABLE The statement above defines a vector of 12 values called monsn The format type of this variable s values is STRING 4 String type variables can contain alphanumeric data letters numbers and other characters The default display format for the values of variable monsn has a width of four characters Second read in the values to be used as labels for set mons using the READ variable statement In this case we will use three letter abbreviations for each month READ monsn 4 JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC The statement READ monsn 4 tells PROMULA to start reading in column one of the next line and to read four characters for each of the 12 values of the vector variable monsn The values of mons
75. does not fit in your working space Large program management is achieved by using files PROMULA files can be classified as falling into one of the three functional types 1 Data files for storing data in text or binary form 2 Segment files for storing the executable code and data of PROMULA applications 3 Dialog files for storing on line help libraries The above three types of files used alone or in combination give you the flexibility and power to develop and manage large scale applications 67 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 3 1 9 1 Data Files Data files are used for the storage and retrieval of program data or variables thus they extend the data storage available to a program Data files are of four types 1 Text files of sequential access records 2 Random files of direct access records 3 Inverted files that index the records of random files 4 Array files of value addressable multidimensional variables 3 1 9 1 1 Text Files Text files are files that contain text and may be created and or changed by a text editor Text consists of ASCII codes thus text files are also known as ASCII files Text files are sequential access files of variable length text records Each record consists of data items that are laid out in lines of variable length up to a maximum of 255 characters Sequential access means that in order to access the N 1 th record in the file you must first access the N t
76. execute the program use the OPEN SEGMENT and READ SEGMENT statements Examples The statements below define a program named by default MAIN and write the executable program code on a disk file named hello xeq OPEN SEGMENT hello xeq STATUS NEW DEFINE PROGRAM A Program DEFINE PROCEDURE proc WRITE Hello World END proc END PROGRAM DO proc To read this program for execution use the statements OPEN SEGMENT hello xeq READ SEGMENT MAIN or the statement RUN PROGRAM hello xeq The procedure proc is executed automatically at program startup This program could also be started by selecting option 6 from the PROMULA Main Menu and specifying hello as the name of the program to be executed 3 7 62 END SEGMENT Purpose Ends the definition of a program segment and writes the segment code and data to the currently open segment file Syntax END SEGMENT seg DO proc Remarks 219 Promula Application Development System User s Manual seg is the identifier of a segment as it appeared on the DEFINE SEGMENT statement that began the segment proc is the identifier of a procedure in segment seg When the segment is loaded this procedure is executed automatically Upon compilation this statement writes on a disk file the information of the segment The start of the segment is the DEFINE SEGMENT seg statement The segment is
77. fldnum DESCRIPTION flddsc Remarks menu is the name of the pick menu that is to be modified menu must refer to a pick menu that was labeled VARIABLE when it was defined fldnum is an integer expression providing the sequence number of the field in menu that is to be modified 1 num may be a numeric constant or a numeric variable flddsc is a quoted string or string variable containing a new label for the field to be modified The text will be left justified and truncated to fit in the space allocated for the field in the definition of menu If the DESCRIPTION clause is omitted then the field label is blanked and the bounce bar will never go to the field See also the DEFINE MENU statement Examples The code fragment below may be used to experiment with the SELECT FIELD statement DEFINE WINDOW sw 00 00 79 22 white black none pw 01 24 79 24 white black top single navy black END WINDOW DEFINE MENU pickit VARIABLE POPUP sw pw Your Options are as follows 1 First option N 2 Second option 3 Third option 4 Fourth option X 5 SELECT FIELD N END FIELD 1 SELECT 1 ACTION 1 FIELD 1 END FIELD 2 SELECT 2 ACTION 2 FIELD 2 END FIELD 3 S CT 3 ACTION 3 FIELD 3 END FIELD 4 SELECT 4 ACTION 4 FIELD 4 END FIELD 5 S CT 5 ACTION 5 S CT FIELD E
78. for all dsub elements a single arbitrary dyer element and a range say 20 of the dqst elements In addition the programmer wants to reorder the dimensions of the local variable as a qst by sub array The syntax required for our example is DEFINE SET sub 500 Survey Subject qst 20 Survey Question END SET DEFINE VARIABL Ed yp Year Pointer gp Question Pointer ldata qst sub Survey Responses DISK af data BASE sub qp yp ORDER sub qst END VARIABLE 310 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The BASE parameter of the DISK option tells PROMULA that the variables qp and yp are basepoints for the second and third dimensions of the disk variable and that the set sub corresponds to its first dimension The ORDER parameter of the DISK option tells PROMULA that the local sets sub and qst correspond to the first and second dimensions of the disk variable and that ranges of values should be accessed from these dimensions The third subscript of the ORDER parameter is an asterisk indicating that a single element of the third dimension of the disk variable should be accessed Given the above definition any 20 consecutive dqst elements may be accessed by assigning the basepoint first element value to variable and then executing a READ DISK statement The programmer must be careful that the value of qp is at least 1 and no greater than 80 whenever a R
79. functions defined by the DEFINE FUNCTION statement w and d have the values specified in the DEFINE VARIABLE statement for the function variables and p is the value specified in the definition of the row descriptors of the set subscripting the function variables text isa title for the display and can contain text variables and other formatting characters as described in the WRITE text statement Examples The WRITE function statement is illustrated below DEFINE SET pnt 6 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE x pnt The X values y pnt The Y values p pnt PNT Names TYPE STRING 6 END VARIABLE 285 Promula Application Development System User s Manual x i i y i i 2 p i PNT i SELECT ROW pnt p DEFINE FUNCTION fx x y END FUNCTION DEFINE LOOKUP gx 6 X 1 2 3 4 5 6 Y 2 8 18 32 50 72 END LOOKUP Given the above definitions the statements WRITE x 10 10 4 TITLE Y f x x 2 WRITE gx 3 6 1 TITLE Y g x 2x 2 produce the output below Y f x x 2 1 2 PNT 1 1 0000 1 0000 PNT 2 2 0000 4 0000 PNT 3 3 0000 9 0000 PNT 4 4 0000 16 0000 PNT 5 5 0000 25 0000 PNT 6 6 0000 36 0000 C Ch EQ CE a a e 3 7 105 WRITE menu Purpose Displays a data menu including the values of its data fields This statement i
80. given a value via an implicit read disk WRITE dd operation that occurs after it is CLEARed from A Dynamic Disk Variable 2 memory then used in a WRITE statement CLEAR dd WRITE dd A Dynamic Disk Variable 3 rp 1 Variable dd is given a value via an implicit read disk CLEAR dd operation that occurs after it is CLEARed from scr dd memory then used on the right hand side of an WRITE scr equation A Scratch Variable 1 WRITE dd A Dynamic Disk Variable 1 3 7 21 CLEAR WINDOW Purpose 123 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Tells PROMULA to stop using a user defined window as the display area for a functional screen Syntax CLEAR type Remarks type isthe type of functional screen to be returned to its default behavior and can be one of the following MAIN the Main input output Screen PROMPT the Prompt Screen COMMENT the Comment Screen ERROR the Error Screen HELP the Help Screen This statement ends the association between a window and a functional screen that was started by a previous OPEN WINDOW statement The effect of this statement depends on the popup type of the window that was opened to the functional screen being cleared Clearing a screen that was opened to a popup window i e a window that was defined with the POPUP option immediately removes the window from the display Furthermore any text that was covered by the window will be redrawn Clearing
81. have opened a window to the Help Screen the dialog file will be shown in this window otherwise the Main Screen is used See the DEFINE WINDOW and OPEN WINDOW statements and the discussion of windowing for details of this feature Popup menus have an optional HELP parameter as part of their field statements This parameter specifies a topic by its sequence number in a dialog file When the user presses Alt H in response to a POPUP menu PROMULA opens the file specified with the SELECT HELP statement and displays the TOPIC whose sequence number matches the help code of the currently highlighted field in the POPUP menu HIERARCHY ON OFF to control the interpretation of equations When HIERARCHY ON operator precedence rules are turned on and expressions are evaluated using algebraic hierarchy precedence This is the default 262 Promula Application Development System User s Manual When HIERARCHY OFF operator precedence rules are turned off and expressions are evaluated using left to right linear precedence LINES page to change the number of lines per page to page The default page length is 25 lines The length of CHARACTER mode plots can be controlled by using the SELECT LINES statement The number of lines written by the WRITE menu statement also is controlled by the SELECT LINES statement page is an integer constant or a numeric variable MAP ON OFF to produce a memory map with the compilation listing When MAP OFF no mem
82. in a segment file on disk Computations using scratch variables will be slower than using fixed variables because PROMULA must do more internal calculations to access their values Scratch variables are sometimes referred to as local variables Disk Disk variables are stored on disk in an array file They are defined with a DEFINE VARIABLE file statement Disk variables are also referred to as database variables The values of disk variables may be accessed directly on disk and they may be accessed dynamically or virtually in memory via scratch or fixed variables which are related to them See Chapter 4 for a discussion of relating local and disk variables Example The set type variable When displayed a set w type variable will show the contents of the set element whose index value it contains This correspondence is only valid for index values between 1 and the size of the set all other values are converted to 0 The following example illustrates the TYPE set w option DEFINE SET emp 4 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE empn emp Employee Names TYPE STRING 10 emps emp Employee List YPE emp 40 empc An Employee YPE emp 10 END VARIABLE DEFINE RELATION row emp empn END RELATION READ empn George Fred Lois Mark Given the above defintions the set type variable may be used for displaying categorical data as illustrated in the
83. interactive selection list The SELECT VARIABLE statement automatically prompts the user to make selections from all the sets dimensioning a specified variable The ASK statement with the SET set option can be used to allow the user to make selections from the specified set More information and examples of these statements are available in Chapter 3 2 2 5 3 Editing Data One of the most critical of all interface functions is editing data PROMULA offers a general purpose data editor that facilitates interactive data editing for PROMULA s multidimensional array variables For example the statement EDIT expns will display the array variable expns for interactive spread sheet style data editing The editing screen is displayed below 44 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Monthly Expenses by Category FOOD CAR SERVICE UTILITIES CAR INS 286 64 143 86 45 276 76 166 84 280 81 134 96 294 05 99 98 286 98 88 86 275 43 152 98 269 81 103 87 289 93 22 75 72 261 35 LL T6 258 71 127 88 250 12 105 91 272 28 93 93 K DA DP BRD BA BB BBW uj 3k AE J JUI A SE N DE O XO XO IO XO IO 01 O1 O1 Fn Shift Fn PgUp PgDn Home Arrows Select Enter Note that like the WRITE variable statement the EDIT var
84. is not between 1 and 12 the range of set month itis given the value zero instead See DEFINE RELATION and SELECT RELATION for more details 77 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 3 1 17 Segment Definition The segment is a part of a program that may be saved on disk for later loading and execution Remarks A program segment is bounded by a DEFINE SEGMENT statement at its beginning and an END SEGMENT statement at its end A large program may be segmented into a hierarchical tree structure of segments For simple one segment programs the program segment should be initiated by DEFINE PROGRAM statement and ended with an END PROGRAM statement The enclosed program segment is given the default name MAIN Chapter 4 describes program segmentation in detail 3 1 18 Set Definition A finite set of discrete elements that are ordered from 1 to N where N is the size of the set Remarks A set has the following characteristics A unique identifier A size An optional descriptor An optional format specification for displays of the set and arrays dimensioned by the set An optional disk reference to descriptors of the set s elements Sets are used primarily as subscripts of array variables and serve to build their multidimensional structure They may also be used to control program flow and to provide descriptive information for reports The descriptors associated with the elements of a set classify the values of
85. is the default When DEBUG OFF PROMULA issues an error message but does not pause ECHOR filespec to specify a file in which to save an audit trail of PROMULA statements executed from command mode The syntax of this statement is exactly like the SELECT OUTPUT statement but instead of capturing the output generated by PROMULA in a text file this statement causes the PROMULA command mode statements to be captured It is not necessary to SELECT PRINTER ON OFF to activate deactivate the command capture filespec is a quoted string or string variable containing the name of the file to be used for command capture To turn the statement capture off and close the file execute a SELECT ECHOR statement FACTOR var to specify a variable whose value s should be used as a scaling factor for all numeric data reports displayed by the WRITE variable and BROWSE variable statements To deactivate the FACTOR option execute a SELECT FACTOR statement var is the identifier of the variable to be used as the scaling factor The value s of the scaling factor is multiplied times each value to be displayed and the resultant product is shown If var is a multidimensional array the set correspondence if applicable is maintained between var and the variable displayed The default value for var is one FOREGROUND BLACK WHITE NAVY GREEN BLUE RED PURPLE YELLOW to change the color of the Main Screen foreground GHEADING ON OFF to tu
86. lii Table Of Contents 3 7 92 SELECT RELATION ort e t RR 269 3 7 93 SELEC Set iai egre o ORE EE RU ia ER edt Rp n RD RP EUR rre 271 3 494 SELEGCHISET iita e RR RR PERRO E ER EUR ERR RR ERES e PRI ERROR RAN ERE URS 272 3 795 SELEGT set IF iie eae b RE E HU e E Pt Ere 274 3 7 96 SSELEGT VARIABLE etae p ma RE REQUE I A ERE Ea RI EROR RAD E EH 275 LA FARO UNE 277 3 77 98 STOP M EE 280 3 7 99 STOP PROMUJULA eot ere i P RF 280 3 7100 TIME ien Bed uenia netu paa eee E E ied 281 3 7 10I WRITE COMMENT cau evan fo Up E Pe eda CPP t Peer 281 35 7 102 WRITE DISK ae ea Em 282 283 SEZ AOA WRITE PUNCH ON TER 285 3 7105 WRITE MON hes Em 286 3 7 100 WRITE Sel pu ee GERE EE E E a E OA aE E ETE AE a OPE Pure EOS PE RC pate 287 3 107 WRITE TABLE nee eret Re etie EE eee Te rb edle vete te ree Ee tee Sere to date Deve pace 288 327 108 WRITE HOKE iicet eret ERE ENSURE EO eee EP e Sunes Ue Sues eere tree EET gue 289 3 7 109 WRITE TEXT NEM 292 37 110 WRITE VALUE segment reete cetero terere ee posted oad egere Unete doves EN pep 293 SEF ALT WRITE NQPi ble EE 294 4 PROGRAM AND DATA MANAGEMENT scccsssssssssssssssrsssscssrsesscssnsesscssnsesscsensonscssssesscsensessesensnss
87. local and disk variables must all be of the same type and the disk variables must be contiguous in a single database The 312 Promula Application Development System User s Manual DISK option should specify the identifier of the first of the contiguous variables to be accessed For example the two dimensional local variable data may be mapped across the disk vectors name adr1 adr2 and phon as shown below Database Definition Fixed Variable Definitions DEFINE FILE DEFINE FILE af TYPE ARRAY ARRAY FILE af TYPE ARRAY ARRAY FILE END FILE END FILE OPEN af test dba STATUS NEW DEFINE SET DEFINE SET 100 100 END SE var 4 DEFINE VARIABLE af END SET name rec TYPE STRING 30 NAME adrl rec TYPE STRING 30 Address 1 DEFINE VARIABLE adr2 rec YPE STRING 30 Address 2 data rec var TYPE STRING 30 Data phon rec YPE STRING 30 PHONE DISK af name END VARIABLE af END VARIABLE CLEAR AF 4 2 Program Management in PROMULA In addition to helping you manage data with array variables and database files PROMULA can help you manage large programs with segments and segment files If your program code or data becomes too large to fit in your working space you may divide it into segments that can be transferred to and from disk on an as ne
88. menudesc wind should be a POPUP type window menudesc is the description of the pulldown menu The syntax of menudesc is as follows fldcodl 141612 fldcod2 fldlb13 fldcod3 p where fldlbln isa label for the nth menu item Each 1dlb1n may be either a quoted string or string variable fldcodn is either a numeric action code or a submenu description for the nth menu item If fldcodn isa numeric action code its value will be stored in option when the field is selected and execution will continue with the code following the SELECT PULLDOWN statement If 1dcodn is a submenu description the submenu will be displayed for selection If 1dcodn is followed by a slash in a submenu definition a line will be drawn across the submenu Each submenu description has the same general form as menudesc The fields of the top level menu are displayed in a row across wind The fields of any second level submenu drop down from their parent field The fields of any third level submenu are displayed to the right of their parent field The size of the 267 Promula Application Development System User s Manual window used to display a submenu is determined by PROMULA according to the number of fields it contains and the length of its longest field label Examples The example below illustrates the use of the SELECT PULLDOWN statement DEFINE WINDOW w1 1 1 78 1 WHITE BLACK FULL SINGLE NAVY BLACK WHITE NAVY
89. mons year lobarp days mons year END VARIABLE dba YPE REAL 10 2 High Barometric Pressure YPE REAL 10 2 Low Barometric Pressure CLEAR dba Notice that an array file must be physically opened before its structure can be defined This is because PROMULA physically initializes the entire file when its structure is defined for the first time To add variables to an existing array file open the file STATUS OLD Alternatively this weather data coud be set up with random and inverted files as follows DEFINE VARIABLE dbf wthdsc TYPE STRING 20 Description hitemp TYPE REAL 10 1 High Temp lotemp TYPE REAL 10 1 Low Temp hihumd TYPE REAL 10 2 High Humidity lohumd TYPE REAL 10 2 Low Humidity hibarp TYPE REAL 10 2 High Barometric Pressure lobarp TYPE REAL 10 2 Low Barometric Pressure wthdat TYPE DATE 10 Date END VARIABLE dbf DEFINE VARIABLE dbi datekey YPE DATE 10 Date Key daterec YPE INTEGER 10 Record END VARIABLE dbi Notice that random and inverted type files do not have to be opened when their structure is defined Of course they have to be opened when they are accessed For examples of using random and inverted files see the SELECT file statement For examples of reading and writing to text files see the READ file and WRITE
90. notation refers to the vector of values subscripted by set which contain the time series values KEY w diskopt Where w is the maximum width in characters for codes associated with the set diskopt is a reference to a database variable that contains the code values The KEY option on the DEFINE SET statement is one way to specify that short keys codes are to be associated with set elements The information supplied with the KEY option specifies the maximum width in characters of each code and optionally the location of those codes on a database Codes may get their values from a diskopt parameter a READ set statement or a relation to a variable on disk or in the program via the SELECT RELATION or DEFINE RELATION statements The set element codes are used in several ways In the ASK ELSE SET set and SELECT VARIABLE statements the user may enter the set codes to specify their selections rather than entry sequence numbers Another use of set codes is displays of set elements by the SELECT ENTRY SELECT SET WRITE set and BROWSE set statements The code values may also be used to make set selections in the SELECT set statement and to indicate subscript values in array expressions ROW w diskopt Where w is the maximum width in characters for codes associated with the set 166 Promula Application Development System User s Manual diskopt is a reference to a database variable that contains the code values The ROW opti
91. of a table A table may be browsed interactively by using the BROWSE TABLE statement Examples The following program demonstrates the WRITE TABLE statement DEFINE SET row 3 col 6 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE a row col A Data Set b row col B data set tot col The Total of A and B END VARIABLE DEFINE PROCEDURE wrttab LINES 60 WRITE TABLE col TITLE The Table Title FORMAT 20 10 BODY tot 1 The A Values a 2 The B Values b END PROCEDURE wrttab 1 b 2 tot SUM r a r c b r c Given the above definitions the statement DO wrttab produces the following output The Table Title COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 COL 5 COL 6 The Total of A and B 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 The A Values ROW 1 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 ROW 2 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 ROW 3 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 The B Values ROW 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 ROW 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ROW 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 7 108 WRITE text Purpose Writes text in the Main Screen 289 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Syntax WRITE param text Remarks text is a specification for the text being written and may contain any of the following text write text enclosed in quotes as is You can use single quotes within double quotes or vice versa if you wa
92. of disk variables may be 298 Promula Application Development System User s Manual accessed directly on disk and they may be accessed dynamically or virtually in memory via scratch or fixed variables which are related to them There are three methods of accessing the values of disk variables Direct In direct access the file containing the disk variable is opened and the variable is used like a fixed variable This is the slowest and least flexible method of accessing disk variables but it requires no special programming With the direct access method disk variable values are addressed on disk as needed any changes made to the disk variable are saved in the array file In order to use direct access the definition of the disk variable must be in memory Virtual In virtual access an appropriate fixed or scratch variable called a local variable is associated with a disk variable This local variable is used to access the values of the disk variable on disk PROMULA manages transferring the data between the disk and local variable automatically Virtual access allows programmers to access disk variables through local variables which are defined in programs that are physically separate from the ones which defined the disk variables It also allows programmers to access different disk variables through a single local variable Dynamic In dynamic access an appropriate local variable is associated with a disk variable This local variable is
93. of dynamic models these include time series sets system Time parameters the TIME RATE and LEVEL statements and dynamic procedures Dynamic procedures contain RATE and LEVEL statements which divide the procedure into three separate sections 1 The Initial section Here all time parameters have the values that were assigned by the last TIME statement The variables DT BEGINNING ENDING maintain these original values throughout the run of the dynamic procedure The Initial section includes all the statements in the procedure preceding the RATE section and its equations are evaluated once at the beginning time point or interval of the simulation period 156 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 2 The RATE section The start of the RATE section is indicated by the RATE statement The RATE section is the second section of a dynamic procedure and its equations are evaluated at each time point or interval of the simulation run In contrast to LEVEL equations both sides of RATE equations are evaluated at the same time point or interval At the end of the RATE section the value of the time parameter TIME is examined If TIME DT exceeds the value of ENDING the execution of the procedure ends If TIME DT does not exceed the value of ENDING then TIME is incremented by DT and the execution of the procedure proceeds to the LEVEL section 3 The LEVEL section The start of the LEVEL section is indicated by th
94. on disk for later execution Use Main Menu option 5 when you wish to compile a file containing the PROMULA source code If the results of the compilation are saved in a segment file it can be executed either interactively i e directly from the console using Main Menu option 6 or in batch mode from a text input file using Main Menu option 8 Compiling a program means converting it from source instructions to executable instructions Source instructions are the statements of a program as you write them for PROMULA to understand and compile i e convert to executable instructions Executable instructions in turn are instructions that PROMULA converts to machine instructions which the computer can execute at run time To compile the demo program DEMO PRM select Main Menu option 5 and respond to the system prompts as shown in the dialog below Enter the filename of the program to be compiled DEMO PRM Where do you want the compilation listing N one C onsole P rinter or D isk P Promula Application Development System User s Manual Do you want the compiler to pause on errors Y es or N o Y The dialog above tells PROMULA to compile the source program stored in file DEMO PRM to list the results of the compilation on the printer and to pause if any errors are detected In the dialog above the questions are issued by PROMULA while the responses following the prompt are entered by the
95. only status by the operating system it may be read from but not modified and it may be accessed by more than one user at the same time Examples 1 In this example the array file 11e1 is created on disk as the file 11ei dat A database of 1000 records each containing 10 fields of 20 characters of information is built in filel dat DEFINE FILE 1 1 END FILE OPEN filel filel dat STATUS NEW DEFINE SET filel rec 1000 f1d 10 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE filel data rec fld TYPE STRING 20 A Disk Variable END VARIABLE filel CLEAR filel 2 Touse filel created in Example 1 you need to enter the following statement OPEN filel filel dat STATUS OLD See Chapter 4 for details on database management 222 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 3 7 65 OPEN SEGMENT Purpose Opens a segment file on disk for physical write read operations Syntax OPEN SEGMENT filespec STATUS status Remarks filespec is a quoted string or string variable containing the name of the segment file to be opened filespec may contain any filename that is valid for your operating system status is one of the following options NEW to mean a new file A new file is one which does not yet exist OLD to mean an existing file If omitted the default is STATUS OLD CAUTION When using the OPEN file statement with
96. provided Furthermore the course of action through the program depends on the user s responses Getting information from the user usually takes one of two forms letting the user make selections and letting the user enter data 2 2 5 2 Selections Most selections fall into one of the following categories 1 selecting from a fixed number of options 2 selecting a program variable for input or output purposes 3 selecting one or more elements from a variable number of options 2 2 5 2 1 Selecting from a Fixed Number of Options Most interactive programs require the user to select from a fixed set of options PROMULA provides several ways to do this The simplest is with the ASK statement The ASK statement is an interactive conditional branch statement that asks the user to enter a choice then branches according to the response For example a simple program interface may offer the following options edit inputs calculate results view outputs and exit The following procedure contains an ASK statement that could be used to let the user select one of these options and branch accordingly DEFINE PROCEDURE askit WRITE E dit inputs C gt alculate V gt iew outputs or press End to exit ASK Please enter your selection END BREAK askit ELSE E statements for editing inputs ELSE C Statements for calculations ELSE V statements for viewing outputs END ASK a
97. row col paqg Dynamic Array by row col and pag DISK filea datl row col pag sdatb row col pag Dynamic Array by row col and pag DISK filea datb row col pag END VARIABLE Let s look at these examples of how local variables are related to disk variables starting with the local variables 1dat1 ldatb and 1dat2 ldatl row col pag A 3 dimensional Array DISK filea datl ldatb row col pag A 3 dimensional Array DISK filea datb ldat2 1 2 dimensional Array DISK filea dat2 The above definitions create three array variables Variable 1dat1 is a three dimensional array for virtually accessing the disk variable dati Variable 1datb is similar to 1dat1 except that it is for virtually accessing the disk variable datb Variable 1dat2 is a two dimensional array variable for virtually accessing the disk variable dat 2 Notice that each local variable has the same size shape and type as the disk variables to which it is related This is required for correct virtual access We will discuss how to access subsets and dimensional sections of disk variables shortly The values of the three local arrays do not occupy any value storage because the DISK option in their definition tells PROMULA that they should be accessed virtually from disk The virtual access method is indicated because the variables named in their DISK options are not subscripted Local variables which are used to access disk variables virtually
98. run PROMULA on your personal computer CHAPTER 2 is an introduction to the PROMULA programming environment and covers some of the language fundamentals in the context of a simple example CHAPTER 3 is the reference chapter for the PROMULA language It describes in alphabetical order the nouns and verbs of the language The nouns are the building blocks the information elements of the language The verbs are the commands of the language they tell PROMULA to perform various operations on the nouns CHAPTER 4 contains details and examples of database management and program management in PROMULA CHAPTER 5 describes the use of the PROMULA configuration program that may be used to set up the physical configuration of PROMULA s graphics modes 1 2 What is PROMULA PROMULA processor of multiple language applications is an application development tool for large scale analytical applications It is a general purpose high level programming language with built in data management modeling report generation graphics and screen management menus and windows capabilities It is the ideal development tool for those who have outgrown the spreadsheets but do not want to develop applications in a third generation programming language such as FORTRAN PASCAL BASIC or C Though its intellectual history goes back to the late 60 s on mainframes PROMULA was originally developed on PCs in the early 80 s as a high level generalization of FORTRAN desig
99. s Manual EFINE FILE Filex OPEN Filex segment dba STATUS NEW DEFINE SET row 500 col 10 page 10 DEFINE VARIABLE Filex var row col page Data for Segment MAIN END DEFINE PROCEDURE proc OPEN Filex segment dba WRITE You are in Segment MAIN OPEN SEGME segl xeq READ SEGME Segl DO procl OPEN SEGME seg2 xeq READ SEGME Seg2 DO proc2 OPEN SEGME seg3 xeq READ SEGME Seg3 DO proc3 CLEAR filex END proc KKK KKK KKK KKKKAKKK End Main Segment KKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKK KKK END PROGRAM STOP The files containing the segments seg1 seg2 and seg3 are shown below Notice that the file containing segment MAIN is opened and read at the top of each of these files so that the definitions in segment MAIN can be used This implicitly puts segl seg2 and seg3 at inheritance level 1 under segment MAIN segl OPEN SEGMENT segment xeq STATUS OLD READ SEGMENT MAIN OPEN SEGMENT segl xeq STATUS NEW DEFINE SEGMENT Segl ckckckck ck ck ck ck kk kk kk Begin Segment 1 Ckckck ck ck ckck ck ck ckck ck ck kk kk DEFINE VARIABLE varl row col Data for Segment Segl END DEFINE PROCEDURE proci WRITE You are in Segment Segl OPEN SEGMENT segll xeq READ SEGM
100. s Manual in on line menu driven form The program that controls the tutorial is called PROMULA TUT You can use the Tutorial in various ways 1 Browse through the entire Tutorial once to obtain an overview of PROMULA 2 Selecta particular topic in the Tutorial when you have a particular question To get to the Tutorial while executing a program press the Esc key to suspend the program and display the Main Menu then select Main Menu option 3 to browse the Tutorial and the topic of interest When you wish to leave the tutorial press the End key this returns you to the Main Menu You may then return to the interrupted program by selecting Main Menu option 7 2 1 2 4 F4 Edit a Source File This clears the screen and initiates the PROMULA Text Editor which is a fast full screen text editor that may be used from the Main Menu from command mode and from inside your applications via the RUN EDITOR statement On line help for the editor is in the dialog file EDITOR TUT and is accessible by pressing Alt H For example to edit the demo file DEMO PRM shown in Figure 2 2 simply press Alt E and enter the file name DEMO PRM 2 1 2 5 F5 Compile a Source Program PROMUDLA accepts statements in either of two modes direct and indirect Main Menu option 5 is used to put PROMULA into indirect mode In indirect or compilation mode PROMULA converts the statements of an entire source file to an executable form which may be saved
101. scalar containing the current size of set set S i A vector containing the element sequence numbers of the selection vector of set The i subscript is optional and is used to indicate which element of the selection vector is being referenced The default is i 1 Set S is useful as an iteration counter in a DO set loop or as a switch between alternate execution paths In addition set S 1 contains the sequence number of the element corresponding to the minimum maximum value of a vector after a SORT DESCENDING statement set R A scalar containing the current range of set Initially set R set M set V i vector containing the values associated with a TIME related set This variable is useful in dynamic simulation applications Normally you will not assign values to these variables However if you want to make your own assignments you will have to use the PROMULA verb COMPUTE For example it is possible to change the default range of a set to 1 through m with the following statements COMPUTE set R m SELECT set You should not increase the size of a set above its definition size as this can result in loss of program information To restore the range of a set to its default use the statements COMPUTE set R set M SELECT set Examples 1 Defining a Set DEFINE SET month 12 Set of 12 Months acnt 3 Account END 79 Promula Applicati
102. size and order use the SELECT set statement Variables may also be used to indicate the elements to be selected For example in order to select the months October through December and March the following statements could be used DEFINE VARIABLE m1 m2 m3 END VARIABLE m1 10 m2 12 m3 3 SELECT mons m1 m2 m3 You can reverse the order of a set by using a set selection that specifies a range from the last element to the first element SELECT mons 12 1 If a variable is related to a set by a KEY relation the variable values may be used to specify set selections For example the statements SELECT KEY mons monsn SELECT mons JAN FEB MAY will select the months January February and May from the set of months Here mons is a string variable containing the three letter month name abbreviations see Relating Sets and Variables It is also possible to select the elements of a set if the values of a variable dimensioned by the set meet a given criterion The SELECT set IF statement is used for these types of selections For example in order to select the elements of set mons that index values of monthly income that are greater than 1500 dollars the following expression could be used SELECT mons IF incom GT 1500 Here incom is a numeric variable the monthly income values For more information on selecting set elements see the discu
103. strings of printable characters that represent data or responses to program prompts Most records are input by reading them from a text file or by typing them in and pressing the Enter key Examples of records are PROMULA statements entered in command mode and data entered in response to an ASK or READ statement Another example of a record is the value entered in response to the Enter Value or End prompt generated by PROMULA s various EDIT statements When you prepare a batch script you have to know exactly what happens when the program runs interactively You also have to keep track of when the program expects keypresses and when it expects records If the program is expecting a record type it on the next line of the script If the program is expecting a keypress type the batch command for the keypress on the next line of the script 14 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The batch commands are the simple one character codes shown in Table 2 1 below Table 2 1 The PROMULA Batch Language Commands CODE MEANING INTERACTIVE KEYPRESS NOTES S Display the screen image None 1 m Escape to main menu Esc 2 e End End 2 r Move right one position Right arrow 2 1 Move left one position Left arrow b Backspace Backspace a Move to beginning of current line Ctrl Left Arrow 7 Move to end of current line Ctrl Right Arrow X Delete current character Del 1 Toggle insertion characteristics Ins t Tab right Tab 3 j Tab l
104. table of percent change in time series data for a previously defined time series variable A time series variable is one which is subscripted by a time series set The percent change for time t is computed from values for time t and t 1 where t and t 1 are two consecutive selections of the time set The selections depend on the current local setting of the set They may or may not be consecutive time points There may be more than one time unit between them Following the keyword CHANGE a real number within parentheses is required It represents the number of time units to be used in computing percent change Internally it is divided by the difference in time values for selections t and t 1 Suppose values for 1970 and 1975 are used in computing the percent change That is the user has selected these years for computation and output generation Also he wants to compute an annual percent change so one time unit a year is designated on the CHANGE option CHANGE 1 The change for 1975 is computed as the difference in values for 1970 and 1975 divided by the 1970 value and multiplied by 1 5 for annual change A factor of 100 gives the percent change from 1970 to 1975 in one year increments In the tabular display the words Percent Change in are placed in front of the original descriptor from the variable definition If the TITLE option is used with the CHANGE option no words are prefixed GROWTH n The GROWTH option allows t
105. terms of the time variables on the 231 Promula Application Development System User s Manual RHS which are evaluated at TIME the previous time point or interval It is the equations of the LEVEL section which move the dynamic variables through time Only those exogenous time series that are used explicitly in the RATE or LEVEL section need be included in the exogenous variables list of the RATE statement The RATE statement may only be used inside a procedure That is it must not be used in command mode For more information on dynamic simulation with PROMULA see the discussion of Dynamic Procedures in the DEFINE PROCEDURE section of this chapter and the discussion of the LEVEL statement 3 7 69 READ DISK Purpose Transfers data from a disk variable in an array file to a local variable in the dynamic access method Syntax READ DISK vars Remarks vars isa list of dynamic variables A dynamic variable is a scratch or fixed variable also called a local variable that has a dynamic relationship to a disk variable Local variables may be related to disk variables through the DISK option of the DEFINE VARIABLE statement See chapter 4 for a detailed description of disk access methods Examples The following code DEFINE FILE filea END FILE OPEN filea test dba STATUS NEW DEFINE SET 1000 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE filea dsk pnt A
106. the codes are used Third when the user wishes to refer to particular set elements he may use the codes in place of the element sequence numbers See the ASK ELSE and SELECT VARIABLE statements for a discussion of how set elements are selected with their codes and sequence numbers Only one code per data line is permitted Note that if sec was defined with a KEY option the total width of the field may not exceed the width defined in that option The maximum width of a code is 6 characters Examples The following example illustrates the READ set statement Stubs spanners and codes are read in for set sta the codes appear as the identifiers of the set elements in the WRITE set display Notice that the default AGE n descriptors are used as labels for columns classified by set age since no spanners or codes are related to set age Set yer gets its descriptor values from the TIME option in its definition DEFINE SET age 3 AGE ROW 8 yer 2 YEAR TIME 1920 2000 sta 3 STATE ROW 10 KEY 2 COLUMN 10 3 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE a age sta yer VALUES BY AGE STATE AND YEAR END VARIABLE a RANDOM 2000 9000 READ sta KEY 21 22 ROW 21 29 COLUMN 1 30 10 STATE OF OHIO STATE OF FLORIDA STATE OF ILLINOIS READ 1 6 00 20 21 40 41 60 Given the definitions and data above the values fo
107. the elements See Relating Sets to Variables below For more information about sets refer to Chapter 3 of this manual especially the sections covering the PROMULA noun set and the DEFINE SET DO set SELECT SET SELECT ENTRY and SELECT set statements 2 2 1 4 Defining Variables Variables are structures that store program information It is in terms of variables that the data manipulations performed by a program are expressed In PROMULA variables are created with the DEFINE VARIABLE statement Each variable definition must include a unique identifier and may also include a structure type descriptor and other options for the variable The variable definitions for the budget program are shown in Figure 2 8 and are described in Table 2 2 below Table 2 3 The DEFINE VARIABLE Statement of the Budget Program Variable Set No of Value Format Identifier Structure Values Type w d Descriptor expns mons exps 72 REAL 0 2 onthly Expenses by Category incom mons 12 REAL 10 2 onthly Income payhr mons 12 REAL 10 0 Payable Hours per Month hr bonus mons 12 REAL 0 2 onthly Income Bonus taxes REAL 0 4 Fraction of Pay Lost to Taxes scalar wager gt I REAL 10 2 Hourly Wage Rate hr scalar expnm mons 12 REAL 10 2 onthly Expenses balns mons 12 REAL 1052 onthly Balance S aincom 1 REAL 0 2 Average Monthly Income scalar aexpnm 1 RE
108. the necessary pieces one at a time This is analogous to using a set of encyclopedias you work with the one volume that you are interested in while the rest of them sit on the shelf until they are needed A mapped compilation listing of the source code that produced SE GM ENT X EQ is shown below Figure 4 2 A Segmented Program with a Database Storage Allocation Value Def Proc Line 24 20 1 1 24 20 2 cock ck ckckckckockckckck k k k M 24 30 3 24 30 4 39 30 5 39 30 6 39 30 7 39 30 8 551 30 9 573 30 10 595 30 11 595 30 12 595 30 13 613 30 14 616 30 125 622 30 16 622 37 1 7 622 49 18 622 53 19 622 53 20 622 61 21 622 62 22 622 62 23 11 622 62 24 5011 639 62 25 5011 639 62 26 5011 645 62 27 5011 645 74 28 5011 645 78 29 5011 645 79 30 5011 645 79 31 5011 645 79 32 10011 662 79 33 10011 662 79 34 10011 668 79 35 10011 668 91 36 10011 668 92 37 5011 645 79 38 11 622 62 39 ck ok ck ck ck ck KKK KKK KKK KKK 622 62 40 PROMULA Source Statement OPEN SEGMENT segment xeq STATUS NEW DEFI PROGRAM Begin Segment MAIN DEFI FILE Filex END OPEN Filex segment dba STATUS NEW DEFI SET row 500 col 10
109. there 2 The following procedures rdsales and tsales DEFINE PROCEDURE rdsales WRITE Enter Monthly Sales 155 Promula Application Development System User s Manual READ sales END PROCEDURE rdsales DEFINE PROCEDURE tsales rdsales total SUM month sales month WRITE Total Annual Sales total END PROCEDURE tsales execute as follows tsales Enter Monthly Sales 1000 1100 1200 1150 1300 1350 1400 1600 1000 1100 1570 1600 Total Annual Sales 15 370 Above procedure t sales calls procedure rdsales into execution to produce the same results as those of Example 2 3 The following is a procedure with parameters DEFINE PROCEDURE xmax DEFINE PARAMETER a b c Max of a b END PARAMETER DO IF a GE b ELSE END IF END PROCEDURE xmax The purpose of this procedure xmax is to compare two values and return the larger of the two as shown in the dialog below DEFINE PROCEDURE callxmax xmax 2 END PROCEDURE callxmax callxmax WRITE z 3 3 7 30 1 Dynamic Procedures Dynamic procedures are used in dynamic simulations In dynamic simulations modeling variables interact with each other and change over time PROMULA has several features that facilitate the development
110. to the calling program EFINE VARIABLE The variables defined PRM2 PRM can be batch loaded using the code shown below The code below defines two variables a and b and a procedure runcmd that runs PRM2 PRM EFINE VARIABLE tiom ND DEFINE PROCEDURE runcmd RUN COMMAND prm2 prm AUDIT VARIABLE END PROCEDURE runcmd Execution of procedure runcmd produces the following dialog DO runcmd 247 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Ident Description A B C D The AUDIT VARIABLE statement in procedure runcmd shows that variables c and are now present with variables a and b Other PROMULA structures including procedures can be added using similar code 3 7 80 RUN COMPILER Purpose Compiles a PROMULA source code Syntax RUN COMPILER source LIST output PAUSE option Remarks source is a string optionally in quotes or a string variable containing the name of the file to be compiled the extension PRM is assumed if none is specified output directs the compilation listing and is one of the following NONE to turn off the listing this option provides the fastest compilations CONSOLE to display the listing on the screen DISK file to save the listing on disk ile is a string or a string variable containing the name of the file where the listing is to be saved PRIN
111. up in the Action Window upper half of screen The PROMULA code that produced the text in the above window is WRITE TEXT This text was produced by the WRITE TEXT statement Note that it shows up in the Action Window upper half of screen END After pressing any key the following display results The PROMULA code that produced the text in the window below is WRITE COMMENT This text was produced by the WRITE COMMENT statement Note that it shows up in the Comment Window lower half of screen END Press any key to continue This text was produced by the WRITE COMMENT statement Note that it shows up in the Comment Window lower half of screen 89 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 3 1 25 Window Advanced The windowing capabilities discussed in the previous section are the most basic type of windowing available to PROMULA users For users who wish to create a truly professional looking user interface for their applications the Advanced Windowing capabilities are available In PROMULA the custom design of the screen is specified using the DEFINE WINDOW and OPEN WINDOW statements The DEFINE WINDOW statement allows you to create windows The OPEN WINDOW statement allows you to assign one of your custom designed windows to handle a specific set of display functions The OPEN WINDOW statement takes two parameters 1 The functional type of the screen to which you want to assign the window 2
112. used to access the values of the disk variable in scratch memory This method offers the same advantages as virtual access but it requires the programmer to transfer values between disk and memory via explicit READ DISK and WRITE DISK statements Dynamic access also allows programmers to transfer dimensional sections and subsets of multi dimensional disk variables between disk and memory For example two dimensional pages of a three dimensional disk variable can be accessed through a two dimensional local variable Dynamic access is also faster than either direct or virtual access because a large number of disk variable values may be quickly transferred between disk and core memory for processing Local variables used for dynamic access are like scratch variables in that their values may be cleared from memory via the CLEAR statement 4 1 1 Program 1 Create a New Database The first step in building a PROMULA database is to define an array file and open it physically on disk Since we plan to build a new database the array file is opened with STATUSZNEW DEFINE FILE af Array file for database filea dba TYPE ARRAY END FILE Open af its physical name is filea dba OPEN af filea dba STATUS NEW The next step in building the database is to define the logical structure of the file Here the sets variables and relations of the file are physically laid out on disk To do this simply use the DEF
113. using the values of variable expns Since the second column of the set is selected before the sort the values in the second column of array expns are used to order the set mons For more information and examples of sorting information see the discussion of the SORT statement in Chapter 3 of this manual 2 2 3 4 Writing Equations Equations are PROMULA statements that can change the values of variables Equations may involve numeric or string constants variables arithmetic and user defined functions and arithmetic and relational operators For example the variable expns could be initialized with the following six equations that use PROMULA s built in RANDOM number function Equation Description expns m 1 409 Rent is 409 per month expns m 2 Food varies between 250 and 300 per month RANDOM 250 300 expns m 3 Car Service varies between 85 and 175 per month RANDOM 85 175 expns m 4 Utilities vary between 70 and 100 per month RANDOM 70 100 expns m 5 270 6 Car Insurance is 270 for 6 months expns m 6 RANDOM 50 70 Phone varies between 50 and 70 per month The equations above use the dummy subscript m to drive equations over the elements of set mons This means the letter m in the above equations causes each equation to be performed once for each active element of set mons Recall that the variable expns is defined as a two dimensional array classified by month and expense category The firs
114. variables subscripted by the set and serve as the row column and page headings of such variables The default descriptors of the elements of a set are SET 1 SET 2 SET N where SET is the set identifier A set is defined by the DEFINE SET statement The contents of a set may be displayed via the WRITE set and BROWSE set statements The sets of a program may be listed via the AUDIT SET and BROWSE SET statements The order and range of a set may be modified by the SELECT set SELECT set IF and SORT statements The current range and order of a set s elements are stored in a structure referred to as the set s selection vector 78 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The elements of a set may be selected interactively via the SELECT SET SELECT ENTRY ASK ELSE SET and the SELECT VARIABLE statements Sets may be used to drive DO loops with the DO set statement Descriptive information may be associated with set elements with the DEFINE RELATION SELECT RELATION and READ set statements The descriptors of a set may be displayed as the values of a variable by using the TYPE set type specification in the variable s definition PROMULA has some special notation for use with sets that can be useful in working with sets and multidimensional variables This notation is discussed below set M A scalar containing the maximum size of set This is the value of N used in defining the set set N A
115. will be the same as before the loop started However if execution of the loop aborts abnormally the range of set will be fixed at the element that was active when the abort occurred Examples In this example the procedure doset contains a DO set loop The statements between the DO month statement and the END DO month statement are executed once for each active element in the selection vector for set month The variable month S has the value of the current selection of the month set Similarly the variable mv has the value mv m where m is a scalar subscript which will be assigned the current value of the month subscript DEFINE SET month 12 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE m Month Number mv month Monthly Value ND VARIABLI 206 Promula Application Development System User s Manual DEFINE PROCEDURE doset DO month m month S mv m 10 WRITE CENTER The current month number is m 5 The monthly value is mv 5 END month END PROCEDURE doset Executing procedure doset produces the output below The current month number is 1 The monthly value is 10 The current month number is 2 The monthly value is 20 The current month number is 3 The monthly value is 30 The current month number is 4 The monthly value is 40 The current month number is 5 The monthly value is 50 The current month num
116. written in the disk file specified on the last OPEN SEGMENT statement To load the segment for execution use the READ SEGMENT statement Examples The statements below define a two segmented program the program contains the top level segment MAIN and two level one segments named segi and seg2 The code and data of all three segments are saved on a disk file named program xeq OPEN SEGMENT program xeq STATUS NEW DEFINE PROGRAM MAIN DEFINE PROCEDURE start READ SEGME segl READ SEGME seg2 END PROCEDURE start DEFINE SEGME segl DEFINE PROCEDURE proc WRITE Hello from segl END proc END SEGMENT segl DO proc DEFINE SEGMENT seg2 DEFINE PROCEDURE proc WRITE Hello from seg2 END proc END SEGMENT seg2 DO proc END PROGRAM DO start To read this program for execution use the statement RUN PROGRAM program The procedure named start in segment MAIN executes automatically because it is indicated in the DO clause of the END PROGRAM statement Procedure start then uses the READ SEGMENT statement to load seg1 and seg2 in sequence When each segment is loaded the procedure proc defined in the segment executes automatically 3 7 63 LEVEL Purpose Is used in dynamic simulation procedures and has two functions 1 It signals the start of the LEVEL secti
117. wrvalseg xeq STATUS NEW DEFINE PROGRA DEFINE VARIABLE a The value of variable A END VARIABLE END PROGRAM The effect of the WRITE VALUE segment and READ VALUE segment are illustrated in the dialog below a 10 WRITE a The value of variable A 10 240 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The statement WRITE VALUE MAIN writes the values of segment MAIN variables in this case only variable a in the segment file on disk called wrvalseg xeq WRITE VALUE MAIN The value of a variable can be changed by an expression a 20 WRITE a The value of variable A 20 The READ VALUE MAIN statement will read in the values of the segment MAIN s variables that were stored by the last WRITE VALUE MAIN statement READ VALUE MAIN RITE a he value of variable A 10 Hz 3 7 76 READ variable Purpose Reads data into a variable Syntax READ var fmt sets FROM file data Remarks var is the identifier of the variable whose data is being entered sets is an ordered list of the identifiers of the sets subscripting var The sets may be listed in any order If omitted the order of the sets is that which appears in the definition of var For multidimensional variables this order is important the first set in this list defines the rows of the data following the second set classif
118. y i i 10 READ pntn 4 GEJ FKG MEJ LCC DLY USA IOU PRM XEQ DEFINE PROCEDURE test pntl pntn y SELECT ROW 1 PLOT PIECHART y TITLE PIE CHART OF VARIABLE Y SELECT ROW pnt END PROCEDURE test A Pie Chart PROMULA supports two dimensional graphics and variables specified in the plot will usually be one dimensional vectors If you want to plot two or higher dimensional arrays you should follow these guidelines 1 Reduce two or higher dimensional variables to a one dimensional form by selecting a single value for all the sets structuring the variables being plotted except the one you wish to use as the x axis of the plot PROMUDLA can determine which sets have been restricted and which have more than one active element When the variables are plotted the values of variable varx across the set with more than one active element will be used to scale the x axis and the descriptors of the other sets will appear in a subtitle for the plot 2 For X Y plots Syntax 1 the Y variables should all be structured by the set that will scale the X axis The following example illustrates how PROMULA handles array variables with more than one dimension in plots DEFINE SET row 10 10 row col 6 06 col pag 2 04 pag END SET DEFINE VARIABLE x row col pag TYPE REAL y row col pag YPE
119. 0 95 105 ADP5 Adapter 5 Galv Steel URD 10 100 95 108 ADP5 Adapter 5 Galv Steel URD 10 100 95 Select all records with a stock code CAB12 key CAB12 selkey 107 CAB12 Cable 412 solTWwire 200 0 04 Select all records with a stock code BLTCA key BLTCA selkey 103 BLTCA Bolts Carriage 1 2 X 6 50 0 80 106 BLTCA Bolts Carriage 1 2 X 6 100 0 80 3 7 88 SELECT indirect Purpose Allows selection of a program variable for subsequent input output operations Syntax SELECT indir varlist Remarks indir is the identifier of an indirect variable Indirects may be used with the WRITE BROWSE and EDIT variable SORT DO DESCRIBE and PLOT statements Indirects should not be used in calculations SELECT SET IF or the WRITE text statements varlist is a list of variable identifiers If varlist contains a single identifier indir will be assigned to it and no variable selection screen will be displayed If varlist is omitted the selection list will display all the variables in the program except indir Upon execution the SELECT indirect statement clears the Main Screen and displays the list of variables in varlist for selection The display contains the variables identifiers and descriptors as defined in their definitions A prompt at the bottom of the Prompt Screen describes how to browse the list and make a selection The following keys are active during execution of this statement Brows
120. 000 1 200 The default is ON DATE MMDDY2 MMDDY4 DDMMY2 DDMMY4 to select alternative formats for the DATE type variable When DATE MMDDY2 the default dates are treated as 8 character strings of the form mm dd yy for input output purposes Internally the date is stored as a numeric quantity of the form yymmdd For example February 14 1966 may be entered or displayed as 2 14 66 and is internally stored as 660214 When DATE MMDDY 4 dates are treated as 10 character strings of the form mm dd yyyy for input output purposes Internally the date is stored as a numeric quantity of the form yyyymmdd When DATE DDMMY2 dates are treated as 8 character strings of the form dd mm yy for input output purposes Internally the date is stored as a numeric quantity of the form yymmdd When DATE DDMM Y4 dates are treated as 10 character strings of the form dd mm yyyy for input output purposes Internally the date is stored as a numeric quantity of the form yyyymmdd Note if you plan to do math on the 10 character date formats you should pass the date variable to a variable of TYPE INTEGER 10 in order to retain at least 10 significant digits DEBUG ON OFF 260 Promula Application Development System User s Manual to control whether or not PROMULA pauses after encountering an error during compilations When DEBUG ON PROMULA issues an error message upon encountering an error in compilation and pauses the compilation at that point This
121. 1 32 STOP 93 160 112 33 END profits 93 160 113 34 END PROGRAM DO profits 93 160 113 35 STOP Figure 3 1 Compilation Output to Printer with SELECT MAP ON MATHERROR ON OFF to control math error processing during execution of calculations When MATHERROR ON PROMULA will stop program execution if it attempts to do a division by zero a logarithm of a negative number or a fractional power of a negative number This is the default condition Like all the SELECT option statements the SELECT MATHERROR affects the entire program however it is possible to implement local error processing using the DO IF ERROR statement When MATHERROR OFF PROMULA will give a zero result for these abnormal calculations and will continue with program execution MINUS LEADING PARENTHESES to control the display of negative numbers When MINUS LEADING negative values are displayed with a leading minus sign This is the default When MINUS PARENTHESES negative values are displayed enclosed in parentheses e g the value 10 0 is displayed as 10 0 NS code ND code NA code or ERR code to specify a code value to use for the input or output of special values An alternative syntax is SELECT NS code ND code NA code ERR code where code is up to to six alphanumeric characters See the discussion of SELECT SPECIAL below OUTPUT filespec to select a file for subsequent output operations filespec is a quoted file name or a string variable t
122. 3 0 000000 0 000000 1 000000 3 7 51 DO LSOLVE Purpose Solve one or more systems of linear equations Syntax DO LSOLVE row col pagl pag2 amat bmat Remarks row is the identifier of a set dimensioning both amat and bmat col is the identifier of a set dimensioning amat pagl pag2 are the identifiers of sets subscriprting bmat amat is the identifier of the coefficient matrix bmat is the identifier of the result matrix The statement DO LSOLVE i j p A B will compute the solution vectors X j p for the system of linear equations All 1 al2 X2p alj Xjp blp A21 1 a22 X2p a2j b2p Ail 1 12 2 aij Xjp bip The solution vectors X j p will overwrite the B i p values The ranges of i and j must be equal in size when DO LSOLVE is called and the solution process will be restricted to the active range of the sets subscripting the arguments Example DEFINE SET arow 3 Linear Equation acol 3 Product Term page 2 Page of System END SET 200 Promula Application Development System User s Manual DEFINE VARIABLI Fl a arow acol Coefficient Matrix b arow page Result Vectors x arow page Solution Vectors Test Result Vectors y arow pag ND VARIABLE tj UO M op EAD b 6 14 7 15 9 L8 DEFINE PROCEDURE test
123. 3 AUDIT file Purpose Produces a listing of the sets and variables in an array file Syntax AUDIT file Remarks file is the identifier of the array file you wish to audit Examples The following code illustrates the AUDIT file statement DEFINE FILE arrl TYPE ARRAY A Primary Array Data File END FILE OPEN arrl arrl dba STATUS NEW DEFINE SET arrl yrs 10 Year pag 03 Pages sic 5 SIC Codes END SET arrl DEFINE VARIABLE 1 DUR yrs YPE REAL 8 0 Manufacturing Durables Employment EMP pag yrs TYPE REAL 8 0 Employment by Industry EMPT yrs YPE REAL 8 0 Total Employment WSEMP yrs YPE REAL 8 0 Total Wage and Salary Employment SICST sic YPE STRING 30 Names for Industrial Categories YEAR yrs YPE STRING 5 Years END VARIABLE arrl The statement AUDIT arr1 produces the listing below Identifier Description YRS Year PAG Pages SIC SIC Codes 100 Promula Application Development System User s Manual DUR anufacturing Durables Employment EMP Employment by Industry EMPT otal Employment WSEMP Total Wage and Salary Employment SICST Names for Industrial Categories YEAR Years 3 7 4 AUDIT SET Purpose Produces a full or partial listing of the sets in a program Syntax AUDIT SET s
124. 4 COL 5 ROW 1 24 5 56 34 21 ROW 2 98 76 34 27 14 ROW 3 11 23 41 17 32 ROW 4 54 10 99 2 20 ROW 5 1 22 3 4 35 ROW 6 51 49 48 47 46 ROW 7 11 31 33 22 11 ROW 8 33 X5 67 22 44 ROW 9 79 21 59 85 69 ROW 10 33 99 1 98 49 The use of the SORT statement is illustrated in the dialogs below Sort the elements of set row in ascending order using the values of variable var1 SORT ASCENDING row USING var WRITE varl A 1 Dimensional Array ROW 1 3 ROW 4 19 ROW 5 21 ROW 10 21 ROW 6 34 ROW 2 45 ROW 9 52 ROW 3 56 ROW 8 89 ROW 7 97 Sort the elements of set row in descending order using the values of variable var1 SORT DESCENDING row USING varl WRITE varl A 1 Dimensional Array ROW 7 97 ROW 8 89 ROW 3 56 278 Promula Application Development System User s Manual ROW 9 52 ROW 2 45 ROW 6 34 ROW 10 21 ROW 5 21 ROW 4 19 ROW 1 3 Sort the elements of set row in ascending order using the values of the 3rd column of variable var2 ELECT col 3 ORT ASCENDING row USING var2 ELECT col RITE var2 0 2 Dimensional Array COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 COL 5 ROW 10 33 99 1 98 49 ROW 5 1 22 3 4 35 ROW 7 11 31 33 22 11 ROW 2 98 76 34 27 14 ROW 3 11 23 41 17 32 ROW 6 51 49 48 47 46 ROW 1 24 5 56 34 21 ROW 9 79 21 59 85 69
125. 8 ND VARIABLE 1 DEFINE VARIABLE rn Record Number ND VARIABLE rs rm 1 DO READ txtl varl rn 8 var2 rn 8 var3 rn 8 rn rntl END txt1 3 Read from a random file and write to a text file DO rani WRITE txtl iteml1 8 item2 8 item3 8 END rani 284 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 4 Read from a random file and write to an array file rn 1 DO rani varl rn iteml var2 rn item2 var3 rn item3 rn rnt l END ranl 3 7 104 WRITE function Purpose Writes the values of a function in tabular form Syntax WRITE func fmt TITLE text Remarks func isthe logical identifier of a function defined by the DEFINE FUNCTION or DEFINE LOOKUP statement fmt is a format specification of the form p w d to indicate the position of the display the width of the values displayed and the number of decimals in real values where p isan integer indicating the width in characters of the row descriptors for the display w is an integer indicating the width in characters of the columns of the display A negative width parameter left justifies the values displayed d is an integer indicating the number of decimal places to be displayed If is an E the values will be displayed in exponential notation For functions defined by the DEFINE LOOKUP statement the default format is p 10 w 8 and d 2 For
126. 8 F8 Run a Program from a Disk File An executable program may be run in one of two ways interactively or in batch mode Interactive execution proceeds as follows the program issues prompts pauses after each prompt and expects a response from you before continuing execution The program issues its prompts on the console and you enter your responses with the keyboard or mouse one at a time In batch mode on the other hand program execution proceeds without pause for user input from the keyboard In this mode all of your responses are expected to have been saved in batch on a text file called the batch input file For more information about preparing batch input files see the section entitled Running Interactive Programs in Batch It is often inconvenient to execute a program directly from the console It might be that the program is executed very often with minor or no data changes Alternatively the program might execute very slowly or an exact record of each execution might be desired Whatever the reason batch execution provides the capability to execute a program in a non interactive file driven mode During batch execution your program reads from a batch input file The batch input file is a standard text file produced by any text editor It contains the responses to the various program prompts in the precise order and form that they would be entered directly on the keyboard Main Menu option 8 is used to execute a compiled PROMULA p
127. 8 1 dep col Depreciation YPE REAL 8 1 taxes col Income Taxes YPE REAL 8 1 tcosts col Total Costs YPE REAL 8 1 opinc col Operating Income YPE REAL 8 1 intinc col Interest Dividends and Other Income YPE REAL 8 1 intexp col Interest and Other Debt Charges YPE REAL 8 1 clcost col Estimated Plant Closedown Costs YPE REAL 8 1 othexp col Other Expenses YPE REAL 8 1 ibtax col Income Loss Before Income Taxes YPE REAL 8 1 itax col Income Taxes YPE REAL 8 1 netinc col Net Income Loss YPE REAL 8 1 TABLE SUPPORT VARIABLES cdesc col The Column Descriptions TYPE STRING 7 subl col dash col TYPE STRING 10 eqls col TYPE STRING 10 ND VARIABLI SELECT KEY col cdesc das h ae ee ee qls cdesc i 1977 i 11 1978 82 12 1983 87 13 1978 87 The code below defines a table called report and a procedure that computes and displays the table DEFINE ABLE report col FORMAT 40 10 TITLE ACME Corporation Ten Year Financial Summary Million Dollars BODY eqls netsal Costs and Expenses empcos msrvce dep taxes dash subl dash opinc Other Income Expense intinc intexp clcost othexp dash ibtax itax dash netinc eqls END TABLE FINE PROCEDURE wrrep SELECT col 11 13 sub
128. 82 5174 82 5174 205 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Standard Deviation of Regression Model 24 4545 24 4545 R Square of Regression Model 0 7164 0 7164 3 7 54 DO set Purpose Executes repeatedly a group of statements The number and order of iterations is determined by the number and order of the elements of the set as defined by the set s current selection vector Syntax DO set statement END Remarks set is the identifier of a set statement is any executable statement no definitions including other DO statements The statements from DO set to END are usually called a DO set loop The statements between the DO set and END statements are executed once for each element in the current set selection vector for set By default the set selection vector contains N elements ordered from 1 to N where N is the size of set as specified in its definition The order and range of the elements of the selection vector may be modified by the various set selection statements and the SORT statement Within an iteration of the DO set loop the range of set is fixed to a single element and vectors subscripted by set are treated as scalars in calculations and other expressions multidimensional array variables subscripted by set are evaluated at the current value of the subscript set If a DO set loop executes properly for each active element in set the range and order of set after the loop
129. 87 TIME 0 948 0 687 1 000 GRP 2 DOSV RSPV TIME 182 Promula Application Development System User s Manual DOSV 1 000 0 603 0 948 RSPV 0 603 1 000 0 738 TIME 0 948 0 738 1 000 3 7 40 DO DESCRIBE Purpose Produces a report of one or more tables of 12 descriptive statistics for specified variables The statistics are as follows 1 Number of observations 7 Standard deviation 2 Number of excluded observations 8 Skewness 3 Number of valid observations 9 Kurtosis 4 Arithmetic mean 10 Range 5 Variance 11 Minimum value and 6 Standard error 12 Maximum value Syntax DO DESCRIBE sets vars fmt Remarks sets isalist of set identifiers subscripting the array s to be described The specification of sets controls the analysis of the variables specified in vars by defining the index of the observations and the order of report pages produced The last set in sets specifies the index of the observations any preceding sets specify the order in which pages of the report are written The ordering of report pages corresponds to the specification of the sets in sets from left to right left varying the fastest The default value for sets is the reverse of the set specification used in defining each variable in vars with the first set in this definition indexing the observations and the remaining sets heading report pages vars isalist of variable identifiers specifying the arrays to be
130. 9 25 24 0 READ cnt tst grd 0 12 32 21 6 01634 18 7 0 11 33 15 12 0 18 30 20 7 1 0 dvar 6 0 SELECT KEY The statement BROWSE cnt 20 1 DISPLAY produces the display below Frequency by class and grade range TST 1 CLASS A 12 0 32 0 21 0 6 0 CLASS B 16 0 34 0 18 0 TO End Exit Fn Shift Fn PgUp PgDn Home Arrows Browse 3 7 19 CLEAR file Purpose Saves the contents of an open file on disk and then closes the file Syntax CLEAR file Remarks 120 Promula Application Development System User s Manual file is the logical identifier of the open file that you wish to save and close A logical file identifier is created by the DEFINE FILE statement A file is physically opened with the OPEN file statement See the description of the PROMULA noun File for more information about PROMULA Ss file system 3 7 20 CLEAR variable Purpose Clears scratch variables from memory Syntax 1 CLEAR Clears all scratch variables from memory Syntax 2 CLEAR vars Clears only specified scratch variables from memory Remarks vars isthe list of those variable identifiers that are to be cleared The values of a scratch variable are not stored permanently in memory they can be cleared or scratched from memory when you need to make room for the values of other variables This statement gives you the power to do what is sometimes call
131. 9 62 50 END 5011 639 62 oi DEFINE PROCEDURE proc3 5011 645 62 52 WRITE You are in Segment Seg3 5011 645 74 53 END proc3 5011 645 75 54 END SEGMENT Seg3 622 62 55 END PROGRAM 622 62 56 ckckckck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck k ck kk kk kk kk End Segment MAIN KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKEK The program in Figure 4 2 combines program segmentation and database management to give you what is sometimes called dynamic memory management Dynamic memory management means being able to develop and use large programs The memory management is achieved in two ways using database files to store program variables and using program segmentation to store program code When the program is compiled PROMULA creates two files the program segments are physically stored on the disk file named SEGMENT XEQ The array file Filex is physically stored on the disk file named SEGMENT DBA segment dba segment xeq Array Database File Segment File Var a three dimensional disk variable Figure 4 3 Hierarchical Structure of SEGMENT XEQ and the database SEGMENT DBA This diagram is the organizational chart of the program in Figure 4 2 and its supporting database The database is stored in a disk file referred to as Filex in the program The five segments are linked into a hierarchy of three levels of inheritance The level of inheritance is increasing from top to bottom in the diagram For example the segment MAIN inherits no information f
132. AL 10 2 Average Monthly Expense scalar abalns 1 REAL 10 2 Average Monthly Balance scalar The variable identifier is a short symbolic name for the variable and is used to refer to the variable in the program The variable structure is the scheme according to which its contents are organized and is usually expressed in terms of program sets The variable descriptor is a description or label for the variable and is supplied for program documentation and user interface purposes The variable format type specifies the kind of values the variable contains and their default display format If no type specification is included with the variable definition it will have format type REAL 8 0 by default This means that when the variable is displayed each of its values will fill a width of 8 characters and will be rounded to the nearest whole number 0 decimal digits Missing from the above definitions are the contents or values of the variables These may be introduced by the READ statements or by equations See Reading in Data and Writing Equations below PROMULA initially sets the values of 25 Promula Application Development System User s Manual variables to zero when they are defined unless a VALUE parameter is included with the variable definition It is also possible for a variable to obtain its values from a database See Chapter 4 for details The following figure shows the default displays of some of the program va
133. BLI BI b p c o indir An Indirect Variable ND VARIABLE DEFINE PROCEDURE selvar SELECT indir a b c DO IF END BREAK selvar END WRITE indir END PROCEDURE selvar You may notice that the definition of variable indir looks different from other variables defined in this chapter it has an asterisk at the end of its identifier This tells PROMULA that indir is an indirect Indirects can point to other variables Once they are pointing at a variable statements using the indirect will use the variable it points to instead of the indirect itself The PROMULA statements that can use indirects in this manner are the WRITE variable BROWSE variable EDIT variable READ variable SORT SELECT set IF and PLOT statements Thus one indirect can be used for the general input output needs of many program variables The statement SELECT indir a b c will clear the Main Screen see Advanced Windowing and list the identifiers and descriptors of variables a b and c for selection A prompt will appear at the bottom of the screen describing how to select a variable by moving to the desired variable with the arrow keys and pressing the Enter key The second way to let the user select from a list of variables is to use the ASK statement with a VARIABLE indirect option This method also assigns an indirect to the selected variable but the Main Screen is n
134. CHANGE n The CHANGE option allows the user to show a table of percent change in time series data for a previously defined time series dataset or array The percent change for time t is computed from values for time t and t 1 where t and t 1 are two consecutive selections of the time set The selections depend on the current local setting of the set They may or may not be consecutive time points There may be more than one time unit between them Following the keyword CHANGE a real number within parentheses is required It represents the number of time units to be used in computing percent change Internally it is divided by the difference in time values for selections t and t 1 Suppose values for 1970 and 1975 are used in computing the percent change That is the user has selected these years for computation and output generation Also s he wants to compute an annual percent change so one time unit a year is designated on the CHANGE option CHANGE 1 The change for 1975 is computed as the difference in values for 1970 and 1975 divided by the 1970 value and multiplied by 2 for annual change A factor of 100 gives the final result as a percent change from 1970 to 1975 in one year increments In the tabular display the words Percent Change in are placed in front of the original title from the variable definition If the TITLE option is used with the CHANGE option no words are prefixed GROWTH n The GROWTH option allows the user
135. DO set statement may be used with the READ variables statement to read data for array variables Examples 244 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Given the definitions DEFINE SET month 12 END SET DEFINE VARIABLI F A A Value B B Value C C Value D D Value mc month Month Codes mn month Month Names END VARIABL you may enter the values 1 and 200 for A and respectively as follows READ A 8 BN10 10 1 200 The following reads data for the vectors mc and mn DO month READ mc 3 mn 5 12 END month JAN January FEB February AR March APR April AY May JUN June JUL July AUG August SEP September OCT October NOV November DEC December The following read uses the N VALUE notation to specify repeated values in the data READ A B C D 2 1234567 2 9876543 After the read the data may be displayed by a WRITE TABLE statement For example the statement WRITE TABLE 1 BODY a b c d TITLE Table of scalars FORMAT 10 20 produces the following output Table of Scalars A Value 1 234 567 B Value 1 234 567 C Value 9 876 543 D Value 9 876 543 245 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 3 7 78 RUN Purpose Compiles a PROMULA source file or runs a PROMULA executable Syntax RUN file Remarks file is a string optionally in
136. Disk Variable on filea END VARIABLE filea DEFINE VARIABLE pp Record Pointer Scr A dynamic variable for accessing a single element of dsk DISK filea dsk pp END VARIABLE defines two variables dsk and scr The disk variable dsk is a vector of 1000 elements on the disk file named test dba The variable scr is a dynamic local variable that is related to dsk The READ DISK and WRITE DISK statements transfer a specific value from and to disk as illustrated in the dialog below scr 0 dsk i i 4 READ DISK scr 232 Promula Application Development System User s Manual WRITE scr A Scratch Variable in Memory 4 scr 6 WRITE DISK scr WRITE dsk L dsk pp A Disk Variable on filea 6 3 7 70 READ file Purpose Read data from a text file or a random file Syntax 1 Read the values of all variables in a record of a random file READ file Syntax 2 Read from a text file READ file varl fmt1 var2 fmt2 Remarks file isthe identifier of the file whose records you are reading varl isthe identifier of the variable whose data is first on each data record fmtl 15 format specification for var1 and has the following syntax piw where is an integer indicating the starting column on each data line where the value for var1 begins Thus the backslash means start reading in column
137. EAD DISK or WRITE DISK is executed For example to read in the data for dqst elements 41 through 60 assign the value 41 to qp and execute a READ DISK statement 4 1 3 More About Database Management 4 1 3 1 COPY file IMAGE It is possible to access a database without having to relate local variables to disk variables The easiest way to do this is with the COPY file IMAGE statement This variation of the COPY statement reads the definition of a database into memory and makes its sets variables and relations available for direct access For example if filea dba is an array file on disk the following code would load its definition into memory DEFINE FILE af TYPE ARRAY END OPEN af filea dba STATUS OLD COPY af IMAGE 4 1 3 2 The file variable and file set notations It is possible to directly access disk variables using the notation ile var Where file is the identifier of a file which has been opened to an array file on disk and var is the identifier of the database variable you wish to access Similarly the notation ile set may be used to reference sets in an array file 4 1 3 3 PAGED VIRTUAL and AUTOMATIC DYNAMIC Access Programs that manipulate database variables through virtual or direct access are easier to write than those that use dynamic access because explicit READ DISK WRITE DISK and CLEAR variables statements are not required Unfortunately virtual and direct access methods can be much slowe
138. EADING ON OFF EJECT to control the page heading used by PROMULA s report generator The report generator controls displays of multivariate information including writing multidimensional arrays writing tables and displaying results of the statistical functions The headings will also appear at the top of plots generated in batch mode When HEADING ON a page feed character and a header is written at the top of each page This header includes the descriptor for the program if available the current date in the form MM DD YY and the word Page followed by the page number which is incremented by 1 as a new page is shown This is the default When HEADING OFF no header or page feed character is written at the top of each page When HEADING EJECT only a page feed character is written in the header HELP filespec to select a dialog file to serve as an on line help file filespec is a quoted string or string variable containing the name of the physical disk file that contains the dialog file you want to use as an on line help file When the user presses Alt H in response to a prompt PROMULA looks for a DO IF HELP statement immediately following the statement that generated the prompt If a DO IF HELP block is found PROMULA executes statements in the block If no DO IF HELP block is found PROMULA checks to see if a dialog file has been specified with the SELECT HELP statement If so PROMULA will display the dialog file for browsing If you
139. EAST WEST DEFINE PROCEDURE selset SELECT ROW dir dirn SELECT SET dir WRITE dir END PROCEDURE selset Execution of procedure selset and selection of the first and fourth elements of set dir produce the following two displays 273 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Identifier Description 1 NORTH 2 SOUTH 3 EAST 4 WEST End Exit Arrows PgUp PgDn Home Move Ins Tag Del Untag Enter Select Identifier Description 1 NORTH 4 WES 3 7 95 SELECT set IF Purpose Select elements of a set according to a condition on a variable indexed by the set Syntax SELECT set IF condition Remarks set is the identifier of the set whose elements are being selected condition is any true false expression involving one or more array variables subscripted by set Only those elements for which condition is true are selected If condition is false for all elements the selection is null and all elements of set are selected To detect and correct for a null set selection use the DO IF NULL statement immediately after the SELECT SET IF statement example of this feature is in the section related to the DO IF NULL statement The selections made by SELECT set IF are made from the current selection vector of set Thus a cascading nested selection may be made by executing several SELECT set IF statements in series
140. EN 5 11 11 END proci okckckck ck ck ck ck kk kk kk End Segment Segl KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK END SEGMENT Segl STOP seg2 OPEN SEGMENT segment xeq STATUS OLD READ SEGMENT MAIN OPEN SEGMENT seg2 xeq STATUS NEW DEFINE SEGMENT Seg2 ck ck ck ck ck ckockckckckckckckck ck B gin S gm nt S g2 kk ck cock ck ckckckckck kck ck ck ck DEFINE VARIABLE var2 row page Data for Segment Seg2 D EFINE PROCEDURE proc2 WRITE You are in Segment Seg2 UO m 318 Promula Application Development System User s Manual END proc2 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK End Segment Seg2 KKKKKKKKKKK ck ck ck KKK END SEGMENT Seg2 STOP seg3 OPEN SEGMENT segment xeq STATUS OLD READ SEGMENT MAIN OPEN SEGMENT seg3 xeq STATUS NEW DEFINE SEGMENT Seg3 ck ck ck ck ck kk kk kv kx ko ko ko kk Begin Segment Seg3 ck ck ck ckck KKK KKK KKK DEFINE VARIABLE var3 row col Data for Segment Seg3 END DEFINE PROCEDURE proc3 WRITE You are in Segment Seg3 END proc3 kckckckckckckockckckckckckckck ck End Segment Seg3 ck ck ck ck ck ckckckckckck ck kckckckck END SEGMENT Seg3 STOP The file containing seg11 is shown below Notice that both parent segments seg1 and MAIN are opened and read at the top of this file This implicitly puts seg11 at inheritance level 2 unde
141. EQ 4 WRITE Name Date A Value B Value Sum of A B WRITE name l date 11 a 21 b 31 tot 41 ASK CONTINUE start END option 4 END start The statement SELECT pick option in procedure start produces the display below CKCk ck ckck kck ck ck ckck kck ck ck ck ck kck ck k ck ck k ck k k kk kk kckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck kck k ck k ck k ck k k kk kk A bd unce bar highlights the first selection Return to PROMULA which is the text between he first two backslashes in the d finition of menu pick You may make by Selection Menu pressing a function key F1 F2 F3 or F4 or a numeric key 1 2 3 or 4 using the movement keys and the Enter key to pick a selection pointing and clicking in the selection field between the back slashes with a mouse or ther pointer device If yqu select option 2 Edit Input Values PROMULA will execute the statement EDI data name date a b and pill display the following EDIT menu display Press the desired 148 Promula Application Development System User s Manual A Data Menu k kik kk kk kk KKK KK KKK RK Enter Edit Inputs Name Date 00 00 00 A Value B Value JERR IIR koc kk ck ko kk koe kk ko kk ORR ke kk ck kc kk ke ke ko ke ke ke ke ke ke koe End Exit Arrows Home Select Enter Edit Her
142. ET 100 Records 187 Promula Application Development System User s Manual END SET DEFINE VARIABLE arrl varl rec Variable 1 YPE REAL 8 0 var2 rec Variable 2 YPE STRING 8 var3 rec Variable 3 YPE DATE 8 tj ND VARIABLI DEFINE VARIABLE rn Record Number ND VARIABLI tj Es rn 1 DO txtl READ txtl varl rn var2 rn var3 rn rn rntl END txtl 3 Copy a random file to an array file rn 1 DO ranl varl rn iteml var2 rn item2 var3 rn item3 rn rntl END ranl 4 an array file to a random file rn 1 DO rec SELECT rani rn iteml varl item2 var2 item3 var3 WRITE ranl rn rntl END rec 5 List a random file DO ranl WRITE item1 8 item2 8 item3 8 END ranl 3 7 43 DO IF Purpose Executes a group of statements once if a condition is met Syntax DO IF condition statement ELSE condition statement END 188 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Remarks condition is any Boolean expression i e an expression that is either true or false If true the statements immediately following are executed until the next END or ELSE statement whichever is first If false the statements immediately following are not executed and execution proceeds to the next ELSE or END statement whichev
143. FINE SET month 12 12 Months row 04 04 Months col 10 10 columns END the statement BROWSE SET produces the display below for browsing 107 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Description 12 Months 04 Rows 10 Columns Press any key to continue 3 7 13 BROWSE set Purpose Shows the selection keys descriptors order and range of the currently active elements of a set Syntax BROWSE set Remarks set is the identifier of the set being shown Upon execution the BROWSE set statement clears the Main Screen and lists the elements of set for browsing Examples DEFINE SET month 12 END SET EFINE VARIABLE mn month Month Name TYPE STRING 12 END VARIABLI READ mn 4 JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT OV DEC SELECT ROW month mn g Given the definitions and relations above the statement BROWSE month produced the display below 3 7 14 BROWSE TABLE Purpose Displays a table of several variables on the screen to let you browse their values by page 108 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Syntax BROWSE TABLE sets TITLE title FORMAT rw cw BODY text1 varl fmt1 text2 var2 fmt2 Remarks sets is a list of the identifiers of the sets classifying columns and pages of the variables in the table The first se
144. Figures Sales Costs Profit January 13 200 9 200 4 000 February 12 100 8 600 3 500 March 14 800 10 400 4 400 April 16 200 11 300 4 900 May 15 200 10 700 4 500 June 17 200 12 100 5 100 July 18 060 12 700 5 360 August 18 960 13 350 5 610 September 19 900 14 000 5 900 October 20 900 14 700 6 200 November 21 950 15 440 6 510 December 23 050 16 210 6 840 Average monthly Profit 5 235 00 Figure 2 4 Contents of File DEMO OUT 2 1 2 9 F9 Run a Menu of Applications Main Menu option 9 is used to start the application PROMULA XEQ A default PROMULA XEQ program is distributed with PROMULA This application displays a menu from which you may access either the PROMULA course or any of the sample programs provided with your PROMULA package The sample programs and the course can help you learn to write and use your own PROMULA programs PROMULA XEQ is a standard PROMULA executable its source code is contained in the file PRMDEMO PRM and it may be replaced by a program you create that supports a menu of your own applications To do this create a PROMULA executable called PROMULA XEQ Note that the name of the executable file launched by selecting Main Menu option 9 is hardwired in the system and must be PROMULA XEQ 2 1 2 10 F10 Use the PROMULA Language Selecting Main Menu option 10 numeric key 0 puts PROMULA into direct or Command Mode In this mode PROMULA accepts a single statement of source instructions
145. HILE loop DEFINE VARIABLE END VARIABLE 0 DO WHILE x LT 3 WRITE x Top of the loop x x 1 WRITE x Bottom of the loop END WHILE 0 Top of the loop 1 Bottom of the loop 1 Top of the loop 2 Bottom of the loop 2 3 Top of the loop Bottom of the loop 3 7 57 EDIT menu Purpose Displays a data menu for editing Syntax EDIT menu vars Remarks menu is the identifier of a data menu vars isa list of variable identifiers that contain the values of the data fields being edited The variables in the list must be arranged in the same order as the menu data fields to which they correspond Data menus contain a number of data fields to be edited by the user In the DEFINE MENU statement each data field is denoted by a series of contiguous at 9 or tilde characters equal in number to the width of the data field The data fields are ordered from left to right and from top to bottom of the menu Upon execution the data menu becomes a screen display that has the first data field highlighted Use the movement keys to highlight the desired data field To edit the highlighted data field press the Enter key and enter the new value as prompted at the bottom of the screen Data fields may also be selected by point and click operations with a mouse The menu display will be clipped by the boundaries of the window opened to the Main Scr
146. IABLE s define two variables sales and msales Variable sales is a two dimensional array that has six rows classified by the product set and 12 columns classified by the month set Variable msales is a vector variable of 12 monthly values The ile option of the DEFINE SET statement is used to put set definitions into the structure of an array file DEFINE FILE fill TYPE ARRAY END FILE OPEN fill array dba STATUS NEW DEFINE SET fill row 10 SET ROW col 10 SET COL END SET DEFINE VARIABLE fill a row col TYPE REAL 10 3 TH ATRIX ATRIX Uo as AE b row col YPE REAL 10 3 TH ND VARIABLE CLEAR fill Given the array file definition above the statement COPY fill produces the following report DEFINE FILE FIL1 TYPE ARRAY END OPEN FILI FIL1 dba STATUS NEW DEFINE SET FIL1 ROW 10 SET ROW COL 10 SET COL END DEFINE VARIABLE FIL1 A ROW COL TYPE REAL 10 3 THE A MATRIX B ROW COL TYPE REAL 10 3 THE B MATRIX END Note that the sets row and col are on file 111 along with the variables they subscript 168 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 3 7 35 DEFINE SYSTEM
147. INDOW DO DIRECTORY DO FILE DO IF ELSE DO IF END DO IF ERROR DO IF ESCAPE DO IF HELP DO IF KEYPRESS DO IF NULL DO set DO UNTIL DO WHILE FIELD in Popup Menu definitions TOPIC In Dialog files WRITE COMMENT WRITE TEXT Xo x X These structured statements contain free form text therefore the END statement must be capitalized and start in column 1 to distinguish it from other occurrences of the word end in the text No comment is allowed after these END statements The END SEGMENT and END PROGRAM statements are special cases of the END and are discussed in the following two sections 3 7 61 END PROGRAM Purpose Ends a program and writes the executable code and data to the currently open segment file on disk The logical identifier of the segment is MAIN Both the program code and the data values of its variables are saved on disk 218 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Syntax END PROGRAM MAIN DO proc Remarks MAIN isthe default identifier of any executable program module proc is the identifier of a procedure in segment MAIN When the program is read in this procedure is executed automatically Upon compilation this statement terminates the program and writes on a disk file the information of the program The start of the program is the DEFINE PROGRAM statement The program is written on the disk file specified on the last OPEN SEGMENT statement To
148. INE PROCEDURE noesc WRITE Pleas nter the value READ val DO IF ESCAPE WRITE There is no escape END IF ESCAPE WRITE The value is val 8 3 END PROCEDURE noesc A dialog with procedure noesc is shown below DO noesc Pleas nter the valu Esc There is no escape 100 193 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The value is 100 000 3 7 47 DO IF HELP Purpose Executes a group of statements if the user presses the Alt and H keys simultaneously in response to a prompt Syntax DO IF HELP statement END Remarks statement is any executable statement no definitions including another DO statement When the user enters Alt H in response to a prompt PROMULA executes the group of executable statements between the DO IF HELP and the END statement then re executes the statement immediately preceding the DO IF HELP statement This statement is usually used to provide the user with information relating to a Data menu or a Pick menu This statement and the SELECT HELP statement are useful for customizing on line help for your applications Pressing Alt H in response to a Popup pick menu will cause PROMULA to display a specific topic of a dialog file as indicated in the definition of the pick menu Examples In the example shown on the next page the dialog file dohelp1 h1p provides context specific help for the user editing the data menu data T
149. INE SET file DEFINE VARIABLE file and DEFINE RELATION file statements as described in Chapter 3 DEFINE DEFINE VARIABLE af datl drow dcol dpag A 3 dimensional Array on af dat2 drow dcol A 2 dimensional Array on af datb drow dcol dpag A 3 dimensional Array on af END VARIABLE 299 Promula Application Development System User s Manual When a database is first created PROMULA initializes its variables numeric variables are given the value zero and non numeric variables are initialized with empty strings Once the database variables are defined they may be initialized with your data We will do so here by using the disk variables themselves i e by direct access READ 1 111 121 131 141 211 221 231 241 311 321 331 341 112 122 132 142 212 222 232 242 312 322 332 342 dat2 r c datl r c l1 10 datb dati 100 The database structure and data can be physically saved and its file closed with a CLEAR file statement CLEAR af That s all there is to it The database is defined and ready to use Of course this is a very simplistic database it only contains three small numeric array variables The methodology for constructing larger more complex databases containing all types of PROMULA variables is the same Define an array file and open it physically on disk 2 Use the DEFINE SET DEFINE VARIABLE and DEFINE RELATION statements to define the str
150. If omitted the reading begins in column 1 w 18 an integer indicating the width of the value and it means read the next w columns If omitted the default width is the width specified in the definition of var1 The format specification may be omitted in which case the data may be entered in free form In free form the values of variables may be entered anywhere on an input line provided they are separated by commas or blanks var2 isthe identifier of the variable whose data is second on each data record fmt2 is the format specification for var2 and may have the same form as mt1 above If p is omitted from fmt2 reading begins in the column following the last character of the last value read Examples 1 Read from a text file and write to a random file DEFINE FILE txtl TYPE TEXT 233 Promula Application Development System User s Manual ranl TYPE RANDOM arrl TYPE ARRAY END FILE OPEN ranl ranl ran STATUS NEW DEFINE VARIABLE ranl iteml Item 1 YPE REAL 8 0 item2 Item 2 YPE STRING 8 item3 Item 3 YPE DATE 8 END VARIABLE ranl o Ud EN txt1 txtl txt STATUS OLD DO txtl READ txtl iteml1 8 item2 8 item3 8 WRITE ranl END txtl 2 Read from a text file and write to an array file DEFINE SET 100 Records END SET OPEN arrl arrl arr STATUS
151. Kilobytes when both vari and var11 in RAM This segmentation saves you 40 Kilobytes of RAM space Thus in this example you only require 40 Kilobytes of RAM to use 280 Kilobytes of data values Figure 4 5 below contains a sample interaction with the program SEGMENT XEQ Figure 4 5 An Interactive Run with a Segmented Program PROMULA RUN PROGRAM segment xeq PROMULA DO proc You are in Segment MAIN You are in Segment Segl You are in Segment Segl1 You are in Segment Seg2 You are in Segment Seg3 PROMULA AUDIT SET Identifier Description ROW COL PAGE 316 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Figure 4 5 An Interactive Run with a Segmented Program PROMULA AUDIT VARIABLE Identifier Description VAR Data for Segment MAIN VAR3 Data for Segment Seg3 var 10 PROMULA SELECT row 450 455 col 4 8 page 1 PROMULA WRITE var A Segmented Program with a Database Page 1 Data for Segment MAIN PAGE 1 COL 4 COL 5 COL 6 COL 7 COL 8 ROW 450 10 10 10 10 10 ROW 451 10 10 10 10 10 ROW 452 10 10 10 10 10 ROW 453 10 10 10 10 10 ROW 454 10 10 10 10 10 ROW 455 10 10 10 10 10 4 2 2 Multi Segment Programs in Separate Disk Files If the segments of your program become very large or if you just want the convenience of being able to edit and debug them independently you can store each segment in a
152. LUES BY ROW AND COL END VARIABLE a RANDOM 5000 9999 The values of variable a may be displayed by the statement WRITE a VALUES BY ROW AND COL PAG 1 COL 1 COL 2 ROW 1 6 079 6 825 ROW 2 8 046 5 052 ROW 3 8 567 8 882 ROW 4 8 988 7 825 PAG 2 COL 1 COL 2 ROW 1 7 007 6 409 ROW 2 6 613 7 083 ROW 3 6 611 9 819 ROW 4 9 152 5 168 The report produced by the statement DO DESCRIBE col row a 2 is shown below Set row is the last set in sets so it indexes the observations set col is used to partition the data for each table Set pag is not specified in sets so its descriptors do not appear in the titles of the tables and the statistics reported correspond to the first level of pag Descriptive Statistics for VALUES BY ROW AND COL 184 Promula Application Development System User s Manual COL 1 No of Observations 4 Number Excluded 0 Valid Observations 4 Arithmetic Mean 7 919 92 Variance 1 241 510 00 Standard Error 1 286 603 Standard Deviation 1 114 231 Skewness 0 8583 Kurtosis 0 8961 Total Range 2 909 62 Minimum Value 6 078 70 Maximum Value 8 9388 32 Descriptive Statistics for VALUES BY ROW AND COL COL 2 No of Observations 4 Number Excluded 0 Valid Observations 4 Arithmetic Mean 7 146 30 Variance 1 990 345 00 Standard Error 1 629 047 Standard Deviation 1 410 796 Skewness 0 3267 Kurtosis i
153. Loss Ledger Accounts END SET DEFINE VARIABLE mp Profit and Loss Figures 5 YPE REAL 10 0 yn year Year Names TYPE STRING 12 Profit and Loss Account Names YPE STRING 12 Profit and Loss Account Names YPE STRING 12 END VARIABLE DEFINE RELATION ROW year yn KEY acnt acn END RELATION EAD yn 5 987 1988 EAD acn 7 ales Costs Profit EAD acc 7 ACNT 1 ACNT 2 ACNT 3 Uu uou The dialog below shows how the SELECT RELATION statement can change the column descriptors for set acnt WRITE mp Profit and Loss Figures Sales Costs Profit 1987 50 000 48 000 2 000 1988 91 000 86 000 5 000 Change the column labels for set acnt using a SELECT COLUMN statement SELECT COLUMN acnt acc WRITE mp Profit and Loss Figures ACNT 1 ACNT 2 ACNT 3 1987 50 000 48 000 2 000 1988 91 000 86 000 5 000 The ROW relation between variable acn and set acnt is still in place WRITE acc 40 Profit and Loss Account Names Sales ACNT 1 Costs ACNT 2 Profit ACNT 3 Restore the COLUMN relation between acnt and acn SELECT COLUMN WRITE mp Profit and Loss Figures 270 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Sales Costs Profit 1987 50 000 48 000 2 000 1988 91 000 86 000 5 000 3 7 93 SELECT set Purpose Selects elements of
154. MENT writes text in the Comment window without prompting for browsing BROWSE COMMENT writes text in the Comment window with prompting for browsing The displays of all other input output statements are shown in the Action window The following procedure is an example of Basic Windows DEFINE PROCEDURE window SELECT COMMENT 12 WRITE TEXT his text was produced by the WRITE TEXT statement Note that it shows up in the Action Window upper half of screen END BROWSE COMMENT The PROMULA code that produced the text in the above window is WRITE TEX This text was produced by the WRITE TEXT statement Note that it shows up in the Action Window upper half of screen END END WRITE COMMENT This text was produced by the WRITE COMMENT statement Note that it shows up in the Comment Window lower half of screen END BROWSE TEXT The PROMULA code that produced the text in the window below is WRITE COMMENT This text was produced by the WRITE COMMENT statement Note that it shows up in the Comment Window lower half of screen END END END PROCEDURE window Upon execution of this procedure the following display results 88 Promula Application Development System User s Manual This text was produced by the WRITE TEXT statement Note that it shows
155. MULA program stored in the executable file program xeq See the RUN statement for more information on PROMULA s run statements 3 7 84 RUN SOURCE Purpose Compiles a PROMULA source code and displays the listing on the console Syntax RUN SOURCE filename Remarks filename is the name of a text file containing PROMULA statements Upon execution PROMULA will compile the code contained in the file named by filename The compilation will be shown on the screen After a successful compilation control can be returned to the calling program by a STOP statement The RUN SOURCE statement can be a convenient alternative to using the dialog driven compiler F5 from the Main Menu It is most useful for recompiling all the segments in a multisegment program which should be done whenever the top level segment is changed and recompiled You can also compile PROMULA source files using the simple RUN statement but this will not show the compilation on the console 3 7 85 SELECT ENTRY Purpose Allows the user to make a selection from a list of set elements Syntax SELECT ENTRY set Remarks set is the identifier of a set Upon execution the SELECT ENTRY statement clears the Main Screen and displays the elements of set for browsing The display contains the set element codes and their row descriptors A prompt at the bottom of the Prompt Screen describes how to browse the list and make a selection The keyboard action duri
156. Main Menu To write and or edit PROMULA source programs you can use your own text editor or PROMULA s Text Editor Main Menu option 4 76 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 3 1 16 Relation Definition A relation is a rule of correspondence between the elements of a set and the contents of a variable indexed subscripted by that set A set is a classification scheme and as such it is an abstraction Its elements are usually ordered from 1 to n where n is the size of the set However if related to a variable of n values the elements of the set take on a less abstract meaning For example the set month is an ordered set of the numbers 1 2 12 The string variable mn month contains 12 values that are the month names January February December If the set month and the variable mn are related then the elements of the set month and the values of the variable mn have the following correspondence Set month Variable mn 1 January 2 February 12 December PROMUDLA supports four kinds of relations ROW specifies the variable whose values will serve as the primary descriptor for a set s elements The primary descriptor values are used to label rows of values classified by the set in WRITE BROWSE and EDIT statements They are also used in bar plots page headings and displays of the set itself COLUMN specifies the variable whose values will serve as the column descriptor for a set s elements The
157. Manual For more details see the discussion of the PROMULA noun Window 3 7 16 BROWSE TOPIC Purpose Browse a specific topic from a dialog file Syntax BROWSE TOPIC filespec n Remarks filespec is a quoted string or string variable containing the name of the physical disk file where the dialog file that you desire to browse is stored This name is formatted according to the file naming conventions for your operating system n is the dialog topic sequence number as defined by its place in the dialog file of the specific topic you wish to browse Upon execution the BROWSE TOPIC statement displays the specified topic for browsing Examples The use of this statement is demonstrated in the context of the example given in the DEFINE DIALOG statement 3 7 17 BROWSE VARIABLE Purpose Produces a full or partial listing of the variables in a given program for browsing Syntax BROWSE VARIABLE vars Remarks vars is a list of variable identifiers If vars is omitted the variables are listed in the order in which they were defined otherwise the sets are listed in the order specified by vars The BROWSE VARIABLE statement differs from the AUDIT VARIABLE statement in that it lets you interactively browse a long list of variables while the audit does not Examples Given the definitions below DEFINE VARIABLE a The A Value b The B Value c The C Value END VARIABLE the state
158. N txtcpy textcopy prm STATUS NEW DEFINE SET rec 4 col 6 END SET SELECT rec 1 2 col COPY orignl INTO txtcpy DATA CLEAR txtcpy CLEAR orignl The file textcopy prm is shown below This text file could be edited or used directly to create a partial copy of the original database DEFINE FILE ORIGNL TYPE ARRAY END OPEN ORIGNL ORIGNL dba STATUS NEW DEFINE SET ORIGNL REC 4 COL 6 END DEFINE VARIABLE ORIGNL A REC COL TYPE REAL 10 1 The A Matrix 131 Promula Application Development System User s Manual REAL 10 1 The B Matrix ECN REC TYPE STRING 10 STRING 10 z EFINE RELATION ORIGNL ECN OLUMN COL COLN ELECT REC 1 2 Notice that PROMULA inserts set selection statements ELECT COL 3 5 6 here and also restricts the range of data values for the READS I oQouomnlBouumnnos o i i 2 EJ D A 12 1 1000001 2000001 D 12 1 A 3 5 100000 3 A 3 100000 3 W A 5 200000 6 100000 6 200000 PR Ae PR Ae PR 1000001 5 200000 6 100000 6 200000 Ed Dj Dd Dd bd EH pi pi pi pi 2000001 D RECN 10 L ROW 2 D COLN 10 COL 3 COL 5 COL 6
159. ND 253 Promula Application Development System User s Manual END MENU DEFINE VARIABLE pick Selection fldno Field Number flddes Field Description TYPE STRING 25 5 ND VARIABLI H3 DEFINE PROCEDURE selfld ASK Would you like to change a Menu field Y or N Y WRITE Enter Field Number 1 thru 9 READ fldno ASK Would you like to blank or change the field B or C B SELECT FIELD pickit FIELD fldno ELSE C WRITE Enter new field descriptor up to 25 characters READ flddes SELECT FIELD pickit FIELD fldno DESCRIPTOR flddes END selfld ELSE N END END DEFINE PROCEDURE demo SELECT pickit pick WRITE GOTOXY 0 10 DO IF pick EQ 5 selfld ELSE WRITE SELECTION pick END IF demo END PROCEDURE demo 3 7 87 SELECT file Purpose Selects a record of a random file for data access or selects one or more records from an inverted file for data access Syntax SELECT file key Remarks file isthe identifier of the inverted or random file you are accessing key is the sequence number or the scalar variable whose value is the sequence number of the record you wish to access Alternatively key is a code used for selecting the records of an inverted file If file is of type RANDOM th
160. NE VARIABLE mv month Month Value mc month Month Code YPE CODE 5 mn month Month Name YPE STRING 12 x x Value y y Value indir An Indirect Variable tj ND VARIABLI DEFINE RELATION KEY month mc ROW month mn 97 Promula Application Development System User s Manual END RELATION DEFINE PROCEDURE selmon ASK Select months or LIST or END END SE LIST WRITE month selmon SE W SET month RITE selected months are WRITE mv END ask END PROCEDURE selmon l234570678 9 10 IL 12 JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC READ mn January February March April May June July August September October November December Given the definitions and initializations above we can execute procedure selmon to demonstrate the behavior of the ASK statement for making set selections A sample dialog with procedure selmon is shown below selmon Select months or LIST or END LIST Member Description JAN January FEB February MAR March APR April MAY May JU June JUL July AUG August SEP September OCT October NOV November DEC December Select months or LIST or END may dec The selected months are Month Value May 5 December 12 selmon Select months or LIST or END 98 Promula Application Development Sy
161. OGRAM statement introduces a segment file with the logical name MAIN The logical name for a data file is introduced via the DEFINE FILE statement The physical name is the name by which the file is known to the operating system A physical file name must be specified according to the file naming conventions of the particular operating system that you are using Before a given file can be accessed it must be opened i e declared to the operating system via its physical file name The physical name of a segment file is specified via the OPEN SEGMENT statement The physical name of a data file is specified via the OPEN file statement 3 1 9 6 Interface PROMULA Files with Other Software PROMULA text files may be used directly by other software or programs written in other languages such as FORTRAN and C In the case of text files this interface is automatic By definition a text file is a file that may be treated as text To show its contents for example you may use the TYPE COPY or PRINT command of your operating system To change the contents of a text file you may use a text editor It is through text files that PROMULA communicates with other software such as electronic spreadsheets word processors and database managers To access PROMULA text files by programs written in other languages such as FORTRAN or C you need to use the appropriate OPEN READ and WRITE statements of these languages Users of the virtual data man
162. OMULA Text Editor If you want to create dynamic multi color multi window displays you may use PROMULA s DEFINE WINDOW and OPEN WINDOW statements To find out more about PROMULA s windowing statements see the discussions of Basic and Advanced Windowing and the PROMULA statements DEFINE WINDOW OPEN WINDOW and CLEAR WINDOW 45 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 2 2 6 Application Programming Summary The discussion of application programming above is not intended to teach you how to program or to present the elements of good programming style These skills can only be developed through experience and practice From here you should play with the source and executable versions of the budget program These are included on the PROMULA Sample Applications Disk in the files BUDGET PRM and BUDGET XEQ You should also browse through the contents of Chapter 3 the PROMULA language reference Refer to Table 3 3 for a brief description of all the statements of PROMULA Once you have an idea of the statements available to you try writing your own applications Before you start writing large scale applications refer to Chapter 4 for a discussion of database management and program management issues in PROMULA 46 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 3 PROMULA LANGUAGE REFERENCE The purpose of this chapter is to provide the detailed information you need to use the statements of PROMULA and
163. OW 1 24 5 56 34 21 ROW 2 98 76 34 2 14 ROW 3 11 23 41 17 32 ROW 4 54 10 99 2 20 ROW 5 1 22 4 35 ROW 6 51 49 48 47 46 ROW 7 11 31 33 22 11 ROW 8 33 15 67 22 44 ROW 9 79 21 59 85 69 ROW 10 33 99 1 98 49 3 7 98 STOP Purpose Returns control to the calling program after a RUN statement Syntax STOP Remarks PROMULA s run statements RUN file RUN COMMAND and RUN SOURCE allow you to run programs while in command mode or from within procedures The STOP statement returns control to the program that executed the last RUN statement Execution resumes at the statement following the run statement See example in the discussion of the RUN COMMAND statement The PROMULA Main Menu is at the top of every run chain 3 7 99 STOP PROMULA Purpose 280 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Stops PROMULA execution and returns control to the operating system Syntax STOP PROMULA Remarks Sometimes it is useful to stop execution of the PROMULA system altogether and return to the operating system the STOP PROMULA statement enables you to do this 3 7 100 TIME Purpose Initializes the values of the four time parameters used in controlling dynamic simulations Syntax TIME dt beginning ending SIZE w d Remarks dt is a real number that will be used to set the value of DT the integration interval for time integrals beginning is a real number that will be used to set th
164. PROMULA reloads itself deletes the PROMULA 000 file and returns to the application Note on machines with a virtual operating system where much more memory is available PROMULA will not write itself to disk You should not use the RUN DOS statement to load RAM resident programs Be warned that some uses of the RUN DOS statement are inherently non portable and your application may require source code changes if it is moved across the various platforms on which PROMULA runs Examples The statement RUN DOS dir b will produce a directory listing for the files on drive b Similarly the statement RUN DOS edit myfile txt will run the program edit with a command line argument of myfile txt 3 7 82 RUN EDITOR Purpose Loads a file into the PROMULA Text Editor for editing Syntax RUN EDITOR filename Remarks 249 Promula Application Development System User s Manual filename is String optionally in quotes or a string variable containing the name of the text file you wish to edit This name is the file specification you use to identify the file to the operating system Upon execution the text file is brought into your work space for editing using the text editor The normal text colors for the Main Screen will be used by the editor You may also use the editor while running a PROMULA application by pressing the Esc key to interrupt the application and then selecting Main Menu option 4 load the editor NOTE The amou
165. PgUp PgDn Home Arrows Browse Pressing the F2 key browses up the column or second dimension as shown in the screen below 110 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The Table Title COL 7 COL 8 COL 9 COL 10 The Total of A and B 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 The A Values End Exit Fn Shift Fn PgUp PgDn Home Arrows Browse Note that this page shows columns six through ten of the table Note also that the primary descriptors of set row are used as the row descriptors of the table This is because set row was deliberately omitted from the sets specification in the BROWSE TABLE statement for this example See also the DEFINE TABLE EDIT TABLE and WRITE TABLE statements 3 7 15 BROWSE TEXT Purpose Displays text for browsing in the Action Window Basic Windows or the Main Screen Advanced Windows Syntax BROWSE TEXT text END Remarks text is any text that you enter The keyword END must be entered starting in column 1 and must be capitalized Upon execution the text will be shown by page in the Action Window or the current Main Screen of the display A prompt at the bottom of the Prompt Screen will let you browse the text The text will be clipped to the width of the window opened to the Main Screen or the Action Window No more than 255 lines approximately 40 pages of text may be stored in a single BROWSE TEXT statement 111 Promula Application Development System User s
166. RELATION ROW row rows COLUMN col cols KEY state stcode TIME year yearv END RELATION rows i This is Row i cols i Column i READ stcode NY CA 162 Promula Application Development System User s Manual READ yearv 1981 1982 After defining the relations and initializing the label variables the WRITE vara report is more meaningful A 4 Dimensional Array NY 1981 Column 1 Column 2 This is Row 1 1 1 This is Row 2 HE 1 This is Row 3 1 1 CA 1981 Column 1 Column 2 This is Row 1 1 1 This is Row 2 1 1 This is Row 3 1 1 4 Dimensional Array NY 1982 Column 1 Column 2 This is Row 1 1 1 This is Row 2 1 1 This is Row 3 1 1 1982 Column 1 Column 2 This is Row 1 1 1 This is Row 2 1 1 This is Row 3 1 1 Note here that the contents of the variables rows cols stcode and yearv have now become the row column and page descriptors of the multidimensional array vara Set descriptors and keys may also be specified by the READ set statement and changed by the SELECT relation statement 3 7 33 DEFINE SEGMENT Purpose Defines a program segment as part of a hierarchical tree structure of segments Syntax DEFINE SEGMENT seg desc statement END SEGMENT seg DO proc 163 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Remarks seg is the identifier of the segment desc is a
167. ROW 3 0 WRITE dd A Dynamic Disk Variable 0 The following statements fixd 10 scr 20 READ dsk L23 rp 2 READ DISK dd put values into the variables WRITE fixd A Fixed Variable 10 WRITE scr A Scratch Variable 20 WRITE dsk A Disk Variable on filea ROW 1 1 ROW 2 2 ROW 3 3 WRITE dd 122 Promula Application Development System User s Manual A Dynamic Disk Variable 2 The statement CLEAR clears the values of the scratch variable scr from memory the fixed variable fixd and the disk variable dsk are not effected as can be verified in the dialog below WRITE fixd A Fixed Variable 10 WRITE scr A Scratch Variable 0 WRITE dsk A Disk Variable on filea ROW 1 1 ROW 2 2 ROW 3 3 The treatment of dynamic variables such as is a little more difficult to illustrate dd is cleared from memory by the CLEAR statement but as soon as it is referenced in an expression such as a WRITE statement or used in the right hand side of an equation PROMULA automatically reads it in from disk The dialog below illustrates this behavior STATEMENTS MEANING dd 100 Variable is given a value via an equation WRITE dd A Dynamic Disk Variable 100 rp 2 Variable dd is given a value via an explicit READ DISK dd READ DISK statement WRITE dd A Dynamic Disk Variable 2 rp 3 Variable dd is
168. ROW 8 33 x5 67 22 44 ROW 4 54 10 99 2 20 Sort the elements of set row in descending order using the values of the 5th column of variable var2 SELECT col 5 SORT DESCENDING row USING var2 SELECT col WRITE var2 A 2 Dimensional Array COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 COL 5 ROW 9 79 21 59 85 69 ROW 10 33 99 1 98 49 ROW 6 51 49 48 47 46 ROW 8 33 15 67 22 44 ROW 5 1 22 3 4 35 ROW 3 11 23 41 17 32 ROW 1 24 5 56 34 21 ROW 4 54 10 99 2 20 ROW 2 98 76 34 2 14 ROW 7 11 31 33 22 TX Sort the elements of set co1 in ascending order using the values of the 8th row of variable var2 SELECT row 8 SORT ASCENDING col USING var2 SELECT row WRITE var2 A 2 Dimensional Array COL 2 COL 4 COL 1 COL 5 COL 3 279 Promula Application Development System User s Manual ROW 1 5 34 24 21 56 ROW 2 76 2 98 14 34 ROW 3 23 17 TI 32 41 ROW 4 10 2 54 20 99 ROW 5 22 4 1 35 3 ROW 6 49 47 Sl 46 48 ROW 7 31 22 11 11 33 ROW 8 15 22 33 44 67 ROW 9 21 85 79 69 59 ROW 10 99 98 33 49 1 Sort the elements of set co1 in descending order using the values of the 2nd row of variable var2 SELECT row 2 SORT DESCENDING col USING var2 SELECT row WRITE var2 A 2 Dimensional Array COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 COL 5 R
169. S NEW DEFINE PROGRAM A Demo Program DEFINE SET month 12 Months of the Year acnt 3 Profit and Loss Ledger Accounts END SET DEFINE VARIABLE mp month acnt Monthly Profit and Loss Figures TYPE REAL 10 0 amp Average Monthly Profit YPE REAL 10 2 mn month Month Names YPE STRING 12 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Profit and Loss Account Names TYPE STRING 12 END VARIABLE DEFINE RELATION ROW month mn COLUMN acnt acn KEY acnt acn END RELATION READ mn January February March April May June July August September October November December READ acn 6 Sales Costs Profit DEFINE PROCEDURE profits ELECT acnt Sales WRITE Pleas nter the monthly sales figures READ mp acnt month SELECT acnt Costs WRITE Pleas nter the monthly cost figures READ mp acnt month SELECT acnt mp m 3 mp m 1 mp m 2 amp SUM m mp m 3 12 WRITE mp WRITE amp END PROCEDURE profits END PROGRAM DO profits Figure 2 2 Source Code of DEMO PRM This code defines complete interactive application that can help its user enter monthly sales and costs figures and compute and report the monthly profits and the average monthly profit 2 1 1 Starting PROMULA Typically you will start PROMULA from the DOS
170. SELECT ENTRY statement DEFINE SET yrs 5 END SET DEFINE WINDOW cwind 1 22 78 23 white black bright full single yellow black POPUP mwind 0 0 79 20 green black white black yellow red bright END WINDOW DEFINE VARIABLE yrsn yrs Year Names TYPE STRING 10 yrsv yrs Year Values END VARIABLE yrsv i i yrsn i yrsvt yrs SELECT ROW yrs yrsn DEFINE PROCEDURE getyrs PEN cwind COMMENT N mwind MAIN TE COMMENT D R p p Please select the number of years you will serve YOU MUST SERVE AT LEAST 1 YEAR 190 Promula Application Development System User s Manual END SELECT ENTRY yrs DO IF END getyrs END IF END yrsv yrs s WRITE Your must serve yrsv 2 years THANK YOU END PROCEDURE getyrs Identifier Description JONES 2 yrs 3 yrs 4 yrs 5 yrs End Exit Arrows PgUp PgDn Home Move Enter Select Please select the number of years you will serve YOU MUST SERVE AT LEAST 1 YEAR 2 The DO IF END statement may also be used to detect a null set selection This usage is obsolete it is available only to keep PROMULA compatible with previous versions Use the DO IF NULL statement instead DEFINE SET mn 12 12 Months END SET DEFINE VARIABLE
171. T i SELECT ROW pnt p DEFINE FUNCTION fx x y END FUNCTION Given the definitions above the statement 105 Promula Application Development System User s Manual BROWSE fx 10 4 TITLE Y x x 2 would clear the Main Screen and produce a tabular display of function x for browsing as shown below 00 00 00 16 00 25 00 36 00 49 00 64 00 81 00 100 00 121 00 144 00 169 00 196 00 225 00 256 00 289 00 324 00 361 00 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T BW P B P P B P P P P P P P P 4 CO F2 C Bw OOH 4 CO End Exit Fn Shift Fn PgUp PgDn Home Arrows Browse 3 7 11 BROWSE menu Purpose Displays a data menu including the values of its data fields This statement is useful for displaying a screen of text and data Syntax BROWSE menu vars Remarks menu is the identifier of a data menu A data menu is a screen template which is designed to help its user to edit and display data The fields in a data menu are previously defined in a DEFINE MENU statement vars isa list of variable identifiers that contain the values of the data fields to be displayed The variables in the list must be in the same order as the data fields in the menu from left to right and top to bottom to wh
172. T DATE statement UPPERCASE w contains string values that are automatically converted to uppercase when they are input from the keyboard 175 Promula Application Development System User s Manual set w contains integers from 0 to N If the values of the set type variable are within the range of set the descriptors of set are displayed otherwise the variable is assigned and displays the value 0 This type of variable is useful for helping the user enter or verify categorical data Where w is an integer denoting the width in characters of subsequent displays of the values of var The maximum width for a code type variable is 6 characters isan integer denoting the number of decimal digits in subsequent displays of the values of real variables If is 10 or greater the number will be shown in exponential notation base 10 The value will show six decimal places If type is omitted the variable will have type REAL 8 0 values is a value specification defining initial values for var Use of this option is restricted to local REAL type variables values may take one of four different forms VALUE a or assigns the value a to all the cells of the variable VALUE a VALUE a assigns the first value to a the last value to b and interpolates the remaining cells of the variable VALUE a b c assigns the values a b c in order If too many values are specified the extra values are ignored If too few are spe
173. T2439 45 00 63 61 1565 00 1565 00 555 77 This file would be useful as an input file for another program but it is not very interesting to look at If you want to take advantage of PROMULA s automatic report generation statements WRITE variable WRITE menu and the Statistical Report Functions for the creation of report files you may use the SELECT OUTPUT statement This statement can be used to create any text file that can be created with the WRITE file statement and it can also be used to send the results of any text display produced by PROMULA including character graphics multidimensional displays and data menu screens to a text file on disk The disadvantage of this type of report generation is that output appears on the screen as it is being sent to disk although this problem can be gotten around with some sneaky windowing For example the statements required to reproduce the file expns dat shown above are simply OPEN SELECT OUTPUT expns dat PRINTER ON DO mons WRITE exps expns mons expns END mons WRITE aincom aincom abalns 40 Promula Application Development System User s Manual H SELECT PRINTER OFE The statements required to capture the typical budget program report in a file called budget rpt are OPEN SELECT OUTPUT budget rpt PRINTER ON WRITE rtabl OTAL mons ITLE Budget Summary aincom L aincom aexpnm L aexpnm
174. TER to send the listing to the printer option controls whether or not PROMULA should pause compilation when an error is detected and is one of the following ON to issue an error message and pause on errors OFF to issue an error message and continue on errors EJECT to end processing and return to the operating system on errors The RUN COMPILER statement clears the current application from memory before compiling file Control returns to PROMULA command mode when the compilation is complete The RUN COMPILER statement cannot be executed inside a procedure Examples The statement 248 Promula Application Development System User s Manual RUN COMPILER program prm LIST DISK program lst PAUSE ON will compile the PROMULA code stored in program prm the compilation listing will be saved in program 1st 3 7 81 RUN DOS Purpose Runs an operating system command This allows you to access the operating system from within a PROMULA program perform an OS operation and return to your program Syntax RUN DOS command Remarks command is a quoted string or a string variable containing any command that is valid for your operating system When the RUN DOS statement is executed PROMULA will write itself and the current application to disk in a file called PROMULA 000 this is often a rather large file 300 500 Kbytes PROMULA then clears itself from RAM and proceeds with the OS command When the OS command finishes
175. UO Jj nj p H D 2 SELECT E HELP 0 ACTION 20 DIT Edit Input Values E Hz 10 D 3 SELECT C HELP 0 ACTION menu2 ALCULATE Calculate Totals 2 i co Hj H D 4 SELECT D HELP 0 ACTION 40 ISPLAY Display Results D D El Define of a submenu called menu2 ENU menu2 lculations Menu R eturn C ompute D p 2 1 SELECT R HELP 0 ACTION pick ETURN Return to Main Selection Menu R ND IELD 2 SELECT C HELP 0 ACTION 30 COMPUTE Compute the product of A and B D D pick pd I Ej n N N EFINE MENU data KCkckckckckckckckckckckck kckck ck ck k kk kk k kk k A Data Menu XXX XkXk kk kk k kk KKK KKK kk ke KK Enter Edit Inputs Name Date A Value i B Value ck ck ck ck kk ck ck ck kk ck ck kk ck ck kk ck ck ck kk ck ck kk ck KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK kv ko ko ko ko ko kockockok END Next a procedure to control the program is defined DEFINE PROCEDURE ctrl SELECT pick option DO IF option EQ 10 150 Promula Application Development System User s Manual xit procedure REAK ctrl F option EQ 20 dit a Data Menu DIT data
176. XRANGE xrange to define a scale for the x axis Here xrange is one of the following 227 Promula Application Development System User s Manual xmin xmax xtics xmin xmax xtics The xRANGE option will scale the x axis from a minimum of xmin to a maximum of xmax xtics 1s the number of tic marks for the x axis The default values for xmin xmax and xtics are computed by PROMULA using the extremes of the variables scaling the x axis The values may be literal numeric constants or numeric variables YRANGE yrange to define a scale for the y axis The specification of yrange is analogous to the specification of xrange The values labeling the tic marks or legends of the plot may be formatted according to the syntax var w d where w is width and is the number of decimal digits PROMULA supports four Graphics Modes CHARACTER The default for CHARACTER mode is an 80 column by 25 row monochrome plot that is composed entirely of standard ASCII characters The width and height of CHARACTER plots can be modified by the SELECT WIDTH and the SELECT LINES statements They can be sent to a disk file with the SELECT OUTPUT statement MEDIUM The default for MEDIUM mode is CGA medium resolution three color pixel graphics HIGH The default for HIGH mode is CGA high resolution monochrome pixel graphics PLOTTER The PLOTTER mode is intended to be used to define the manner in which graphics are plotted The default for PLOTTER mode is an IBM Epson d
177. Y DESCRIBED IN THE GREAT MIGRATIONS LLC LICENSE AGREEMENT THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND ALL SUCH WARRANTIES ARE EXPRESSLY AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL GREAT MIGRATIONS LLC BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOST PROFITS EVEN IF GREAT MIGRATIONS LLC HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Some states do not allow the limitation or exclusion of liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you TRADEMARK PROMULA is a registered trademark of Great Migrations LLC DEFINITION OF PURCHASE The definition of your particular purchase is specified in the Great Migrations LLC License Agreement which came with the PROMULA Application Development System product and which you completed and returned to the Great Migrations LLC If you have any questions about your rights or obligations as a PROMULA Application Development System user or believe that you have not received the complete PROMULA Application Development System package that you purchased please contact Great Migrations LLC 7453 Katesbridge Ct Dublin Ohio 43017 614 761 9816 Table Of Contents MU 9 M 1 1 1 ORGANIZATION OF THE MANUAL 5 6 ett eret ee s terere eee e tu tee x
178. aae Pleas nter the information Age Qa Weigh Qaae Press Alt H if you have any t questions END DEFINE PROCEDURE getdata EDIT data name age wt DO IF HELP DO IF ERRORVALUE EQ 1 BROWSE TOPIC DOHELP1 HLP 1 ELSE ERRORVALUE EQ BROWSE TOPIC DOHELP1 HLP 2 ELSE ERRORVALUE EQ BROWSE TOPIC DOHELP1 HLP 3 END IF ERRORVALUE END DO IF HELP END PROCEDURE getdata 3 7 48 DO IF KEYPRESS Purpose Executes one or more statements if the user presses a prespecified key in response to a prompt Syntax stati DO IF KEYPRESS keyid statement END Remarks 195 Promula Application Development System User s Manual statl is an interactive statement for example an ASK SELECT BROWSE or EDIT statement keyid is a keypress name See Appendix C statement is any executable statement no definitions including another DO statement The DO IF KEYPRESS statement is an extension of the DO IF ESCAPE capability and behaves in the same manner If the user presses the key named by keyid in response to an interactive statement PROMULA will execute the group of executable statements between the DO IF KEYPRESS and the END statement then re execute stat1 There are two limitations of this capability 1 No more than five DO IF KEYPRESS blocks may follow a single statement 2 Th
179. aces If omitted w and d are the parameters specified in the TYPE specification for var and p is the width specifications of the row descriptors related to the set sub scripting the rows of the display sets is a list of the sets classifying the values of var The order in which the sets are listed specifies the structure of the display the first set classifies the rows of the display the second set classifies the columns and the third to last set classify the pages of the display The keyword ORDER is optional If it is omitted sets specification must follow immediately after the optional format specification title is any text you wish to show as a title for the table The title may include variables and other format characters according to the rules defined in the WRITE variables statement dvar is a variable used to control the display of variable var dvar should be subscripted by the set that defines the rows of the display PROMULA will display values of var only for those rows corresponding to elements of dvar that contain nonzero values See Example 4 below option isone ofthe following mutually exclusive BROWSE variable options TOTAL sets displays totals over the selected sets for browsing along with values of var If sets is omitted all the marginal and grand totals for var will be displayed PERCENT set displays the percent distribution of the total over set of var CHANGE n The CHANGE option allows the user to show a
180. ach element of the set s selection vector A set s selection vector contains the currently active elements of the set Thus the order and range of a DO set loop can be controlled by sorting and or selecting the elements of the set DO set loops are an extremely powerful tool for manipulating PROMULA s set based array variables Recursion is a looping control structure that does not use one of PROMULA s DO loop statements explicitly It is used to execute a procedure repeatedly until some exit condition occurs Recall that a procedure is a group of statements that are 30 Promula Application Development System User s Manual executed as a unit when the procedure s name is used as a statement Recursion occurs when one of the statements in the procedure is a call to the procedure itself A procedure that calls itself is referred to as a recursive procedure A simple example of a recursion loop is a procedure that offers the user selections from a menu repeatedly until the user selects the exit option An example is procedure recurs shown below DEFINE MENU pickmenu 1 NExit Procedure 2 NAction A 3 NAction B 4 NAction C END DEFINE VARIABLI choice F END VARIABLE DEFINE PROCEDURE recurs SELECT pickmenu choice DO IF PICK EQ 1 lt Here is the test of the DO condition BREAK recurs ELSE PICK EQ 2 Statements of Action A ELSE PICK EQ 3 Statemen
181. acter V which is reserved to set off the selections in pick menus the at character which is reserved to set off data fields to be edited in data menus the tilde character which is reserved to set off data fields to be displayed but not edited in data menus 146 Promula Application Development System User s Manual marks the space in the template where the value of a program variable will be displayed for editing M marks the space in the template where the value of a data field will simply be displayed and will not be available for editing Data menus contain a number of fields to be viewed and or edited by the user Each field in the menu is denoted by a series of contiguous at signs equal in number to the desired number of characters in the data field The fields are ordered from left to right and from top to bottom of the menu template Examples The following example illustrates the definition and use of one screen pick and data menus it illustrates the DEFINE MENU statement as well as the SELECT menu and the EDIT menu statements Define several variables for use with the example DEFINE VARIABLI A value b B value tot Sum of B date Date YPE DATE 8 name Name YPE STRING 10 option Menu selection END VARIABLI EH Define a Data Menu DEFINE MENU data KCkckckckckck ck ckckckck ck kckck ck kk ck kc k kk kk
182. actively or in batch During interactive execution any questions or prompts presented by the program are answered by a person using the keyboard and or mouse The person responding to the program is referred to as the user During batch execution any questions or prompts presented by the program are answered by one or more lines of text in a file on disk The file containing the responses is referred to as the batch input file or batch script A batch script can describe any sequence of inputs that PROMULA might expect from a program user The responses in a batch script are usually a mixture of batch commands and data for the program The batch commands may also be used by persons running PROMULA interactively on a terminal that does not support non printing keys such as Home End and Escape In order to prepare batch input files correctly it is necessary to understand PROMULA s input model PROMULA accepts inputs in one of two forms Keypresses and Records Keypresses are single keystrokes or simultaneous keystroke combinations e g Alt H Almost all keypresses are input by pressing some non printable key on the keyboard Keypresses may also be input by pointing and clicking on specific areas of the screen with a mouse Examples of keypresses are pressing the Page Down key to move to the next page of a display pressing the End key to finish browsing or editing a display and pressing a key to make a selection from a pick menu Records are
183. aexpnm L aexpnm abalns L abalns This WRITE variable statement is almost exactly like the last one except that it includes a local format and set order specification that will override the ones in the definition of variable rtab1 The format specification N10 means that the row descriptors should have a width of 10 characters and 10 means that each column should have a width of 10 characters The resulting display is shown below Budget Summary Average Monthly Income 1 565 00 Average Monthly Expense 1 001 33 Average Monthly Balance 563 67 Total JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN INCOME 18 780 00 1 580 00 1 490 00 1 580 00 1 580 00 1 580 00 1 550 00 EXPENSES 12 016 02 1 028 52 1 032 03 1 031 54 1 006 96 973 91 1 036 79 BALANCE 6 763 98 551 48 457 97 548 46 573 04 606 09 513221 JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC INCOME 1 580 00 1 580 00 1 550 00 1 580 00 1 550 00 1 580 00 EXPENSES 971 61 994 50 1 018 56 986 85 970 06 964 70 BALANCE 608 39 585 50 531 44 593 15 579 94 615 30 For more information on writing reports refer to Chapter 3 of this manual especially the WRITE variable WRITE TABLE WRITE text and WRITE menu statements See also the DO DESCRIBE DO CORRELATE and DO REGRESS statements for information about PROMULA s Statistical Report Generator 39 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 2 2 4 2 Saving a Report on Disk There are two ways of saving textual informat
184. agement capabilities of the PROMULA language translators or the PROMULA Virtual Memory Management Library may create C or FORTRAN programs that can access PROMULA s array databases 3 1 10 Function Definition A function is a curve on the x y plane It is defined by a set of points whose coordinates are given by the values of two array variables the x variable and the y variable Remarks The table of values below defines a function f x A FUNCTION f X X VARIABLE Y VARIABLE x 1 y 1 x 2 2 x 3 y 3 72 Promula Application Development System User s Manual x n y n For an arbitrary argument x the function f x returns the value on the curve defined by the above table of points The value of the function is computed by using two point linear interpolation between the points defining the function PROMULA allows multidimensional arrays to be used as function value vectors provided that both arrays have the same set classifying their first dimension Functions may be used in equations and conditional expressions The DEFINE FUNCTION and DEFINE LOOKUP statements define a function Expressions that act on their X and Y variables modify a function The READ function statement modifies a function and its X and Y variables The WRITE function and BROWSE function statements display a function in tabular form The PLOT statement displays a function in graphical form 3 1 11 Menu Definition A screen template
185. airings of specified variables The correlation coefficients R are computed by the following formula 2 68 x Xyi y ee 2 Gee xF y y where Xj and y are the variables to be correlated and X y their respective means Syntax DO CORRELATE sets vars Remarks sets isalist of set identifiers subscripting the arrays to be correlated The specification of sets defines the index of the observations and the order of report pages produced The last set in sets specifies the index of the observations to be correlated any preceding sets specify the order in which pages of the report are displayed The generation of report pages corresponds to the specification of the sets in sets from left to right left varying the fastest 181 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The default value for sets is the reverse of the set specification used in defining the highest dimensional variable 1 the variable having the greatest number of dimensions in vars with the first set in this definition indexing the observations and the remaining sets heading report pages vars isa list of variable identifiers specifying the arrays to be correlated The list may also contain the time parameter TIME if all the variables in vars share a time series set as one of their indexes a time series set is a set which has a TIME specification in its definition or which shares a TIME relation wi
186. al expnm 3 expns 3 1 expns 3 2 expns 3 3 expns 3 4 expns 3 5 expns 3 6 expnm 4 expns 4 1 expns 4 2 expns 4 3 expns 4 4 expns 4 5 expns 4 6 expnm 5 expns 5 1 expns 5 2 expns 5 3 expns 5 4 expns 5 5 expns 5 6 expnm 6 expns 6 1 expns 6 2 expns 6 3 expns 6 4 expns 6 5 expns 6 6 expnm 7 expns 7 1 expns 7 2 expns 7 3 expns 7 4 expns 7 5 expns 7 6 expnm 8 8 1 expns 8 2 expns 8 3 expns 8 4 expns 8 5 expns 8 6 expnm 9 expns 9 1 expns 9 2 expns 9 3 expns 9 4 expns 9 5 expns 9 6 expnm 10 expns 10 1 10 2 10 3 texpns 10 4 10 5 expns 10 6 expnm 11 expns 11 1 expns 11 2 expns 11 3 11 4 expns 11 5 expns 11 6 expnm 12 expns 12 1 expns 12 2 12 3 12 4 expns 12 5 expns 12 6 The final example illustrates how the annual averages will be computed for the budget program s summary report Average Monthly Income aincom SUM m incom m mons N Average Monthly Expense aexpnm Average Monthly Balance abalns SUM m expnm m mons N SUM m balns m mons N Recall that the arithmetic average of a set of values is the sum of the values divided by the number of values used in the sum The three equations above do just that they sum up the monthly values and divide the sum
187. alc END PROCEDURE test The output of procedure test is displayed below x FLOOR x ROUND x IFIX x 2 25 3 00 2 00 2 00 2 50 3 00 3 00 2 00 325 15 3 00 3 00 2 00 2 25 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 50 2 00 3 00 2 00 26175 2 00 3 00 2 00 2 Using the SUM Operator The SUM operator is used to sum the values of multidimensional expressions DEFINE SET row 3 55 Promula Application Development System User s Manual col 2 page 2 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE AAA row col page A 3 dimensional Array VALUE 1 AA row col A 2 dimensional Array A row A vector 5 Sum of END VARIABLE For each row and col sum AAA over page and place the result in AA AA r c SUM p AAA r C p For each row sum AAA over col and page and place the result in A A r SUM c p AAA r c p Sum AAA over row col and page and place the result in S S SUM r c p r C p The results of the definitions and expressions above are illustrated in the dialog below WRITE AA A 2 dimensional Array COL 1 COL 2 ROW 1 2 2 ROW 2 2 2 ROW 3 2 2 WRITE A A Vector ROW 1 4 ROW 2 4 ROW 3 4 WRITE S Sum of AAA 12 3 Using the MIN and MAX Functions The MIN and MAX operators may be used to find the minimum and maximum values of multidimensional expressions respectively This is d
188. alue of var d is an integer indicating the number of decimal places to be displayed If is an E the values will be displayed in exponential notation If w and are no trailing blanks will be written 283 Promula Application Development System User s Manual var2 isthe identifier of the variable whose data is second on each data record fmt2 is the format specification for var2 and may have the same form as mt1 above If p is omitted in fmt2 the starting column for var2 is immediately to the right of var1 Examples The examples in this section are based on the following definitions DEFINE FILE txtl TYPE TEXT ranl TYPE RANDOM arrl TYPE ARRAY END FILE OPEN ranl b ranl ran STATUS NEW DEFINE VARIABLE ranl iteml Item 1 YPE REAL 8 0 item2 Item 2 YPE STRING 8 item3 Item 3 YPE DATE 8 END VARIABLE ranl 1 Read from a text file and write to a random file Eri OPEN txtl b txtl txt STATUS OLD DO EXEL READ txtl iteml1 8 item2 8 item3 8 WRITE ranl END txtl 2 Read from a text file and write to an array file DEFINE SET 100 Records END SET OPEN arrl b arrl arr STATUS NEW DEFINE VARIABLE 1 varl rec Variable 1 YPE REAL 8 0 var2 rec Variable 2 YPE STRING 8 var3 rec Variable 3 YPE DATE
189. am CORlTOL x iate de eR IPOD med ud eda ds 28 2 22 s ssa die or ge RET e Ie e EIE E dee oU RENI ee ce d 31 224 Report Generations sat aee RUN auge aded medau dq HS 37 DZ Dede ANLCT TA A BIAIN EE 41 2 2 6 Application Programming Summary eese 46 3 PROMULA LANGUAGE eissii tatu senta tno 47 3 1 THEPROMUEA NOUNS 5 eene aee etae dique itum 47 Equations seated eio 48 3 4 2 Expression Arithmetie 35 eda ee feed 50 3 13 Expression BOOLCAM o TaN E E sak oe ve ER RHENO CES 51 IKA Expression Character esi hdeta ea ene ted eive ede ir itte eed ode rei obire d 51 3 1 3 Expression Functional 4i iet d e fer tue elven ee ir Este tod ie Fe ge rede Ri tete 33 34 6 Expression LO GICAL 5a vo sedet rr o een ER vale ER 64 3 1 7 Expression NUMECTIC a i dete e ee eerie e due rey ee ede i sive to re de give Eder 65 3 F8 Expression Relational dai o Rene iter i ded eive ede ird tee ore red otii 66 3 L9 Files i ehe ase obo epu fred esi 67 BELLO PUNCHON DE 72 Table Of Contents S 0 P ER 73 3 1 42 Nyu
190. ame of the text file to be displayed for browsing This name is any valid file specification and is used to identify the file to the operating system Upon execution PROMULA clears the Main Screen and displays the specified text file for browsing A prompt in the Prompt Screen will tell the user how to browse the file NOTE On the IBM PC the size of the files you can browse is limited to 32K or less To browse larger files you may invoke the PROMULA Text Editor or use the RUN DOS command to invoke your own file viewing system See the RUN EDITOR and RUN DOS statements The display will be clipped to the width of the window opened to the Main screen Examples 1 The statement BROWSE FILE demo prm will display the file demo prm for browsing 2 Similarly the following statements DEFINE VARIABLE fname TYPE STRING 12 File Name END fname demo prm BROWSE FILE fname will display the file demo prm for browsing Here fname is a string variable containing the string demo prm 3 7 10 BROWSE function 104 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Purpose Displays the values of a function in tabular form for browsing Syntax BROWSE func fmt TITLE text Remarks func isthe identifier of a function defined by the DEFINE FUNCTION or DEFINE LOOKUP statement fmt is a format specification of the form p w d to indicate the position of the display the width of th
191. an inverted index file Build an inverted file Make Stock Code key postings The key values from purtrx are stored in the random file along with record sequence numbers purinv is an inverted file used for searching the direct file purtrx with symbolic keys DEFINE FILE purinv TYPE INVERTED 10 Inverted file END FILE DEFINE VARIABLE purinv purkey Stock code key purseq Transaction record number TYP ND VARIABLE purinv string 5 integer 5 P ry s OPEN purinv purinv ran STATUS NEW purseq 0 DO purtrx purkey stkcode purseq purseq 1 WRITE purinv END purtrx CLEAR purinv Procedure selkey may be used to search a random file by key and display the records which match DEFINE VARIABLI key User defined stock code TYPE string 5 ND VARIABLI PEN purinv purinv ran STATUS OLD LH 8 DEFINE PROCEDURE selkey SELECT purinv key DO purinv SELECT purtrx purseq READ purtrx WRITE transno l stkcode 7 stkdesc 15 0 0 stkqty 50 stkcost 60 END DO purinv 256 Promula Application Development System User s Manual END PROCEDURE selkey A sample dialog with procedure selkey is shown below Select all records with a stock code ADP5 key ADP5 selkey 101 ADP5 Adapter 5 Galv Steel URD 10 10
192. and b the system will calculate the remaining values via interpolation The time values serve two very important functions 1 They facilitate communication with program users In the SELECT VARIABLE and ASK ELSE SET set statements the user may enter the time values to specify set elements rather than using the element sequence numbers Time values are also used in forming titles subheadings row labels and column labels for displays of variables subscripted by time series sets and in displays of the sets generated by the WRITE set BROWSE set SELECT ENTRY SELECT SET and SELECT VARIABLE statements The time values may also be used to make set selections in the SELECT set statement and to indicate subscript values in array expressions 2 They are used in calculations involving time series variables Several PROMULA statements use the arithmetic values of the time points in performing their functions The RATE and LEVEL statements use the time values to interpolate time series data for each time point within a dynamic simulation or to save time series data at the time points during the simulation The BROWSE and WRITE variable statements use the time point values to calculate growth rates percent change and moving averages for time series data The REGRESS and CORRELATE statements use the time values when time series are being analyzed as a function of TIME Time series sets have a special PROMULA notation associated with them set v This
193. and properly connected to the computer If a SELECT OUTPUT statement is executed before a SELECT PRINTER ON output will be saved in the specified disk file 2 2 PROMULA Application Programming The following sections describe how to write the source code for a PROMULA application program An application program is an ordered set of instructions that tell the computer how to solve a particular problem or perform a particular function operation or procedure The instructions of a program sometimes called commands statements or source code are written in a human readable notation and describe how the program should work Every statement should perform one or more of the following basic functions Data Definition This includes creating a framework for program information that is convenient and logical to work with 20 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 2 Program Control This includes constructing procedures loops conditional branches and other structures that control the sequence of events that take place during execution of the program 3 Data Manipulation This includes putting information into a data framework and manipulating it in various ways Operations such as performing calculations reading data sorting selecting subsets of data and doing other operations that transform the inputs of a program into useful information fall into this category 4 Report Generation This includes p
194. ands and operators The operands may be variables constants and other expressions The operators specify the operation to be performed on the operands Remarks In order of precedence the operators are shown in Table 3 3 Operations at the same level of precedence in the list are performed in left to right order To alter the order in which operations are performed use parentheses Operations within parentheses are performed first Inside parentheses the above order of operations is maintained To force left to right precedence for all operators execute a SELECT HIERARCHY OFF statement Table 3 3 The Precedence of Operators in PROMULA OPERATOR EXPRESSION PRECEDENCE MEANING Functional f f x 1 Evaluate the function f x Arithmetic 2 Raise A to the B power 3 Multiply A times B A B 3 Divide A by B A B 4 Subtract B from A A B 4 Add A to B 5 Take the negative of Relational LT ALTB 6 A less than B LE ALEB 6 A less than or equal to B NE NEB 6 A not equal to B EQ A EQ B 6 A equal to B GE A GEB 6 A greater than or equal to B GT AGTB 6 A greater than B Logical NOT NOTA 7 Not A AND A ANDB 8 A and B OR AORB 9 Aor B 65 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 3 1 8 Expression Relational Definition A numeric expression involving at least one relational operator relational expression compares two operands and is either true if the result of the comparison is true
195. are sometimes referred to as virtual variables Any changes in the virtual variables are automatically and immediately reflected in the values of the corresponding disk variables and vice versa It is this automatic passing of data to and from disk that makes virtual access slower than 302 Promula Application Development System User s Manual accessing local variables in memory Virtual access is acceptable for operations which do not require fast execution but in order to use disk variables efficiently the dynamic access method should be employed Now let s look at some examples of dynamic access starting with variable dsv Dynamic Scalar DISK filea dat1l rr cc pp Variable dsv is a local scalar variable related to the disk variable dat 1 on disk It may be used for dynamic access of the disk variable dat 1 Here dynamic access means explicitly transferring data between disk and memory Dynamic access is indicated because the reference to dat1 in the DISK option is subscripted by three items one for each dimension of the actual disk variable Local variables which are used to access disk variables dynamically are sometimes referred to as dynamic variables A value of dat1 on disk may be transferred to dsv by specifying the values of the pointer variables rr cc and pp to indicate which drow dcol and dpag element to read then executing a READ DISK statement Similarly the current value of dsv may be written to a specifi
196. are BLACK WHITE GREEN RED YELLOW BLUE CYAN PURPLE MAGENTA NAVY DARK BLUE border is a list of up to six keywords separated by slashes that define the appearance of a border for the window The syntax of this list is type style foregr backgr BRIGHT BLINK where type defines the location of a border for the window and may be one of the following NONE for no border TOP for a top border BOTTOM fora bottom border BANDED foratop and bottom border FULL for a complete border HEADER fora header border FOOTER fora footer border style defines the style of the border and may be one of the following SINGLE fora single line border DOUBLE fora double line border HEAVY for a heavy line border foregr defines the foreground color backgr defines the background color BRIGHT causes the foreground to be bright BLINK causes the text to blink Valid colors are BLACK WHITE GREEN RED YELLOW BLUE CYAN PURPLE MAGENTA NAVY DARK BLUE The border is displayed one character outside of the area defined by the area parameter of the window definition bar is a list of up to three sets of up to four keywords separated by slashes that define the appearance of highlighting in highlighted prompts pick and popup menus EDIT statements and the list selection statements SELECT indirect SELECT ENTRY and SELECT SET and the GETDIR function The syntax of the bar specification is colorsl colors colors3 where colors1 defines the colors of standar
197. ariable whose value you want to appear as part of the title of all display titles 265 Promula Application Development System User s Manual SPECIAL ON OFF to activate PROMULA s special value processing When SPECIAL ON PROMULA will process the following codes as special data values NS Not specified NA Not available ND Not disclosed These codes will appear in reports and in results of expressions involving variables containing special values When SPECIAL OFF PROMULA will treat values of arrays containing special values as if they were zero This is the default STEP ON OFF to activate deactivate step mode during execution of a program When STEP ON PROMULA will enter command mode after each statement at this point you may enter any command or do debugging operations as needed When you are ready to execute the next statement press the Escape key In the default mode STEP OFF execution proceeds from statement to statement without pausing STRING len to change the maximum length of descriptors to 1en an integer The default length is 800 characters per descriptor STORE RAW VIRTUAL DYNAMIC to change the default behavior of the STATUS OLD option of the OPEN file statement If STORE RAW files opened with STATUS OLD or with no explicit status specification are opened with the OLD status If STORE VIRTUAL files opened with STATUS OLD or with no explicit status specification are opened with the VIRTUAL
198. ariables in the list must be arranged in the same order as the fields in the menu to which they correspond Upon execution the data menu becomes a screen display that has the first data field highlighted by the bounce bar Use the movement keys to move the bounce bar to the desired data field To edit the highlighted data field press the Enter key and enter the new value as prompted at the bottom of the menu Examples The definition and use of menus are illustrated in the examples given with the DEFINE MENU SELECT PULLDOWN and SELECT FIELD statements 3 1 12 Numeric Precision PROMULA stores REAL numbers with six significant digits and INTEGERS with ten significant digits REAL numeric expressions are evaluated in double precision to maintain at least six significant digits INTEGER and MONEY expressions are evaluated to ten significant digits of accuracy PROMULA allows mixed mode arithmetic A real variable is rounded to the nearest integer when equated to an integer variable On the IBM PC Reals less than ABS 8 43E 37 cause underflows in calculations Real values greater than ABS 3 37E 38 cause overflows Integers are valid in the range 23 3 23 3 about 2 1 billion Integers outside this range cause overflows and cannot be processed by the system Money type variable values are valid in the range 231 3 231 3 about 2 1 billion cents or 21 million dollars Overflows and underflows in calculations cause erro
199. arranged in order of increasing complexity the lessons may be run in any order Sometimes the information displayed does not fit in the windows Use the movement keys at the right end of your keyboard to browse long messages The up and down arrows let you scroll one line at a time The PgDn key displays the next page The PgUp key displays the previous page The Home key brings you back to the first page of the message Press any key to continue 3 7 25 DEFINE FILE Purpose Defines a file that may be used as a program database an input datafile or an output report file Syntax DEFINE FILE file TYPE type desc END Remarks file isthe file identifier type isthe file type and can be one of the following ARRAY for a random access file of sets variables and relations You can include as many sets variables and relations per file as you wish within the capacity of your disk space Array files are unique to PROMULA they are especially well suited for the storage and retrieval of multidimensional information TEXT for a sequential access file of variable length text records Each record consists of items or fields or scalar variables that are laid out in lines of variable length up to a maximum of 255 characters per line RANDOM for a random access file of fixed length binary records Each record consists of a fixed number of variables The variables of a random file may be scalar ite
200. ase In addition to sequential access text files and direct access binary files PROMULA supports a unique variable management system This is a multidimensional array management system that is ideal for managing the information usually stored in program variables PROMULA is different from other DBMS systems which have limited command languages PROMULA is a powerful fully featured applications programming language and it offers you full flexibility in analyzing and using the information in your databases 1 3 16 Program Management System PROMULA has a program manager to help you handle large mainframe size programs Promula Application Development System User s Manual The source code of a PROMULA application can be broken into separate parts compiled independently and then united and used as a smoothly integrated system This capability is most useful for the implementation of applications with extensive memory requirements If your variables are too large or there too many for your work space you can store them on disk PROMULA s variable manager lets you bring only what you need into your work space 1 3 17 Dynamic Simulation PROMULA has several features which facilitate the implementation of dynamic simulation applications You can develop system dynamics models models of systems whose variables interact with each other continuously as they evolve over time 1 3 18 Windows PROMULA s powerful windowing commands
201. at will pick up the number or action code of the selection picked The value of option may be used to determine alternative execution paths A pick menu is a screen display which is designed to help its user pick from a set of selection fields that have been previously laid out with a DEFINE MENU statement Two types of pick menus may be used with the SELECT menu statement simple and popup pick menus When a simple pick menu is used in a SELECT menu statement PROMULA clears the window opened to the Main Screen displays the menu and highlights the first selection field Simple pick menu selections may be made by using the arrow keys to highlight the desired field and then pressing the Enter key or by using the function keys or the numeric keys directly The F1 numeric 1 key picks the first field in the menu the F2 numeric 2 key picks the second field and so forth If you have more than ten selection fields then press the Alt or Shift key together with one of the ten Function keys to get up to twenty selections For example pressing Alt F1 picks the 11th selection When a field is selected the sequence number of the field as defined by its relative position on the menu will be stored in the variable opt ion and execution will continue with the statement following the SELECT menu statement When a popup pick menu is used in a SELECT menu statement PROMULA displays the selection screen for the popup pick menu in the menu s selectio
202. ate which of the array to read then executing a READ DISK statement Similarly the current values of drc may be written to a specific of dat 1 by specifying a value for the pointer variable pp to indicate which of the array to write then executing a WRITE DISK statement The memory used by drc may be cleared for use by other dynamic or scratch variables by a CLEAR statement Completely analogous techniques may be applied to transfer values for the other dynamic array variables Again the programmer must make sure that the value of each pointer variable is kept within the range of the disk set to which it corresponds Finally let s take a look at definitions of variables sdat1 and sdatb DEFINE VARIABLE SCRATCH sdatl row col pag Dynamic Array by row col and pag DISK filea datl row col pag sdatb row col pag Dynamic Array by row col and pag DISK filea datb row col pag END VARIABLE These variables are dynamic three dimensional arrays Variable sdat1 may be used to access the entire three dimensional array of values in the disk variable dat1 and variable sdatb may be used to access the entire three dimensional array of values in the disk variable datb The values are transferred to and from disk by WRITE DISK and READ DISK statements The variables may be cleared from memory by a CLEAR statement 304 Promula Application Development System User s Manual It is up to the programm
203. atement END Remarks file is the identifier of a text or random file statement is any executable statement including other DO statements except definitions The statements from DO file to END are an example of a DO loop The statements of the DO file loop are executed repeatedly as many times as there are records in the file The order of iterations through the DO loop is 1 2 N where N is the number of the last record in the file At each iteration a new record in the file is accessed and the statements within the DO loop are executed If file is type TEXT an explicit READ file variables statement is required to transfer data from the text file to program variables If file is type RANDOM the data in the record is automatically passed to the variables of the random file as each record is accessed Examples 1 Copy a text file to a random file DEFINE FILE txtl TYP ranl TYP arrl TYP END FILE ll 4 EXT RANDOM RRAY AE ll D EN 1 ranl ran STATUS NEW FINE VARIABLE ranl iteml Item 1 YPE REAL 8 0 item2 Item 2 YPE STRING 8 item3 Item 3 YPE END VARIABLE DATE 8 OPEN txtl txtl txt STATUS OLD DO txt1 READ txtl iteml1 8 item2 8 item3 8 WRITE ranl END txtl 2 a text file to an array file OPEN arrl arrl arr STATUS NEW DEFINE S
204. atement Descriptions The following sections describe the statements of PROMULA Each statement description consists of four parts The purpose of the statement 2 The general syntax of the statement 3 Remarks about the syntax and the statement 4 Examples demonstrating the syntax and use of the statement The notation for the syntax follows these rules 1 Words in capital letters are PROMULA keywords and must be entered as shown They may be entered in any combination of uppercase and lowercase PROMULA converts all words to uppercase unless they are character data or part of a quoted string 2 You must supply any items in lowercase letters 3 Items in square brackets are optional 4 An ellipsis on a line by itself under an item indicates that you may repeat the item as many times as you wish on separate lines For example the notation DEFINE SET set n desc END comment describes the syntax of the DEFINE SET statement and says the following 94 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Enterthe words DEFINE n ET to begin the definition 2 Enter a set identifier set followed by a left parenthesis followed by an integer n followed by a right parenthesis followed by an optional descriptor desc If you include a descriptor it must be enclosed in quotes 3 You may enter as many set definitions as you wish This is denoted by th
205. atl row cc pag These variables are dynamic two dimensional arrays The variable may be used to access a row by co1 array of values for an arbitrary dpag the variable may be used to access a pag by co1 array of values for an arbitrary drow and the variable dpr may be used to access a pag by row array of values for an arbitrary dcol As before dynamic access is indicated because the specification of dat1 in the DISK option is subscripted one pointer or set for each dimension of the actual disk variable The correspondence between the local sets and the sets dimensioning the disk variable is indicated by the placement of pointers and set identifiers in the reference to dat 1 in the DISK option Thus for variable dpc pag col dat 1 is referred to as datl rr col pag indicating that the pag and col dimensions of dpc correspond to the third and second dimensions of dat1 respectively Similarly for variable dpr pag row dat1 is referred to as dat1 row pag indicating that the pag and row dimensions of dpr correspond to the third and first dimensions of dat 1 respectively The dimensions of the disk variable which do not correspond to a dimension of the local variable are base pointed i e assumed to take on an arbitrary single value as indicated by the use of scalar variables in the DISK option A row by col array of dat1 on disk may be read into from disk by specifying a value for the pointer variable pp to indic
206. ber and order of the parameters as defined in system sys sys al a2 The solution of system sys if it exists will be returned as the values of the variables a1 a2 If the attempt to solve system sys does not converge after a reasonable number of iterations then you are given the message to try another starting guess for the unknowns A diagnostic is also given if the system does not have a real solution See also the DO LSOLVE statement which may be used to solve systems of linear equations 82 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Examples An example of system definition and system solution is given in the DEFINE SYSTEM statement 3 1 21 Table Definition A tabular report or display of several variables A table has a body and an optional title and format The body of the table contains the names of the variables whose values will be displayed as the body of the table The format specifies the width of the rows and columns of the table The values of the variables in a table are classified by a common set This common set classifies the columns of the table You may include as many variables as you wish in the body of a table A table may be browsed by using the BROWSE TABLE statement This allows you to browse the pages of a table one at a time A table may be written by using the WRITE TABLE statement This allows you to display or print the table in its entirety A table may be edite
207. ber is 6 The monthly value is 60 The current month number is 7 The monthly value is 70 The current month number is 8 The monthly value is 80 The current month number is 9 The monthly value is 90 The current month number is 10 The monthly value is 100 The current month number is 11 The monthly value is 110 The current month number is 12 The monthly value is 120 The number of iterations as well as the order of execution is dictated by the current selection vector of the set controlling the DO set loop For example the statements SELECT month 1 12 6 doset produce the output below The current month number is 1 he current month number is 12 The current month number is 6 The monthly value is 10 The monthly value is 120 The monthly value is 60 3 7 55 DO UNTIL Purpose Executes repeatedly a group of statements until a given condition is met Syntax DO UNTIL condition statement END Remarks condition is any Boolean expression i e an expression that is either true or false If false the statements between the DO UNTIL and the END statement are executed if true the statements between the DO and END are not executed statement is any executable statement no definitions including a DO statement 207 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The group of statements together with the DO and END statements is called a DO UNTIL loop DO loops may be nested to any d
208. ber of decimal digits for varl text2 is any text that you wish to use as a subtitle for the values of var2 This text may not contain variables var2 is the identifier of the second variable in the table fmt 2 is the desired format for the values of var2 rw is the width in characters of row descriptors cw is the width in characters of table columns option is one of the following BY ROW to edit values by row entering a value moves the bounce bar to the right BY COLUMN to edit values by column entering a value moves the bounce bar down BY VALUE to edit values by single value bounce bar does not move automatically This is the default A table is a display or report of several variables whose values are classified by a common set or sets The common sets classify the columns and pages of the table A table has a body and an optional title and format The body of the table contains the identifiers of the variables whose values will be displayed as the body of the table You may include as many variables as you wish in the body of a table 210 Promula Application Development System User s Manual You may include slash characters between the specifications of variables and descriptive text to insert blank lines in the display If you wish to write an entire table instead of editing it by page use the WRITE TABLE statement Upon execution the EDIT TABLE statement clears the Main Screen displays the first page o
209. ble Management System deba deti ete Seren es Wt ees dd qa 4 13416 Program Management System s e 4 43 17 Dynamic Simulations iie ee E euo ere 5 DBAS WIN OWS ase os tags 5 1 3 19 Mathematical and Statistical Functions 5 43 20 Command Line ee et PR ERN eee E RR RE HEN D ERE ER ERE RE 3S Rer PO qe S eR eee 5 13 2 M ltizplatform Performance i Rr eR ar ERE rers 5 2 PROMULA BASICS 6 2 1 THE PROMULA APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT 6 2 11 Starting PROMULA vienen etes eoe d prem epo lere d pi A p ede e de ODER 7 2 1 2 The PROMULA Main e gy eiie deve lees 8 2 1 3 Running Interactive Programs in Batch eee neie 14 2 1 4 PROMULA Keyboard Gonventions t eq ee ae fees ne Reb neue xao eed ea eee teen 18 2 15 Eine Edith uu ERES RE a EU ERREUR 19 2106 Printer COHTOl RON OR e EE NEUE ter re RU NE en etico ede 20 2 2 PROMULA APPLICATION PROGRAMMING ertet Mese k ier auae uere te estie pee 20 2 2 Data Defin ON a ec AES e i ea eee rene dieque ene dq 21 2 2 2 Progr
210. by specifying the values of the pointer variables cc and pp to indicate which dcol and to read then executing a READ DISK statement Similarly the current values of may be written to a specific row vector in dat1 by specifying the values of the pointer variables cc and pp to indicate the 1 and dpag to 303 Promula Application Development System User s Manual write then executing a WRITE DISK statement The memory used by drv may be cleared for use by other dynamic or scratch variables by a CLEAR statement Completely analogous techniques may be applied to transfer values for the other dynamic vector variables Notice that the structures of the local vectors drv dcv and dpv match the structures of the disk variable referred to in their respective DISK options For example the structure of the disk variable referred to in the DISK option for the col vector dat1 rr col pp is also a vector by col dat1 rr col pp may look like the definition of a three dimensional array but since rr and pp are scalars and co1 is a set it is indeed a vector by co1 Analogous relationships hold for the other local vectors drv and dpv The definitions for variables drc dpr and are shown below 1 Dynamic Array by row and col DISK filea dat1l row col pp 1 Dynamic Array by pag and col DISK filea dat1l rr col pag dpr pag row Dynamic Array by pag and row DISK filea d
211. c TYPE type values diskrel END Remarks var is the identifier of the variable This is the name by which you refer to the variable in your programs var may contain letters and numbers but the first character must be a letter Each variable identifier must be different from all other identifiers in a given program segment Only the first six characters of the identifier are significant If the identifier is followed by an asterisk the variable may be used as an indirect for general purpose input output operations SCRATCH is a keyword indicating that the variable is to reside in scratch storage 174 Promula Application Development System User s Manual file is the identifier of an arrray or random file If file is specified var will be treated as a disk variable and its values will be contained in the disk file that file is physically opened to See the SELECT file statement for a discussion of random files and Chapter 4 for a discussion of array files NOTE If file is specified the SCRATCH values and diskrel options are not allowed sets is a list of set identifiers or numeric constants specifying the dimensions of the variable If omitted the variable is a scalar i e it has a single value In default input and output operations the first set will classify the rows of values the second set will classify the columns of values the third set will clasify the two dimensional blocks of values etc desc is a des
212. c cell in array dat 1 by specifying the values of the pointer variables rr cc and pp to indicate which drow dcol and dpag element to write then executing a WRITE DISK statement The memory used by dsv may be cleared for use by other dynamic or scratch variables by a CLEAR statement The programmer must make sure that the value of each pointer variable rr cc and pp is within the range of the disk set to which it corresponds whenever a READ DISK or WRITE DISK statement is executed Notice that the local scalar dsv and the disk array dat 1 do not have the same structure This is allowed in dynamic access It is required however that the structure 1 scalar vector two dimensional array etc of the local variable matches the structure of the disk variable as referenced in DISK option We see in the above example that this is true dsv is a scalar and the reference to dat1 in the DISK option dat1 rr cc pp is also a scalar dat1 rr cc pp may look like an array definition to some readers but since rr cc and pp are scalars instead of sets it is indeed a scalar similar to a reference to a single cell of a three dimensional array The programmer indicates that the actual disk variable is three dimensional by including three subscripts Now let s look at the three variables and drv row Dynamic Vector by row DISK filea datl row cc pp dcv col Dynamic Vector by col DISK filea datl rr col pp
213. c topic containing information relevant to the selection field The dialog file used is determined by a SELECT HELP statement Pressing Alt H will select this topic from the program s help file and display it in the Help Screen If no help has been defined you can enter a for this parameter code is a number between and 255 or the name of a submenu defined in this DEFINE MENU statement If code is a number the value will be returned when the field is selected if code is a submenu name the submenu will be displayed for selection desc is text that describes the selection field menu2 is the identifier of a submenu Each submenu is defined in the same way as the top level menu except that the submenu header only includes the name of the submenu VARIABLE is a keyword labeling the pick menu as a VARIABLE pick menu This keyword is only required if you intend to use the SELECT FIELD statement to modify the menu at runtime Syntax 3 Data Menu Definition DEFINE MENU menu text 088000 6008000 text text text END Remarks menu is the menu identifier text is arbitrary text that you may enter anywhere in the menu template to describe menu selection fields To produce fancy menu displays you may use any character that you can enter with your text editor including those that are not shown explicitly on the keyboard This text may contain any character except the backslash char
214. capitalized in order to distinguish it from other occurrences of the word end in the text Upon execution the text will be shown in the Main Screen Action Window of the display For more details see the discussion of PROMULA s Basic Windowing capabilities 3 7 110 WRITE VALUE segment Purpose Writes the information of a program or program segment to disk Only the values of the segment variables are written To write both code and data values use the END SEGMENT or END PROGRAM statement Syntax WRITE VALUE seg Remarks seg is the identifier of the segment whose values are being written to disk Use the OPEN SEGMENT statement before using the WRITE VALUE segment statement Examples The code below opens a segment file on disk called wrvalseg xeq This segment is given the default name MAIN since it is a top level segment Segment MAIN contains the single variable a OPEN SEGMENT wrvalseg xeq STATUS NEW DEFINE PROGRA DEFINE VARIABLE a The value of variable A END VARIABLE END PROGRAM The effect of the WRITE VALUE segment and READ VALUE segment are illustrated in the dialogs below a 10 WRITE a The value of variable A 10 The statement WRITE VALUE MAIN writes the values of segment MAIN variables in this case only variable a in the segment file on disk called wrvalseg xeq WRITE VALUE MAIN The value of a variable can be chan
215. cedure functs is displayed below he Exponential of 6 00 403 4288 The Natural Logarithm of 403 4288 6 0000 The Sine Function of 30 00 degrees 0 5000 ne ne ArcSine Function of Cosine Function of ArcCosine Function of Tangent Function of 0 50 30 00 degrees 0 8660 45 00 degrees 30 00 degrees 0 8660 30 00 degrees 1 0000 he ArcTangent Function of 1 0000 45 00 degrees The Square Root of 2 00 1 4142 The 1 2 Power of 2 00 1 4142 The Minimum of 3 0 and 2 0 2 00 The Maximum of 3 0 and 2 0 3 00 59 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 3 1 5 2 File Management Functions PROMULA has six functional operators that can help you manage files FILEDELETE FILEEXIST FILEEXT FILENAME FILEPATH FILESIZE GETDIR Example takes a file specification in quotes or a string variable containing a file specification as its argument and deletes the file and returns 1 if the file was found or 0 if the file was not found in the current directory takes a file specification in quotes or a string variable containing a file specification as its argument and returns 1 if the file was found or 0 if the file was not found in the current directory takes a file specification in quotes or a string variable containing a file specification as its argument and returns the file extension takes a file specification in quotes or a string variable containing a file specification as i
216. cess to sets as the indexes of multidimensional data gives you a powerful and flexible means of selecting and sorting subsets of your data The SELECT set statement is used to select the elements of a set This is also called changing a Set selection vector The simplest set selection uses a literal specification of set element numbers to specify the elements of the set that are to remain active For example to select the fall and spring months the following statement could be used SELECT mons 9 11 3 5 The statement above tells PROMULA to change the range and order of set mons to the fall and spring months September to November and March to May In other words the set s selection vector now contains the following values 9 10 11 3 4 and 5 in that order This means that all actions involving set mons will be performed only on values indexed by these elements of the set For example the statement WRITE expns would produce the following display Monthly Expenses by Category RENT FOOD CAR SERVICE UTILITIES CAR INS PHONE SEP 409 00 261 35 171 10 76 47 45 00 55 64 33 Promula Application Development System User s Manual OCT 409 00 258 71 127 52 88 28 45 00 58 33 NOV 409 00 250 12 105 25 91 41 45 00 69 28 MAR 409 00 280 81 134 35 96 84 45 00 65 53 APR 409 00 294 05 99 55 98 06 45 00 61 30 MAY 409 00 286 98 88 13 86 77 45 00 58 03 To restore a set to its default
217. cifications of dset s There are two different ways to specify dset s 1 For virtual access omit the specification of dset s For example DEFINE VARIABLE var sets desc DISK file dvar END PROMULA will handle transferring information between the disk and local variable for you This is the simplest approach but since it may require a great deal of disk access it may be too slow for computationally intensive applications In virtual access var must have the same shape and size as dvar an exception to this is overlap mapping which we will describe in a later section 2 For dynamic access dsets is a subscript list one subscript for each dimension of dvar The subscripts may be numeric scalar variables pointers numeric constants or local set identifiers You may access specific values of dvar by assigning values to the subscripts and then executing READ DISK or WRITE DISK statements In dynamic access sets defines the size and shape of the subset of dvar that may be dynamically transferred to and from disk The dimensions of var may be any subset of the dimensions of dvar However the sizes of sets must not be larger than their corresponding dsets The rules of correspondence between sets and dsets here are very much like the rules of correspondence that govern subscripting multidimensional equations row to row column to column etc The code below uses a variety of DISK options to relate local variables to
218. cified the remaining values are set to zero In order to simplify the specification of multiple values the N VALUE notation may be used Thus VALUE 50 99 9 30 99 0 10 95 0 5 90 0 5 80 0 would be a quick way to specify 100 values If values is omitted the variable will be initialized by PROMULA numeric variables are initialized with the value zero and string type variables are initialized with empty strings diskrel isa disk relation indicating that the variable is to be used for virtual or dynamic access of a disk variable Variables are storage places for information Depending on how their values are stored variables are of three types fixed scratch and disk Fixed Fixed variables are accessed from a fixed space in primary memory RAM They are defined with a DEFINE VARIABLE statement The values of fixed variables may be saved in a segment file on disk by the END SEGMENT END PROGRAM and WRITE VALUE segment statements Using fixed variables in calculations will result in the fastest execution speed Fixed variables are sometimes referred to as local variables Scratch Scratch variables are accessed from a scratch space in primary memory They are defined with a DEFINE VARIABLE SCRATCH statement 176 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Their values can be cleared from memory with a CLEAR statement to make room for other scratch variables The values of scratch variables cannot be saved
219. cified exogenous time series variables Syntax RATI etsl lvl ets2 lv2 Remarks etsl is an exogenous time series variable i e an array variable indexed by a time series set lvi is a local variable that is used explicitly in the RATE section of a dynamic procedure model and is computed at every time point of the simulation ets2 is the exogenous time series variable for a second RATE statement equation 1v2 is a local variable for a second RATE statement equation The equations of the RATE statement form a list of correspondence between previously defined exogenous time series variables and time dependent variables that must be used locally in the RATE section of a dynamic simulation model Based on this equivalence the values of the local variable will be computed at the arbitrary time point of the dynamic simulation by linear interpolation or extrapolation that is based on the fixed time points defining the exogenous time series The RATE section is the second section of a dynamic model after the INITIAL section and its equations are evaluated at each time point or interval of the simulation run In contrast to LEVEL equations both sides of rate equations are evaluated at the same time point or interval The LEVEL section follows the RATE section and its equations are also evaluated at each time point or interval of the simulation The LHS of each LEVEL equation however is evaluated at TIME DT in
220. converts it to executable instructions which are executed by the computer and proceeds to the next statement Pressing the Esc key or entering the STOP statement gets you out of direct mode and returns you to the Main Menu In direct mode PROMULA issues the prompt PROMULA and expects you to enter a statement on the same line of the screen To enter a statement simply type it in and press the Enter key After entering a statement PROMULA will execute it and prompt you again for a new statement 13 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Some PROMULA statements have a beginning an end and a number of other line entries inbetween For such a structured statement PROMULA issues the short question mark prompt until the end of the statement is entered The short prompt is intended to remind you that you have not yet ended a structured statement that you started in an earlier entry line For example entering in direct mode the set definitions of Figure 2 2 would result in the following interaction PROMULA DEFINE SET month 12 12 Months of the Year y acnt 3 3 Profit and Loss Ledger Accounts END SET PROMULA Any program compiled in batch using the Main Menu option 5 can also be entered directly from the keyboard in command mode The result is the same as compiling in batch mode 2 1 3 Running Interactive Programs in Batch PROMULA programs may be executed inter
221. counters a procedure name in a program it executes the statements of the procedure When execution of a procedure finishes processing continues with the statement following the procedure call Procedures can call other procedures including themselves For more information on procedures see the DEFINE PROCEDURE statement in Chapter 3 of this manual 2 2 2 2 Linear Flow PROMULA applications use linear control as the primary means of directing their course of action This means that executable operations are performed in the order in which they are defined Thus execution of a program begins with the first statement of the first procedure of the program and proceeds to follow the program instructions one by one toward the last statement of the program After execution of the last statement the program ends A schematic of linear program flow is shown in the diagram below End Last Step Figure 2 10 Linear Program Flow Any one of these steps may be a simple statement a procedure call or another control structure 2 2 2 3 Conditional Branches A linear flow of action through a program in which every statement from the first to the last is executed in sequence is often inflexible and inefficient Even worse it may lead to errors if the data put into the program does not fit the linear logic defined by the code In order to efficiently manage complex problems and data your programs will require flexibility The basic element o
222. criptor for the variable It shows up as the title of subsequent displays of the variable produced by the report generation statements WRITE BROWSE EDIT PLOT type is the type format specification of the variable and may be one of the following REAL w d contains real numbers in the ranges 3 37E 38 8 43E 37 E Reals outside these ranges are not valid and cause underflows or overflows in calculations which result in errors INTEGER contains integer numbers in the range 231 3 4231 3 about 2 1 billion Integers outside this range cause overflows and cannot be processed by the system STRING w contains character values i e strings of characters CODE w contains codes Codes are short character strings that are used for set selections For example JAN and FEB may be used to select the months of January and February MONEY w contains money values dollars and cents This type is useful for accounting arithmetic where one cent accuracy is important Money variables maintain ten significant digits of accuracy The range of MONEY type variables is 2 31 3 4 2 3 1 3 about 2 1 billion cents or 21 million dollars DATE w contains date values Dates are values of the form mm dd yy where mm is a month number dd is a day number and yy is a year number Internally the date value is stored as a numeric quantity equal to yymmdd Alternative date formats e g dd mm yy or mm dd yyyy are available by executing a SELEC
223. ct any array or any connected subset of an array may be accessed at random Array files are value addressable if desired you may access information by single cell or value The DEFINE FILE statement defines an array file The DEFINE VARIABLE statement defines the array structure i e the variables of an array file The OPEN file statement opens an array file for use The READ DISK statement reads data from an array file The WRITE DISK statement writes data to an array file The CLEAR file statement physically closes an array file saving its current contents The COPY file statement allows you to display the contents of an array file or to copy an array file into another array file or into a text file for transfer to other programs The AUDIT file statement allows you to list the contents of an array file A virtual access method is also available via the DISK option of the DEFINE VARIABLE statement This allows you to use the variables of array files without using explicit READ DISK and WRITE DISK statements See Chapter 4 for examples of this 3 1 9 2 Segment Files The code of any PROMULA program may be divided into a hierarchy This is particularly useful when the program is large which happens when either the program code the program data or both become larger than your working space Segment files are used for the storage and retrieval of program segments They are needed primarily so that previously written program seg
224. cter values specify the patterns to be used for the plotted curves in LINE and VALUES plots The default line patterns are shown below SIXTEEN COLOR THREE COLOR MONOCHROME MONITORS MONITORS MONITORS AND PRINTERS XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XX XX XK XX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXX XXXX XX XX XX XX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX X XXXX X 14 Video BIOS type code This decimal number is used to tell PROMULA the appropriate settings to use for your graphics monitor For example the video BIOS type codes for PROMULA s four video configurations are listed below Configuration Code 1 medium resolution 3 color graphics 4 2 high resolution black amp white graphics 6 3 16 color high resolution graphics 16 4 16 color high resolution graphics 18 325 Promula Application Development System User s Manual For additional information on the Video BIOS type code consult Milton R Programmers Guide to PC and PS 2 Video Systems Microsoft Press Redmond Washington 1987 15 Raster Orientation 0 portrait 1 landscape For raster devices such as printers this code specifies the orientation of the image 16 Raster bandwidth 17 Raster horizontal bit multiplier 18 Raster vertical bit multiplier 19 Raster initialization string 20 Raster start of line string 21 Raster end of line s
225. d 1 x RANDOM p1 a random number between 0 and 1 using pl as the seed 2 x RANDOM p1 p2 a random number between 1 and p2 using the current seed 3 x RANDOM p1 p2 p3 random number between p1 and p2 using as the seed The parameters p1 p2 p3 may be numeric constants or variables The seed is an internal PROMULA variable used by the RANDOM function The first time the random function is executed the seed is zero The RANDOM function always returns the same value for a given seed and changes the internal seed each time it is executed Several examples are shown in the dialog below DEFINE VARIABLE x X TYPE REAL 10 5 pl VALUE 1000 p2 VALUE 2000 p3 VALUE 3000 END VARIABLE X RANDOM WRITE x X 0 73275 x RANDOM WRITE x X 0 53517 x RANDOM p1 Using the same seed p1 gives the same result every time WRITE x X 71217 xX RANDOM p1 WRITE x X 0 71217 x RANDOM p1 p2 With two parameters RANDOM returns a random number WRITE x between p1 and p2 using the internal seed X 1 403 12500 x RANDOM p1 p2 WRITE x 1 009 17900 x RANDOM p1 p2 p3 With three parameters RANDOM returns a random WRITE x number between p1 and p2 using p3 as the seed 1 671 02100 x RANDOM p1 p2 p3 WRITE x 1 671 02100 58 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 6 Procedure functs below shows how a var
226. d by using the EDIT TABLE statement This allows you to browse the pages of a table one at a time and change its values Tables may also be defined using the DEFINE TABLE statement 3 1 22 Time Parameters Definition In PROMULA the words TIME DT BEGINNING and ENDING are reserved keywords that name four scalar parameters that are used mainly in dynamic simulation applications Such applications contain procedures involving time series variables and time integration algorithms These four internal variables are used with the dynamic simulation subsystem of PROMULA where they are used explicitly with the level and rate statements to specify approximate first order integrations of level variables over time level TIME DT level TIME DT rate TIME Here the value of a variable at time TIME DT is equal to its value at time TIME plus the product of DT times the rate of change of the variable at time TIME In the dynamic simulation these parameters have the following meanings TIME The TIME variable DT A time increment for the TIME variable BEGINNING The beginning value of TIME ENDING The ending value of TIME Some of the sample programs on the PROMULA Demo Disk are dynamic simulation models converted to PROMULA and contain examples that use these parameters 83 Promula Application Development System User s Manual See the RATE LEVEL and TIME statements as well as the discussion of Dynamic procedu
227. d first then the static header and footer windows will be opened on top of it Finally the window to be used as the Main Screen that fits inside the box created by the first three windows is opened DEFINE WINDOW head 01 01 78 03 WHITE BLACK HEADER SINGLE fram 01 01 78 24 WHITE BLACK FULL SINGLE foot 01 23 78 23 WHITE BLACK FOOTER SINGLE work 02 05 77 21 WHITE BLACK NONE END WINDOW OPEN fram MAIN OPEN head MAIN WRI CENTER This WRITE statement appears in the window called head OPEN foot MAIN WRI CENTER This WRITE statement appears in the window called foot OPEN work MAIN WRITE CENTER This WRITE statement appears in the window called work ASK CONTINUE The code above produces the following display 180 Promula Application Development System User s Manual This WRITE statement appears in the window called head This WRITE statement appears in the window called work Press any key to continue This WRITE statement appears in the window called foot See also the OPEN WINDOW and CLEAR WINDOW statements as well as Advanced Windows in Chapter 1 for more information on the use of windows See also the sample applications distributed on the PROMULA Demo Disk 3 7 39 DO CORRELATE Purpose Produces a report of one or more correlation matrices for all p
228. d highlighting in the window These colors will be used for highlighting and prompts generated by various PROMULA statements and for the currently highlighted but not selected elements in selection lists The default colors are black on cyan colors2 defines the colors of a selected but not currently highlighted element in the SELECT SET statement The default colors are black on green 179 Promula Application Development System User s Manual colors3 defines the colors of a currently highlighted and selected element in the SELECT SET statement The default colors are black on red Each color specification has the following form foregr backgr BRIGHT BLINK where foregr defines the foreground color backgr defines the background color BRIGHT causes the foreground to be bright BLINK causes the text to blink Valid colors are BLACK WHITE GREEN RED YELLOW BLUE CYAN PURPLE MAGENTA NAVY DARK BLUE POPUP is the optional keyword POPUP When present the window will behave as a popup window i e when the window is closed the contents of the screen that was on the screen in the window area before the popup window was opened will be redrawn Popup windows are often used to provide on line help or warning messages Examples The following example illustrates how to use header and footer style windows A static frame window is needed to make the sides of the box that will contain the Main Screen This frame will be opene
229. d type of pick menus pulldown pick menus are executed with the SELECT PULLDOWN statement 3 7 90 SELECT option Purpose 259 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Selects PROMULA system options Syntax SELECT option Remarks option isa list of any or all of the following options BACKGROUND BLACK WHITE NAVY GREEN BLUE RED PURPLE YELLOW to change the color of the Main Screen background BROWSE ON OFF ROW COLUMN VALUE to control the behavior of the WRITE variable and WRITE table statements and tables defined by the DEFINE TABLE statement When BROWSE OFF the above statements write the complete variable or table then proceed with the next statement without pausing This option is useful for short reports on screen or output that is to be captured on disk using the WRITE file or SELECT OUTPUT statements or sent to a printer BROWSE OFF is the default When BROWSE ON the above statements generate displays which may be viewed in a controlled interactive mode as if a BROWSE variable or BROWSE table statement had been executed This option is useful for viewing longer reports on screen When BROWSE ROW COLUMN or VALUE the above statements may be used for interactive data editing as if an EDIT variable or EDIT table statement with a BY ROW COLUMN or VALUE option had been executed COMMA ON OFF to show commas in displays of numeric values denoting thousands e g 1 500
230. de ed ERE 95 SFiS ODER TI 100 EAE AUDEESET eiie 101 3S gt AU DIE VARIABLE 4 RE e IUE 101 3 7 6 BREAK procedure sese du E RI Da E este vr DU Eee EDO D eases P RR TERRE E EDEN 102 3 7 7 BROWSE COMMENT NUR RIEN a 103 3 7 BROWSE DIALOG i eiue t hu PPE Et 103 3 47 90 a ea tia CEDE TE ERN ROUND MESE 104 3 710 BROWSE function see i e rU HE EDS He EU Eee RD EG peres RR IEEE E a 104 JSdLIT BROWSE o NUR DH EUR TEUER E MER RN UE EE 106 BROWSE EE E AE 107 3 7 13 BROWSE 108 3 IE BROWSE TABLE ette tue et Duce Re DII IDE EEHIe 108 3 7 15 BROWSE TEAL EDD 111 3 7 et ette riesce ce echo etc Ede Pede 112 SPAT BROWSE VARIABLE eite ceti UD b te e EROR EDO EE Edu ee 112 3 7 16 BROWSE variable ettet ettet Ee eeu ete etse E E PO EE Ede debo E 113 3 7 19 CLEAR files iii ti tr e etd e Ee erred teen e epp tele de ex 120 3 7220 CLEAR varidble e ettet ete e e Ut DEED tue t Debe edere 121 3 7 21 CLEAR WINDOW ettet cette tete pc ee eR DE EURO REDE D 123 3 7 22 COMPUTE Equdtioft i edere detti t eee pte de Ie ie i e eget ee eee de PERS 124 90 2946 OP 125 SAP A DI A A I DA DI aT E O E EE 133 3 429 DEFINE BILE
231. decimal places If omitted w and d are the parameters specified in the TYPE specification for var and p is the width specifications of the row descriptors related to the set subscripting the rows of the display sets is a list of the sets classifying the values of var The order of the sets in this list specifies the structure of the display the first set classifies the rows of the display the second set the columns and the third to last sets classify the pages of the display The keyword ORDER is optional if it is omitted sets must follow immediately after the optional format specification title is any text you wish to show as a title for the table The title may include variables and other format characters according to the rules defined in the WRITE text statement 294 Promula Application Development System User s Manual dvar is a variable used to control the display of variable var dvar should be subscripted by the set that defines the rows of the display PROMULA will display values of var only for those rows corresponding to elements of dvar that contain nonzero values See Example in the section on the BROWSE variable statement option is one of the following WRITE variable options TOTAL sets displays totals over the selected sets along with values of var If sets is omitted all the marginal and grand totals for var will be displayed PERCENT set displays the percent distribution of the total over set of var
232. dentifiers which will classify the rows of the multidimensional table variables title is any text you wish to show as a title for the table The title may include variables and other format characters according to the rules defined in the WRITE variables statement textl is any text that you wish to precede the values of var1 as left justified subtitle This text may not contain variables varl is the identifier of the first variable in the table fmtl is the desired format for the values of var1 Usually this is used to specify the number of decimal digits for var1 text2 is any text that you wish to precede the values of var2 as a left justified subtitle This text may not contain variables var2 isthe identifier of the second variable in the table fmt2 is the desired format for the values of var2 rw is the number of spaces allocated for row descriptors cw is the number of spaces allocated for table columns A table is a display or report of several variables whose values are classified by a common set or sets The common sets classify the columns and pages of the table A table has a body and an optional title and format The body of the table contains the names of the variables whose values will be displayed as the body of the table The format specifies the width of the rows and columns of the table 288 Promula Application Development System User s Manual You may include as many variables as you wish in the body
233. ds of disciplines business engineering or the sciences PROMULA programs are easier to write use verify maintain and document than programs written in spreadsheets or third generation languages In PROMULA a database is a collection of variables The source of the information in the database may be raw user input or it may be calculated by PROMULA itself or it may be produced by an independent applications program written in a traditional programming language such as FORTRAN and processed by one of the PROMULA compilers or translators such as the PROMULA FORTRAN Compiler or the FORTRAN to C Translator Used in tandem with the PROMULA FORTRAN Compiler PROMULA is also an attractive tool for upgrading the user interfaces of existing FORTRAN applications PROMULA can deal directly with the information content of programs written in FORTRAN without having to re engineer or re write such programs Typically FORTRAN programs are computational engines efficient in crunching numeric data but lacking in the area of user friendliness With PROMULA you can add a friendly user interface shell on top of a FORTRAN program without having to change the FORTRAN program code by hand This is done by an automatic restructuring process done by the PROMULA FORTRAN Compiler which involves the separation of a database from the computations of the program and the management of that database by PROMULA In this context a PROMULA database is a collection
234. dta STATUS OLD PROMULA will ignore the path designated by pathspec and look in the current system path for mydata dta You cannot turn pathing off by selecting option 2 from the Main Menu PRINTER ON OFF to turn the printer on or off The statement SELECT PRINTER ON has the same effect as the simultaneous pressing of the Ctrl key and the PrtSc key on the IBM PC You may also print text while in PROMULA by simultaneously pressing the Shift key and the PrtSc key this will send the contents of the current screen to the printer The SELECT PRINTER ON OFF statement is also used to start stop the spooling of output to a disk file previously specified by a SELECT OUTPUT statement QUOTES ON OFF to control the placement of quotes around row labels column labels and page headings in displays produced by the WRITE variable statement When QUOTES ON double quotes are placed around these descriptors this may be useful for setting up data to import into an external spreadsheet program The default is QUOTES OFF RUNID set to specify a character string that will be appended to the variable descriptor during display statements WRITE PLOT EDIT etc set is the identifier of a set whose first selected row descriptor will be appended to display titles SCENARIO titlespec to specify a character string that will be appended to the title of displays produced by the text report generator and plots titlespec is a quoted string or a string v
235. e the bounce bar is highlighting the ten spaces following the text Name By pressing the Enter key you may introduce a particular name for this data field By using the movement keys you may edit the rest of the data fields to produce the following display A Data Menu k ik kk kk KEK KKK RK KK KKK k k Enter Edit Inputs Name Date 08 21 91 A Value B Value FRI IR IR OR check kk ck ko ke kk ck kk kk kc ke kk OR ck koc ke kk kk koc ke kc ko kk kk ke ke ke e ke End Exit Arrows Home Select Enter Edit The following example illustrates the definition and use of Popup pick menus First the structural entities of the program variables windows and menus are defined DEFINE VARIABLI 149 Promula Application Development System User s Manual a A value b B value prd Product of A B date Date YPE DATE 8 name Name YPE STRING 10 option Menu selection tj ND VARIABLI DEFINE WINDOW wwind 0 5 79 21 WHITE BLACK NONE swind 1 1 78 3 WHITE BLACK FULL HEAVY twind 1 23 78 23 WHITE BLACK FULL SINGLE ND WINDOW EFINE MENU pick swind twind ain Selection Menu R eturn E dit C alculate D isplay N I m uU D 1 SELECT R HELP 0 ACTION 10 ETURN Return to PROMULA N i
236. e LEVEL statement The LEVEL section follows the RATE section and its equations are also evaluated at each time point or interval of the simulation The lefthand side of each LEVEL equation however is evaluated at TIME DT in terms of the time variables on the righthand side which are evaluated at TIME the previous time point or interval It is the equations of the LEVEL section which move the dynamic variables through time After execution of the statements in the LEVEL section execution returns to the beginning of the RATE section Examples An example of a dynamic procedure is shown below DEFINE PROCEDURE DYNAM1 Begin Initial Section WRITE CENTER Initial Section Time TIME POPT 100000 End Initial Section Begin Rate Section RATE BRTYR BRTV MRTYR MRTV WRITE CENTER Rate Section Time TIME DRGV DRG IME BTHS POPT BR BRTV MGNTS POPT R MRTV DTHS POPT DR DRGV WRITE POP WRITE BTHS WRITE MGNTS WRITE DTHS WRITE BRTV 4 WRITE MRTV 4 WRITE DRGV 4 End Rate Section Begin Level Section VEL POPYR POPT BTHYR BTHS DTHYR DTHS MGTYR MGNTS WRITE CENTER Level Section Time TIME P W POPT DT BTHS DT MGNTS DT DTHS RITE POP END PROCEDURE DYNAM1 In procedure DYNAM1 the po
237. e READ function statement Functions defined by the DEFINE LOOKUP statement behave very much like functions defined by the DEFINE FUNCTION statement Both types of functions are used primarily on the right hand side of equations or in conditional expressions They yield by linear interpolation or extrapolation the Y value corresponding to the specified argument or X value In this sense a function is viewed as a set of ordered pairs of numbers that specify the X and Y coordinates of the points defining the function The argument used in the function call may be a numeric constant a variable or an arithmetic expression The important difference between the two types of functions is that functions defined by the DEFINE FUNCTION statement are related to a set that defines the number of X Y pairs for the function and may contain descriptive information for the X Y pairs and to a pair of arrays that contain the X Y values Changes in the set or in the X or Y arrays changes the appearance and behavior of the function Functions defined by the DEFINE LOOKUP statement on the other hand are not related to sets or variables they contain a fixed set of paired numbers which are identified only as part of the function and can only be changed by the READ function statement The value of a function for an arbitrary argument is obtained by 2 point linear interpolation between the points defining the function For an argument outside its domain the function r
238. e containing a simple ASK statement DEFINE PROCEDURE yesno ASK Do you wish to continue yes no yes WRITE Continue yesno ELSE no WRITE Stop END ask END PROCEDURE yesno The purpose of the procedure is to issue the question Do you wish to continue yes no and take one of two execution paths depending on user response sample dialog with procedure yesno is displayed below yesno Do you wish to continue yes no Aninvalid response causes the XXX question to be asked again Do you wish to continue yes no yes Continue Do you wish to continue yes no no Stop The yes path writes the message Continue and issues the prompt Do you wish to continue thanks to the recursive nature of PROMULA procedures The no path issues the message Stop and exits the ASK statement Any other user response causes the prompt Do you wish to continue to be issued again Exit from this ASK statement is only possible if you respond no 2 The example below shows how to use the SET set option in order to make alternative set selections The procedure selmon allows you to make various selections from the elements of the set month by entering set codes variable identifiers or set element sequence numbers The definitions and initializations of the example variables are shown below DEFINE SET month 12 END SET DEFI
239. e eene exe eb eese RENE IE e ERES ne ina 1 1 2 te det sete eanan E te bete 1 1 3 PROMULA LANGUAGE HIGHLIGHTS insere estan aiat 2 13 1 Total Programming Environment ts kd er eine rH RR 2 L3 Structured see det be ean be REN ERE Ve se 2 13 2 Language Tutoridl ag etd vade each edet eive ede n pel a ee rore E Gua teda woes Rr Re PODER 3 L3 3 Language COUFSe ii ig e deve a odes oh eade deve a de i bue de ecoute E ope s eei REN 3 1 3 4 Tutorial Writer zi iai a cde ee e e asit AEE A E KERE e e EE A Ee SEE REUS 3 DIS XP PATI TIAE PCR EE 3 VSO PALA TUONO s RE tie ti teri t ESE E NH REN eX 3 LDP Report Generator i v dated d ere RR RU OTI DUO Pi 3 LEDS Graphies e ses Reo ae PE Ip PR I Teo dam de eie 3 1 3 9 CommandjMOode ss Res d esset is en Ue bep eiie na e acere ee Ee 3 1 340 Compilaton Modes SPERO saan gs oe age og oN das een 4 T2 Conversational Mode s at eae Seok vans odes ens va ce ete Sd eh ine varia us ad Swans 4 L312 Multidimensional D t Structures dr thee e pei errore oer 4 1 3 AB Array r Matrix Equations s ead aUo erede neto a ER 4 T 344 Equation Solver 3 SEU OD matu equnequeequeemieedenedmqigaud duis 4 1 3 15 Varia
240. e ellipsis 4 Enter the word END to end the set definitions This may be followed by a comment if you wish An ellipsis in a line after an item indicates that you may repeat the item as many times as you wish on that line or on lines with the appropriate continuation character For example the notation PLOT varl var2 indicates that you may include one or more var specifications in the argument of the PLOT statement The meanings of the lowercase items that you must enter to form a statement are described in the Remarks of each statement description 3 7 The PROMULA Statements 3 7 1 ASK CONTINUE Purpose Interrupts execution and issues the message Press any key to continue Syntax ASK CONTINUE Remarks You may insert this statement anywhere inside a procedure to stop execution and give the user of the procedure the option to continue execution or exit to the Main Menu If the user presses the Esc key he is returned to the main menu any other key or clicking the mouse button results in continued execution This statement is a simple pause and is a useful feature for conversational applications or debugging To execute a pause without issuing the prompt use a WRITE CLEAR 1 statement 3 7 2 ASK ELSE Asks the user something and executes a group of statements depending on the response Syntax ASK prompt response statement ELSE response statement 95 Promula Applica
241. e keypress identified by keyid must be available and defined for the current keyboard See Appendix C Be warned that use of the DO IF KEYPRESS statement is inherently nonportable and your application will require source code changes if it is moved across the various platforms on which PROMULA runs Example Procedure test uses the DO IF KEYPRESS statement to trap keypresses during an EDIT variable statement DEFINE SET row 20 col 10 END DEFINE VARIABLE var row col A variable matrix dvar row col Difference in variable matrix filen TYPE STRING 20 END var r c 100 DEFINE PROCEDURE prt filen var out SELECT OUTPUT filen LINES 100 width 132 PRINTER ON WRITE var SELECT LINES 25 WIDTH 80 PRINTER OFF DEFINE PROCEDURE dif dvar y c var y c var y 1 BROWSE dvar TITLE var D Differences from base case END DEFINE PROCEDURE test EDIT var TITLE var D Press ALT P to save T a d Atd D to s difference DO IF KEYPRESS ALTP prt END DO IF KEYPRESS ALTD dif END END 196 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 3 7 49 DO IF NULL Purpose Executes a group of statements once if a null condition occurs Syntax DO IF NULL statement END Remarks statement isany executable sta
242. e menu swind is the name of the screen area defined via a DEFINE WINDOW statement that will display the selection screens when the menu is executed twind is the name of the screen area defined via a DEFINE WINDOW statement that will display the description of each selection field as it is highlighted during menu execution 145 Promula Application Development System User s Manual text is arbitrary text that you may enter anywhere in the menu template to describe menu selection fields To produce fancy menu displays you may use any character that you can enter with your text editor including those that are not shown explicitly on the keyboard choicen is the label for the nth selection in the pick menu The selection fields are ordered from 1 to n as you go from left to right and from top to bottom of the menu template The text and choicen elements may contain any character except the backslash character V which is reserved to set off the selections in pick menus the at character which is reserved to set off data fields to be edited in data menus the tilde character which is reserved to set off data fields to be displayed but not edited in data menus n is an integer that indicates to which selection field the FIELD statement corresponds char is a character that can be used to select the desired field Any printable character may be used topic is the sequence number as defined by its place in a dialog file of a specifi
243. e record with sequence number key is selected If file is of type INVERTED all records containing key are selected Examples 1 Select the second record in a random file and copy its data to a text file 254 Promula Application Development System User s Manual DEFINE FILE txtl TYPE TEXT ranl TYPE RANDOM END FILE OPEN 1 b ranl ran STATUS OLD DEFINE VARIABLE ranl itemi Item 1 YPE REAL 8 0 item2 Item 2 YPE STRING 8 item3 Item 3 YPE DATE 8 ND VARIABLE rani OPEN txt1 b txtl txt STATUS NEW SELECT ran1 2 READ 1 W RITE txt1 item1 8 item2 8 item3 8 NOTE At the beginning of the reading the record pointer is at the beginning of the second record at the end the pointer has advanced to the beginning of the third record in file ran1 No advancement will take place if the record pointer is at the last record 2 Itis possible to select the records of a random file based on a specific search key by using an inverted file An example of this is illustrated below purtrx is a random file containing 9 transactions records DEFINE FILE purtrx TYPE RANDOM Purchase transaction file END FILE Structure of the purtrx record DEFINE VARIABLE purtrx
244. e same set as their first dimension This is the set that indexes the function The second and higher dimensions of arrx and arry will be fixed at the first element of their respective selection vectors when the value of the function is computed Although it is allowed for the sets dimensioning the second and higher dimensions of arrx to be different from those dimensioning arry doing so will interfere with the displays produced by the WRITE BROWSE and PLOT function statements Functions are used in conditional expressions and in arithmetic expressions on the right hand side of equations to yield the y value corresponding to some x value argument The value of a function for an arbitrary argument is obtained by 2 point linear interpolation between the points defining the function For an argument outside its domain the function returns the y value of the function s nearest end point The argument of a function may be a constant a scalar a multidimensional variable an arithmetic expression of many variables or another function A function of x y func x gives you the value of y for a given value of x The inverse function of x x ifunc y gives you the value of x for a given value of y see Example 2 below In addition to their computational use functions may be displayed in tabular form with the BROWSE function and WRITE function statements and may be viewed in plotted form via the PLOT statement Examples 1 The statements
245. e the topic texts in a menu driven conversational format hence its name The BROWSE TOPIC statement displays a specific topic for browsing The PROMULA Tutorial is a collection of dialog files which you may browse by selecting option 3 off the Main Menu Examples 1 The following program illustrates the definition of a dialog file This file has three topics entitled Introduction Lesson 1 Lesson 2 topics have text associated with them The executable file is stored on a disk file named b dialog tut DEFINE DIALOG b dialog tut PROMULA Primer The primer is a series of topics Each topic contains text that you can browse END TOPIC Introduction The primer is a series of lessons The lessons are designed to show you how to write PROMULA programs Though arranged in order of increasing complexity the lessons may be run in any order Sometimes the information displayed does not fit in the windows Use the movement keys at the right end of your keyboard to browse long messages The up and down arrows let you scroll one line at a time The PgDn key displays the next page The PgUp key displays the previous page The Home key brings you back to the first page of the messag END TOPIC Lesson 1 In this lesson we discuss the DEFINE PROGRAM statement In case you don t know a program is a sequence of instructions that tell 134 Promula Application Development Syste
246. e third set is assumed to index the two dimensional blocks of data The fourth set is assumed to index the three dimensional blocks of data and so on For example the array expns is defined with set mons as its first row dimension and set exps as its second column dimension Therefore array expns could be assigned values identical to those displayed in Figure 2 7 with the following READ statement READ expns Expense Categories go across the columns 409 286 64 143 71 86 87 45 57 30 Months go down the rows 409 276 76 166 28 84 78 45 50 21 409 280 81 134 35 96 84 45 65 53 409 294 05 99 55 98 06 45 61 30 409 286 98 88 13 86 77 45 58 03 409 275 43 152 85 98 06 45 56 45 409 269 81 103 88 87 47 45 56 45 32 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 409 289 93 127 67 72 28 45 50 61 409 261 35 171 10 76 47 45 55 64 409 258 71 127 52 88 28 45 58 33 409 250 12 105 25 91 41 45 69 28 409 272 28 93 81 93 93 45 50 67 If the data values were rotated relative to the definition of array expns sets could be included with the READ variable statement to explicitly indicate the rows and columns of the input data Again the first set is assumed to index the rows of data values the second set is assumed to index the columns of data values the third set is assumed to index the two dimensional blocks of data the fourth set is assumed to index the three dimensional blocks of data and so on READ expns exps mons 409
247. e value of BEGINNING the beginning time point or lower limit of time integrals The time parameter TIME is also set to the value of beginning by the TIME statement ending is a real number that will be used to set the value of ENDING the ending time point or upper limit of time integrals w is an integer that specifies the width in characters of time parameter values when they are displayed in reports produced by the report generator d is an integer that specifies the number of decimal digits for time parameter values when they are displayed in reports produced by the report generator Before executing any dynamic simulation models the control parameters must have been assigned a definite value via the TIME statement Note that once they have been defined the values of the individual parameters may be displayed via the BROWSE and WRITE statements and may be changed via equations introduced by the verb COMPUTE They may also be referenced on the right hand side of equations and within conditional expressions The current value for the independent variable TIME is initially set equal to the value of BEGINNING In a program that has a value of TIME defined all tabular displays generated by the report generator statements whose columns are not classified by a time series set will have the current value of time added to the title See also Time Parameters in Chapter 1 and the discussion of Dynamic Procedures in the DEFINE PROCEDURE section of C
248. e values displayed and the number of decimals in real values where p is an integer indicating the width in characters of the row descriptors for the display w is an integer indicating the width of the columns of values A negative width parameter left justifies the values in each column d is an integer indicating the number of decimal places to be displayed for each value If d is an E the values will be displayed in exponential notation For functions defined by the DEFINE LOOKUP statement the default format is p 10 w 8 and d 2 For functions defined by the DEFINE FUNCTION statement w and d have the values specified in the DEFINE VARIABLE statement for the function variables and p is the width specified in the definition of the row descriptors of the set subscripting the function text isatitle for the display and can contain text variables and other formatting characters as described in the WRITE text statement Upon execution the BROWSE function statement clears the Main Screen and displays the values of the function in tabular form for browsing A prompt in the Prompt Screen will tell the user how to browse the function Examples The BROWSE function statement is illustrated below DEFINE SET pnt 60 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE x pnt The X values y pnt The Y values p pnt PNT Names TYPE STRING 10 END VARIABLE x i i y i i 2 p i PN
249. ed dynamic memory allocation This is discussed in more detail in Chapter 4 Examples The code below defines variables of four types DEFINE VARIABLE fixd A Fixed Variable END VARIABLE DEFINE VARIABLE SCRATCH Scr A Scratch Variable END VARIABLE DEFINE SET row 3 END SET DEFINE FILE filea TYPE ARRAY END FILE OPEN filea filea dba STATUS NEW DEFINE VARIABLE filea dsk row A Disk Variable on filea END VARIABLE 121 Promula Application Development System User s Manual DEFINE VARIABLE rp dd A Dynamic Disk Variable DISK filea dsk rp END VARIABLE The variable ixd occupies a fixed space in memory and cannot be cleared by the CLEAR statement The variable scr is a scratch variable and can be cleared from memory by the CLEAR statement The variable dsk is a disk variable its three values are permanently stored on disk in a file named filea dba The variable dd is a dynamic scalar subset of the disk variable dsk its single value is related to one of the three values of the variable dsk Variable dd may be cleared from memory by the CLEAR statement The dialog below shows that the four variables initially have the value zero WRITE fixd A Fixed Variable 0 WRITE scr A Scratch Variable 0 WRITE dsk A Disk Variable on filea ROW 1 0 ROW 2 0
250. eded basis A segment is a program unit When a segment is defined it is explicitly given a name and is implicitly given a place in a program hierarchy Program segmentation and segment files allow you to create very large structured applications that run in environments with limited memory Segment files also allow you to keep large program source codes in separate files so they can be edited compiled and debugged separately Figure 4 1 is a schematic of how PROMULA organizes a segmented program the segments could be kept in separate files on disk or grouped together in a single file The resultant program has a hierarchical tree structure in which the lower segments of the tree inherit the structures and procedures of their parent segments Figure 4 1 Hierarchy of a Segmented Program 4 2 1 A Segmented Program with a Database Figure 4 2 is the listing of an artificially large program that has been segmented and databased in order to fit in a small working space The program in Figure 4 2 has five variables var varl 11 var2 and var3 Together they require 70 000 words or 280 Kilobytes of storage 313 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Variable Words var 50 000 varl 5 000 11 5 000 var2 5 000 var3 5 000 Total 70 000 Storage Bytes 200K 20K 20K 20K 20K 280K How do you fit them in a space of say 64 Kilobytes Easy break the oversized program into smaller pieces and only bring in
251. een Examples The use of the EDIT menu statement is illustrated in the context of the example given in the DEFINE MENU statement 209 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 3 7 58 EDIT TABLE Purpose Displays a table of several variables on the screen to let you interactively edit their values Syntax EDIT TABLE sets TITLE title FORMAT rw cw BODY text1 varl fmt1 text2 var2 fmt2 option Remarks sets is a list of the identifiers of the sets classifying columns and pages of the variables in the table The first set will classify the columns of the table the other sets if any will classify the pages of the table Sets dimensioning table variables which are missing from the list will classify the rows of the table The sets list sets must contain at least one set or the number 1 for browsing a group of scalar variables and must be missing those set identifiers which will classify the rows of the multidimensional table variables title is any text you wish to show as a title for the table The title may include variables and other format characters according to the rules defined in the WRITE variables statement textil is any text that you wish to use as a subtitle for the values of var1 This text may not contain variables varl is the identifier of the first variable in the table fmt1 is the desired format for the values of var1 Usually this is used to specify the num
252. eft Shift Tab 3 u Move up one position Up arrow 3 d Move down one position Down arrow 3 f First page Home 3 p Previous page PgUp 3 n Next page PgDn 3 h Help Alt H 1 Function key 1 Fl 11 Shift Function key 11 Shift F1 Explicit Return or Enter Return or Enter 4 The interactive keypresses presented above correspond to keys on a standard IBM PC Compatible keyboard Keyboard tables for other platforms are included with the PROMULA installation instructions Table 2 2 Notes 1 Most screen output is suspended during batch execution The show command s may be used to display the screen If the run is being saved on disk or printed the screen will be written to the output file or printed 2 The E and R batch commands for Escape and Resume an application are no longer compatible with PROMULA s batch command language They have been replaced with Main Menu selections so that the batch scripts can more closely parallel interactive runs For example the new and old methods of escaping and resuming from a batch run are illustrated below OLD WAY NEW WAY PROMULA VERSIONS 2 XX AND EARLIER PROMULA VERSIONS 3 XX AND LATER 15 Promula Application Development System User s Manual batch statements batch statements NE m or 4m as a record 10 Main Menu option 10 command mode statements command mode statements NR m 7 Main Menu option 7 more batch statements more batch statements 3 Duri
253. elected variable A SSE INDIRECT indir b c WRITE You have selected variable B or variable C END IF INDIRECT WRI indir WRI indir L W S n p RI Press any key to continue CLEAR 1 elvar END PROCEDURE selvar Execution of procedure selvar and selection of variable b produce the following results 63 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Ident Description value B value C value End Exit Arrows PgUp PgDn Home Move Enter Select You have selected variable B or variable C 2 0000 B value B value Press any key to continue 3 1 6 Expression Logical Definition A numeric expression involving at least one logical operator A logical operator operates on true false expressions to produce the value 1 if the resultant expression is true or the value 0 if the resultant expression is false The logical operators in order of precedence are OPERATOR EXPRESSION MEANING NOT NOTA lif A 1s false otherwise AND A AND B 1 if A and B are true 0 otherwise OR AORB 1 if A or B is true 0 if both are false 64 Promula Application Development System User s Manual A and B are evaluated as true false expressions 3 1 7 Expression Numeric Definition A formula for computing a numeric value or values It consists of a sequence of oper
254. ement There are three types of pick menus 1 Simple one window pick menus defined with a basic DEFINE MENU statement 2 Popup two window pick menus defined with a DEFINE MENU POPUP statement and 3 Pulldown pick menus defined with a SELECT PULLDOWN statement 2 Data menus to create screens for data entry or display using the EDIT menu statement This section describes the DEFINE MENU statement For additional information and examples of using menus refer to the examples at the end of this section and to the sections covering the SELECT menu EDIT menu SELECT PULLDOWN and SELECT FIELD statements Syntax 1 Simple Pick Menu Definition DEFINE MENU menu VARIABLE text TN 1 1 Nchoice2N text text choice3 choice4 text END Remarks menu is the menu identifier text is arbitrary text that you may enter anywhere in the menu template to describe menu selection fields To produce fancy menu displays you may use any character that you can enter with your text editor including those that are not shown explicitly on the keyboard choicen is the label for the nth selection field in the pick menu The selection fields are ordered from 1 to n as you go from left to right and from top to bottom of the menu Up to 20 selection fields may be defined The text and choicen elements may contain any character except the backslash character 9 which is reserved to set off the selection fields of the m
255. ements the months January through December The columns of the array are the expense category dimension They are a set of six elements the 22 Promula Application Development System User s Manual expense categories rent food car service utilities car insurance and phone Like the vector above the array s values would be meaningless if the array and its rows and columns were not well defined This progression can be carried further For example a three dimensional array can be thought of as a group of two dimensional arrays or tables PROMULA arrays may have up to 10 dimensions and the PROMULA language is designed to make it easy for programmers and users to work with this type of highly structured information 2 2 1 2 Planning the Data Structures for an Application In PROMULA you must organize your information into array and scalar variables before your program can manipulate them Often it is useful to categorize the variables as being either inputs and or outputs For example the budget program will manipulate the following inputs and outputs BUDGET PROGRAM INPUTS The essential inputs of the budget program are the worker s monthly expenses and income Monthly expenses For each month the worker must specify his her monthly expenses Since the program is intended to determine the amount of extra money the worker will have at the end of each month only those expenses that the worker must pay each month will be included
256. emonstrated in the dialog below READ A 1234567432 S MIN r A r WRITE The minimum value in vector A is S The minimum value in vector A is 1 S 56 Promula Application Development System User s Manual WRITE The maximum value in vector A is S The maximum value in vector A is 7 4 Writing Your Own Functions DEFINE PROCEDURE mod DEFINE PARAMETER a b e END PARAMETER c a b c IFIX b END PROCEDURE mod The procedure mod defined above computes the value of the first parameter modulus the second parameter and returns the result in the third parameter A sample dialog with procedure mod is shown below DEFINE VARIABLE avar bvar cvar END VARIABLE avar 27 bvar 11 MOD avar bvar cvar WRITE avar 0 2 MOD bvar 0 2 cvar 27 00 MOD 11 00 5 avar 47 bvar 13 MOD avar bvar cvar WRITE avar 0 2 MOD bvar 0 2 cvar 47 00 MOD 13 00 8 avar 35 bvar 3 MOD avar bvar cvar WRITE avar 0 2 MOD bvar 0 2 cvar 35 00 MOD 3 00 2 5 Using the RANDOM Function The RANDOM function can take zero to three arguments NUMBER OF EXPRESSION VALUE RETURNED ARGUMENTS 57 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 0 x RANDOM a random number between O and 1 using the current see
257. empting to open a non existing file with STATUS OLD will cause an execution error You may use the FILEEXIST function to test if a file exists OLD is the default status DYNAMIC to open an existing array file for automatic dynamic access When an array file is opened with DYNAMIC status PROMULA attempts to read the entire contents of the file into memory If there is enough memory the variables in the file may be accessed from memory with a significant reduction in access time If there is not enough memory to load the file PROMUDLA will report an execution error When the file is closed its entire contents will be written out to disk Automatic dynamic access is generally limited to small databases or machines with large and or virtual memory VIRTUAL to open an existing array file for paged virtual access When an array file is opened with VIRTUAL status PROMULA attempts to read write large sections of the data If there is enough memory the variables in the file may be accessed from memory with a significant reduction in access time If there is not enough memory to page in the file PROMULA will report an execution error When the file is closed its entire contents will be written out to disk The VIRTUAL status requires less memory than DYNAMIC status but it is generally limited to small databases or machines with large and or virtual memory If the keyword READONLY is included with the OPEN file statement the file is given read
258. enu 144 Promula Application Development System User s Manual the at character which is reserved to set off data fields to be edited in data menus the tilde character which is reserved to set off display only fields in data menus VARIABLE is a keyword labeling the pick menu as a VARIABLE pick menu This keyword is only required if you intend to use the SELECT FIELD statement to modify the menu at runtime Simple pick menus are much simpler to define than popup pick menus but are not as flashy or flexible as popup or pulldown pick menus Syntax 2 Popup Pick Menu Definition DEFINE menul POPUP swind twind EN HEADER VARIABLE text SELECTION SCREEN text choicel choice2 text DEFINITION text Nchoice3N choice4 text END FIELD n SELECT char HELP topic FIELD STATEMENT ACTION code desc END ENU menu2 SUBMENU DEFINITION text text choicell 1 12 text text choicel3 choicel4 text END FIELD n SELECT char HELP topic ACTION code desc END END menul Remarks A popup menu definition consists of a top level menu definition and several optional submenu definitions Each menu definition consists of a selection screen and a group of FIELD statements The keyword POPUP following the identifier of a menu indicates to PROMULA that the menu is a popup pick menu menul is the identifier of th
259. epth The value of condition is computed before each iteration of the DO loop Examples The following dialog demonstrates the execution of a DO UNTIL loop DEFINE VARIABLE END VARIABLE x 0 DO UNTIL x GT 3 WRITE x Top of the loop x x 1 WRITE x Bottom of the loop END UNTIL 0 Top of the loop Bottom of the loop Top of the loop Bottom of the loop Top of the loop Bottom of the loop Top of the loop Bottom of the loop i w w From this example you can see how easy it is to construct infinite loops simply remove the equation x x 1 3 7 56 DO WHILE Purpose Executes repeatedly a group of statements while a given condition is met Syntax DO WHILE condition statement END Remarks condition is any Boolean expression i e an expression that is either true or false If true the statements between the DO WHILE and the END statement are executed if false the statements between the DO and END are not executed statement is any executable statement no definitions including a DO statement The group of statements together with the DO WHILE and END statements is called a DO WHILE loop DO loops may be nested to any depth The value of condition is computed before each iteration of the DO loop 208 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Examples The following dialog demonstrates the execution of a DO W
260. er The following exact relationship must be satisfied lc ic 1 ne nl where 1 is a positive integer denoting the number of lines that each column heading will have The default is 1 The specification 1c nc can be read as read in each spanner from column to column 1 in steps of Thus if ic 1 1 30 nc 10 each data line should contain 30 characters that will form a three line 1 30 1 1 10 3 column heading with 10 characters on each line Only one spanner per data line is permitted Note that if set was defined with a COLUMN option the format of the spanner data field must conform with the format specified in that option KEY ic 1c to specify that set codes are to be read ic is a positive integer defining the initial column on each data line where the code entry begins The default is ic 1 238 Promula Application Development System User s Manual lc isa positive integer 1c or ic defining the last column on each data line where the code entry ends The default is 1c 20 Only one code descriptor per data line is permitted Note that if the set was defined with a KEY option the total width of the code field may not exceed the defined width The set codes are used for three separate purposes First if no row descriptors are supplied then the codes are used in their place for displays of arrays that are classified by set Second if no column headings are supplied then
261. er the subtitle and finally the time interval DEFINE SET row 2 run 2 tim 10 TIME 1990 1999 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE a row tim TYPE REAL 5 1 THE A MATRIX sname YPE STRING 12 END VARIABLE a i j i j sname SCENARIO x READ row row 1 row 2 READ run RUN RUN 2 mn DEFINE PROCEDURE proc SE run 2 SE RUNID run SCENARIO sname WRITE a 7 7 TITLE a L END PROCEDURE proc EC EC The statement DO proc SUBTITLE This is the subtitle produces the display below 202 Promula Application Development System User s Manual THE A MATRIX SCENARIO x RUN 2 This is the subtitle 1990 to 1999 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 1 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 0 row 2 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 0 10 0 12 0 14 0 16 0 18 0 20 0 3 7 53 DO REGRESS Purpose Produces a report of one or more pages of the results of multivariate least squares regression for specified variables by finding the best fit for the following model Y Bo 1 B2X2 BnXn Y is the dependent variable the X are the independent predictor variables and the Bj are the regression coefficients Syntax DO REGRESS sets vars output Remarks sets is a list of set identifiers subscripting the array s to be regressed The
262. er DT The value of an output series at a time point t is set equal to the computed value of the corresponding endogenous variable that is associated with the interval c DT 2 t DT 2 This interval is closed at DT 2 and open at t DT 2 If t is the exact midpoint of the interval then the c DT 2 value applies Execution of a LEVEL statement causes the TIME parameter to be incremented by DT units from its value in the preceding RATE section The LEVEL statement may only be used inside a procedure it cannot be used in command mode Examples For more information on dynamic simulation with PROMULA see the discussion of Dynamic Procedures in the DEFINE PROCEDURE section of this chapter and the discussion of the RATE statement 3 7 64 OPEN file Purpose Opens a disk file for physical write read operations of data to from disk Syntax OPEN file filespec STATUS status READONLY Remarks file is the identifier of a file in your program filespec isa quoted string or string variable containing the name of the disk file to be opened filespec may contain any filename that is valid for your operating system 221 Promula Application Development System User s Manual status is one of the following options NEW to open a new file of any type When using the OPEN file statement with STATUS NEW any file with the same name as ilespec will be deleted before the new file is opened OLD to open an existing file of any type Att
263. er a reasonable number of iterations then an error message is displayed and you may try another starting guess for the unknowns A diagnostic is also given if the system does not have a real solution Examples The following program demonstrates how to define and solve a system of 3 equations and 3 unknowns Define a system of 3 equations with 3 unknowns DEFINE SYSTEM sys1 DEFINE PARAMETER x 1st unknown y 2nd unknown z 3rd unknown END 1 x y y 1 z x y y z 8 X l y 2 END sysl Make an initial guess for the solution of system sys1 and solve DEFINE VARIABLE al T 1st Unknown YPE REAL 10 5 a2 2nd Unknown YPE REAL 10 5 a3 3rd Unknown YPE REAL 10 5 END VARIABLE al 1 a2 1 a3 1 sysl al a2 a3 Write the solution values for system sys1 WRITE al 1st Unknown 5 00000 WRITE a2 2nd Unknown 2 00000 WRITE a3 3rd Unknown 1 00000 Procedure solv1 solves system sys1 and displays the solutions repeatedly by trying different initial guesses DEFINE VARIABLE iter Iteration Counter ND VARIABLE Eri DEFINE PROCEDURE solvi WRITE Enter 3 values as your initial guess for the solution of sys1 READ al a2 a3 iter 1 DO WHILE iter LE 3 sysl al a2 a3 WRITE A solution for sysl is WRITE al
264. er is first statement is any executable statement no definitions including another DO statement The group of executable statements between the DO IF and the next ELSE or END statement or between an ELSE and the next ELSE or END statement is called a branch of the DO IF statement A branch is executed only if all previous conditions are false and the condition of the branch is true otherwise execution proceeds to the evaluation of the condition of the next branch DO IF statements may be nested to any depth DO IF statements may have multiple ELSE statements In a DO IF with multiple ELSE statements the conditions of the ELSE statements are evaluated sequentially from top to bottom if the first condition is false the second condition is evaluated and so forth until a true condition is found or the END is encountered If an ELSE statement has no condition specified it is assumed to be the complement of all previous conditions That is if all the previous conditions are false the null ELSE statement is true For this reason a null ELSE statement if desired should always be specified last Examples DEFINE VARIABLI ND VARIABLI tj DEFINE PROCEDURE doif DO IF x GT y WRITE x x 5 2 y y 5 2 x is greater than y ELSE x EQ y WRITE x x 5 2 y y 5 2 x is equal to y ELSE WRITE x x 5 2 y y 5 2 x is les
265. er to be sure that there is sufficient memory to bring a dynamic variable into memory either explicitly with a READ DISK statement or implicitly by using it in an expression This is especially true when dealing with large dynamic variables Note that even though these variables are defined as memory type SCRATCH they are not truly scratch variables because their values are stored on disk In fact using the DISK option makes the classification of local variables as fixed or scratch artificial It is much more meaningful to classify local variables which have a DISK option in their definition as being either virtual or dynamic Before accessing a disk variable it is necessary to open the file containing it with an OPEN file statement Be sure not to use STATUSZNEW when you open an existing datafile or PROMULA will erase the file s contents OPEN filea filea dba STATUS OLD Once the file specified in the DISK option is physically opened the disk variables may be accessed The dialog below illustrates that the virtual variables do indeed contain the values of the disk variables to which they are related WRITE ldatl A 3 dimensional Array PAG 1 COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 ROW 1 111 121 131 141 ROW 2 211 221 231 241 ROW 3 311 321 331 341 PAG 2 COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 ROW 1 112 122 132 142 ROW 2 212 222 232 242 ROW 3 312 322 332 342 WRITE ldat2 A 2 dimensional Array COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 ROW 1
266. es for y between 0 at the top and 24 at the bottom You may intermix several text and param specifications in the same WRITE text statement 290 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Examples PROMULA s WRITE statement generates an automatic line feed after the write If you want to suppress this action you may include a character as the last character of output The example below demonstrates this feature and 0 0 formatting DEFINE SET tst 5 END DEFINE VARIABLI x tstn tst TYPE STRING 10 END SELECT ROW tst tstn tstn i i DEFINE PROCEDURE wrt DO tst x tst s WRITE tst x x fills 8 characters by default x 2 WRITE x 2 x 0 0 No trailing blanks with 0 0 END tst END PROCEDURE wrt Execution of procedure wrt produces the following output 1lx 1 fills 8 characters by default x 2 1 No trailing blanks with 0 0 2x 2 fills 8 characters by default x 2 4 No trailing blanks with 0 0 3x 3 fills 8 characters by default x 2 9 No trailing blanks with 0 0 4 x 4 fills 8 characters by default x 2 16 No trailing blanks with 20 0 5 x 5 fills 8 characters by default x 2 25 No trailing blanks with 20 0 This example demonstrates the justify parameter variable formatting and several other WRITE text options
267. esensossssenenseeses 298 4 1 DATABASE MANAGEMENT IN PROMUDLA sorniera ir EE REA E nennen eren ener enne 298 4 1 1 Program 1 Create d New Database eee etre tirer ttp ee tre tH REOR tei 299 4 1 2 Program 2 Access an Old Database eese nennen entente tenete entren trennen eren enne 300 4 1 3 More About Database Management eese esses eee einen enne nennen enn tet tent en 311 4 2 PROGRAM MANAGEMENT IN PROMULA e nee en enne nnne 313 4 2 1 A Segmented Program with a Database eese eene nennen rete eerte teen 313 4 2 2 Multi Segment Programs in Separate Disk Files eese eee enne en trennt ene 317 FANGUINE LUUUU 321 5 1 USING THE GRAPHICS CONFIGURATION PROGRAM seen ee eee eee nenne nene trennen nennen ntes 321 5 1 1 Selecting Graphics Configurations edm e eere lel ir eee d ee e i Rae EE CER Te dee e ee Du ies 32 5 1 2 Managing Custom Graphics Configurations eese eene enne enne entente teen trennen trennen rennen 324 2 3 Testing PROMULA Graphics 5 Uere ERR ee RUE NE ied e ERR 328 iv Promula Application Development System User s Manual 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 Organization of the Manual This manual is divided into five chapters CHAPTER 1 introduces you to the PROMULA system s features capabilities and requirements and tells you how to install and
268. ess the Enter key The following display results A 3 Dimensional Array PAGE 1 COL 1 COL 2 Enter value or End 216 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The value 2 6 is rounded up to 3 because variable a was defined with the default type REAL 8 0 Internally however the value is stored correctly as 2 6 This is verified below Press the End key The following display results A 3 Dimensional Array PAGE 2 COL 1 COL 2 End Exit Fn Shift Fn PgUp PgDn Home Arrows Select Enter Edit Press the End key again This gets you out of editing mode To verify the above editing the following dialog shows the values of a by column row and page with two decimal digits WRITE a col row page 10 2 A 3 Dimensional Array PAGE 1 COL 1 0 00 0 00 0 00 COL 2 0 00 0 00 0 00 PAGE 2 COL 1 1 00 0 00 0 00 COL 2 2 60 0 00 0 00 3 7 60 END Purpose 217 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Ends a structured group of statements Syntax END comment Remarks comment is an optional comment that you may wish to use in order to distinguish one END statement from another The following statements require an END statement ASK ELSE BROWSE COMMENT BROWSE TEXT DEFINE DIALOG DEFINE FILE DEFINE FUNCTION DEFINE MENU DEFINE PARAMETER DEFINE PROCEDURE DEFINE RELATION DEFINE SET DEFINE SYSTEM DEFINE VARIABLE DEFINE W
269. et aec eee 232 3 7 70 READ file auem RR em ute aee eu tee e net at dede 233 3 7 71 READ TURCUORA ieia ONE Re ed Hee cbe ede E rte e RU 235 3 772 READ gud E ede eu n RI EH Ie ER SI 236 3 7 73 READ SEGMENT idee n tet eun d EE WEE coe eet ve ERE EE De A RUE o Yes 237 3 4 74 READ ne e ROBO I eei teh tip dette WEG rege 237 3 7 7 READ VALUE e e e Re tease ETHER oe ove Rege tv eter ete 240 3 7 76 READ variable is end uenerit eet RU EH SER IE 241 SAAT READ variables Ince EH ene 244 BRAUN PPET E O 246 S579 RUN COMMAND nS UII e nU 246 3 72 80 RUN COMPIEER itte nid iie taie 248 SLOT RENJDOST ss RS eR A ote n M Le pM t Me 249 S02 RUN EDITOR s stt t rint Et ute hn I 249 9 4509 RUN PROGRAM 3 eoe p e ER CERE E ERR eR EVER ERE NE 250 9504 UN SOURCE DETA ates ma etit cotra tete on dt EE 251 9 505 SEEECTIENTRY S eet evt tea a DIS 251 SUAOOSSEEECT EIEED EA ette edt eiae eec e 253 9 7 07 SELECT file ii o e t ae RENE ide EORR NEUE ta otic Gr PR E RID RR EE RTRS 254 9 7 00 AS ALTE CPN AIT ECE caine iv ens rper tueri iu ere ro ee 257 S09 OS EEEC seva EE t e tdi IE Aiea 256 3 7 90 SELECT Option praep p ree PUR Ei Cr ORE e P EDD 259 3 7 01 SELECT PUELDO WN iiscsiasiceds cabs don ute RE ve eee oto ea edv Hv PER EP eo 267
270. et was defined the set identifier in capital letters will be used PROMULA will check the validity of the user s responses to ensure that selections are in the range of the set 275 Promula Application Development System User s Manual In addition to set codes or element numbers the following keywords may be entered in response to the SELECT VARIABLE statement s prompts ALL to select all elements in the range of the set being selected LIST to display the element numbers or codes and descriptors of all active elements of the set being selected END toexitthe SELECT VARIABLE statement set selection process Example The behavior of the SELECT VARIABLE statement is illustrated in the example below First two sets are defined year a time series set and state Notice that set year has no descriptor and that set state has a strange looking descriptor specifically for use with the set selection question generated by the SELECT VARIABLE statement Next two variables are defined pop is a two dimensional array that will be used in the SELECT VARIABLE statement to control the order of set selections staten is a code type variable that can be used to specify selections from set state Next variable staten is related to set state and the variables are initialized Finally procedure slcvar is defined to run the SELECT VARIABLE statement and display the results DEFINE SET year 4 TIME 1990 2020 state 3 of the 3 state END SET
271. ets Remarks sets isa list of set identifiers If omitted all program sets are listed The AUDIT SET statement lists the identifiers and descriptors of the program sets If sets is omitted the sets are listed in the order in which they were defined otherwise they are listed in the order specified by sets Examples The dialog below demonstrates the AUDIT SET statement DEFINE SET month 12 12 Months row 3 3 Rows col 10 10 Columns END SET AUDIT SET Identifier Descriptor month 12 Months row 3 Rows col 10 Columns 3 7 5 AUDIT VARIABLE Purpose Produces a full or partial listing of the variables in a program Syntax AUDIT VARIABLE vars Remarks vars is a list of variable identifiers If omitted all program variables are listed 101 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The AUDIT VARIABLE statement lists the identifiers and descriptors of the program variables If vars is omitted the variables are listed in the order in which they were defined otherwise the sets are listed in the order specified by vars Examples The dialog below demonstrates the AUDIT VARIABLE statement DEFINE VARIABLE x The x values y The y values ND VARIABLI 1 Eu AUDIT VARIABL Identifier Descriptor x The x values y The y values EH 3 7 6 BREAK procedure Purpose Escapes from the curren
272. eturns V 0 since string A is not equal to string B It is also possible to use PROMULA s COMPARE function with a quoted string as illustrated in the example below DEFINE VARIABLE rsp TYPE STRING 8 END VARIABLE DEFINE PROCEDURE comp WRITE Do you agree Y N READ rsp O IF COMPARE rsp Y WRITE Why do you agree ELSE COMPARE rsp N WRITE Why don t you agree END IF END PROCEDURE comp im NOTE The COMPARE function is obsolete it is retained for compatibility with older versions of PROMULA It is now possible to use the relational operators EQ NE LT etc to compare string expressions PROMULA is a loose typing language This means that it is allowed to mix character variables and numeric variables in the same expression In fact you may use character variables that contain numeric data as if they were numeric variables Although there are some limitations on the use of these mixed expressions one useful application is the generation of numbered lists DEFINE SET row 8 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE str row YPE STRING 10 val row YPE INTEGER 1 END VARIABLE val i i str team val WRITE str ROW 1 team 1 ROW 2 team 2 ROW 3 team 3 ROW 4 team 4 ROW 5 team 5 ROW 6 team 6 ROW 7 team 7 ROW 8 team 8 3 1 5 Expres
273. eturns the y value of the function s nearest end point The argument of a function may be a constant a scalar a multidimensional variable an arithmetic expression of many variables or another function In addition to their computational use functions may be displayed in tabular form with the BROWSE function and WRITE function statements and may be viewed in plotted form via the PLOT statement Examples The following example illustrates the DEFINE LOOKUP statement DEFINE LOOKUP 143 Promula Application Development System User s Manual f1 10 X 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 0 Y 1 2 2 2 2 8 42 5 59 5 0 9 9 9 12 0 14 5 15 9 2 10 END LOOKUP Here the DEFINE LOOKUP statement is used to create two functions 1 which gets initial values in its definition with an xyoption and 2 which has its initial values equal to zero Both of these functions have 10 ordered X Y pairs See also the READ function WRITE function BROWSE function PLOT and DEFINE FUNCTION statements for more information on functions 3 7 08 DEFINE MENU Purpose Defines a screen menu for later use A screen menu is a type of program interface designed to help its user either to pick from a list of options or to display and or edit data values Depending on content intended use and appearance there are two kinds of menus 1 Pick menus to help the user make a selection from a set of options using the SELECT menu stat
274. ew graphics configurations that satisfy the requirements of your hardware and or your preferences Changing the line colors and patterns requires no technical knowledge but changing plot sizes especially for printers requires detailed technical information about your printer s data transfer protocol Currently the following items are used to define a PROMULA graphics configuration 1 Device Descriptor This is a string of up to sixty characters that describes the configuration definition It is used only for descriptive purposes and its value does not affect the behavior of graphics in any way 2 Device type This is a code describing the type of output device that will be used for plots video raster printer e g HP LaserJet vector video e g VT 240 Regis Graphics raster video e g VT 330 Sixel Graphics vector printer e g a Pen Plotter BWNrF 1 3 Horizontal text pixel width This is the width in pixels of each character of horizontal text that may appear with a plot Text on plots uses an internally defined fixed width font 4 Horizontal text pixel height This is the height in pixels of each character of horizontal text that may appear with a plot 5 Vertical text pixel width This is the width in pixels of each character of vertical text that appears with the plot 6 Vertical text pixel height This is the height in pixels of each character of vertical text that appears with the plot 7 Total width in pixels
275. ey behave like a WRITE table statement You may override this default and use the same table for interactive data browsing or data entry by executing a SELECT BROWSE statement See the SELECT option statement for details Tables may be written in a disk file by using a SELECT OUTPUT statement The title defined for a table may be locally overridden with a custom title by including a title specification with the call to the table For example when displaying a table called tab1 the statement tabl TITLE newtext will display tab1 with the title specified by newtext instead of the title specified in the definition of tab1 Examples The following example illustrates use of the DEFINE TABLE statement First a group of financial variables and several other variables that will be used to construct a financial summary report are defined and initialized The data for the financial variables were obtained from a database not shown See the FPLAN PRM example on the PROMULA Demo Disk for details DEFINE SET col 13 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE TABLE DATA VARIABLES 172 Promula Application Development System User s Manual netsal col Net Sales YPE REAL 8 1 empcos col Employment Costs YPE REAL 8 1 msrvce col Materials and Service YPE REAL
276. f all complex control structures is the Conditional Branch Conditional branches are program statements that can redirect linear flow and create more flexible and responsive execution paths schematic of a conditional branch is shown in the figure below Process B FALSE 0 Process A TRUE 1 29 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Figure 2 11 A Simple Conditional Branch Conditional branch statements are often referred to as IF THEN ELSE statements For example the diagram above illustrates a simple conditional branch that can be read as If the Condition is true then do Process A else the Condition is false do Process B Process A and or Process B may also contain Conditional branches An IF THEN ELSE statement that might be used in the budget program would check the value of the taxes variable to make sure it makes sense Recall that variable taxes is used by the budget program to make a simple adjustment on the worker s earnings to reflect the fraction of pay lost to taxes The program expects this value to be between 0 5 and one In PROMULA the DO IF statement is used to create logical branches An example of the DO IF statement that could be used to check the value of taxes and write an error message if the value does not fit the expectations of the program is shown below DO IF taxes GT 1 WRITE The value of taxes should be less than one ELSE taxes LE 0 WRITE
277. f the table and issues the following message at the bottom of the display End Exit Fn Shift Fn PgUp PgDn Home Arrows Select Enter Edit The highlighted portions of the message represent the following options Fn press the Fn function key to browse up the nth dimension of the array where n varies from 1 to 10 The F1 key browses up the 1st dimension the F2 key browses up the 2nd dimension and so forth Shift Fn press simultaneously the Shift and Fn keys to browse down the nth dimension of the array where n varies from 1 to 10 The F1 key browses up the 1st dimension the F2 key browses up the 2nd dimension and so forth The Shift F1 key browses down the Ist dimension the Shift F2 key browses down the 2nd dimension etc Arrows The four movement arrows at the right hand section of the keyboard allow you to move the cursor to the PgUp desired value The Page Up and Page Down keys may be used to move up and down the pages of the display PgDn Home moves the cursor to the top of the display which is the first value on the first page Enter press the Enter key to initiate editing mode This causes the following 1 highlights the value to be edited with a block cursor 2 issues the following message at the lower left hand corner of the Prompt Screen Enter value or End At this point you may change the marked value by entering a new one and pressing the Enter key The cursor moves to the next value to edit
278. file Inverted files are used only by PROMULA and are closely related to random files The DEFINE FILE statement defines an inverted file The OPEN file statement opens an inverted file for use The READ file statement reads data from an inverted file The WRITE file statement writes data to an inverted file The SELECT file statement makes selections from an inverted file The CLEAR file statement physically closes an inverted file saving its current contents The DO file statement sequentially accesses the selected records of an inverted file The definition and use of Inverted files is illustrated in the examples given in the SELECT file statement 3 1 9 1 4 Array Files Array files are value addressable random access files that contain indexed multidimensional arrays of data Though stored on disk the variables of array files are defined via the DEFINE VARIABLE statement in the same way as program variables that are stored in your working space Obviously disk variables can store many more values than standard program variables Though unique to PROMULA array files may be converted to text data ASCII files for transfer to other programs or other computers using the COPY file and WRITE statements 69 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Moreover the values of array files can also be used directly by programs written in other languages such as C or FORTRAN The method of access for array files is dire
279. file statements For additional examples on the use of array file databases in transferring data to and from disk see Chapter 4 See also the COPY statement and the discussion of the file management functions FILEDELETE FILEEXIST FILESIZE FILENAME FILEEXT FILEPATH and GETDIR 3 7 26 DEFINE FUNCTION Purpose Defines a single valued function as the linear interpolation between points defined on the x y plane A function expresses an arbitrary relationship of one variable the y variable to another variable the x variable It is defined in terms of two arrays or variables The first array contains the values of the x variable while the second contains the values of the y variable These variable values are the x y coordinates of the points defining the function Syntax DEFINE FUNCTION func arrx arry ifunc arry arrx 139 Promula Application Development System User s Manual END Remarks func isthe function identifier ifunc is the identifier of the inverse of function func Note the order of arrx and arry is reversed arrx isthe identifier of the real fixed or scratch variable containing the x coordinates of the points defining the function arry isthe identifier of the real fixed or scratch variable containing the y coordinates of the points defining the function arrx and arry must be local variables they may not be disk variables or variables used to access disk variables arrx and arry must have th
280. file that was assigned to a file by a previous open The READ DISK and WRITE DISK statements allow you to explicitly transfer information between your program memory space and the variables in an array file The READ file and WRITE file statements allow you to physically transfer information between your program memory space and the variables in text and random files Examples The following statements DEFINE FILE txt TEXT file YPE TEXT dbf RANDOM File YPE RANDOM dba ARRAY File YPE ARRAY dbi INVERTED File YPE INVERTED 10 END FILE define three files txt which is a text file that may be used for test input and output dbf which is a random type file and dba which is an array file The structure of the array file dba could be used to contain weather data by the following code OPEN dba wthr dba STATUS NEW DEFINE SET dba days 31 Day mons 12 Month year 10 Year ND SET dba DEFINE VARIABLE dba wthdsc days mons year TYPE STRING 20 Description 138 Promula Application Development System User s Manual hitemp days mons year YPE REAL 10 1 High Temp lotemp days mons year YPE REAL 10 1 Low Temp YPE REAL 10 2 High Humidity hihumd days mons year lohumd days mons year YPE REAL 10 2 Low Humidity hibarp days
281. ged by an expression a 20 WRITE a The value of variable A 20 293 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The READ VALUE MAIN statement will read in the values of the segment MAIN s variables that were stored by the last WRITE VALUE MAIN statement READ VALUE MAIN WRITE a The value of variable A 10 3 7 111 WRITE variable Purpose Shows the information in a variable Syntax WRITE var fmt ORDER sets TITLE title DISPLAY dvar option Remarks var is the identifier of a variable fmt is a format specification to indicate the position of the display the width of the values displayed and the number of decimals in real values as follows Np w d where p is an integer specifying the width in characters for row descriptors The default width is the width specifications of the row descriptors related to the set subscripting the rows of the display w is an integer specifying the width in characters for each column of values The default is the width specification in the definition of var A negative width parameter left justifies the values of var in each column d is an integer specifying the number of decimals to display for real numeric values The default is the decimal specification if applicable in the definition of var If d is an E the values of var will be displayed in exponential notation base 10 and will show seven digits and six
282. gh resolution laser printers may not work because the image is too complex and may overload the printer s memory PLOT Statement Options Syntaxes 1 through 4 above have an option parameter associated with them which allows you to customize the appearance of the plot The option parameter is a list of additional specifications for the plot and may be one or all of the following BROWSE seti set2 to allow the user to browse the pages of a plot of one or more multidimensional arrays If applicable set1 will be incremented decremented by pressing F1 Shift F1 set2 will be incremented decremented by pressing F2 Shift F2 and so on A prompt describing how to browse the plots will appear at the bottom of the screen GRID t ype to define a grid for the plot Here is one of the following HORIZONTAL for horizontal lines between the tic marks on the Y axis VERTICAL for vertical lines between the tic marks on the X axis BOTH for horizontal and vertical lines LEGEND 1eg1 1eg2 to define a legend for the plot Here leg1 is a string variable or quoted string containing a short legend for vary1 the first variable of the plot 1eg2 is a legend for vary2 the second variable of the plot and so forth LINE pat1 pat2 to define alternative line patterns for unmarked line plots Here pat1 is a string variable or quoted string containing 16 characters which defines a repeating pattern for the vary1 line pat2 defines a repeating pa
283. gment of the tree The DEFINE SEGMENT and END SEGMENT statements define the beginning and end respectively of the other segments in the above tree Note that segments seg1 and seg2 are subordinate to MAIN at level 1 Segment seg11 at level 2 is subordinate to segment segl 2 The statements OPEN SEGMENT program xeq STATUS OLD READ SEGMENT MAIN allow you to use the segment file created in Example 1 3 7 66 OPEN WINDOW Purpose Tells PROMULA to associate a user defined window with a specific type of functional screen Syntax OPEN wind TYPE Remarks wind is the identifier of the window that you wish to open This window must be previously defined in a DEFINE WINDOW statement TYPE isthetype of functional screen that will be shown in the window and can be one of the following MAIN the Main Screen PROMPT the Prompt Screen COMMENT the Comment Screen ERROR the Error Screen HELP the Help Screen Upon execution the OPEN WINDOW statement will open the window called name to serve as the display area for the logical screen TYPE 224 Promula Application Development System User s Manual If windis a static window it will be drawn on the screen upon execution of the OPEN If wind is a popup window it will not be displayed until an operation requiring a screen of type TYPE is executed See also DEFINE WINDOW and CLEAR window statements as well as the discussion of Advanced Wind
284. h record The items in a text record may be laid out by a person using a text editor or by a computer program The DEFINE FILE statement defines a text file The OPEN file statement opens a text file for use The READ file statement reads data from a text file The WRITE file statement writes data to a text file The CLEAR file statement physically closes a text file saving its current contents The DO file statement allows you to access all records of a text file in sequential order from Record 1 to Record N where N is the last record of the file 3 1 9 1 2 Random Files Random files are random access files of fixed length binary records Each record consists of a fixed number of variables The variables of a random file may be scalar items that each fill a single field and or multidimensional arrays that fill many fields Random files may be used to build relational databases i e with a tabular structure in PROMULA Random access means that you may access any record in the file arbitrarily without having to access all records before it in the file In this respect they are more efficient than text files A record number is associated with each record in a random file This number varies from 1 to where is the total number of records in the file It is via the record number that you can access any record of the file in random access fashion 68 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The DEFINE FILE s
285. hapter 3 3 7 101 WRITE COMMENT Purpose Displays text in the Comment Screen 281 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Syntax WRITE COMMENT text END Remarks text is any text that you wish to display in the Comment Screen The amount of text displayed is limited by the size of the Comment Screen The keyword END must be entered starting in column 1 and must be capitalized Upon execution the text will be shown in the Comment Screen of the display For more details see the sections on Windowing in the beginning of this chapter 3 7 102 WRITE DISK Purpose Transfers data from a local variable to a disk variable in an array file in the dynamic access method Syntax WRITE DISK vars Remarks vars isalist of dynamic variables A dynamic variable is a scratch or fixed variable also called a local variable that has a dynamic relationship to a disk variable Local variables may be related to disk variables through the DISK option of the DEFINE VARIABLE statement See chapter 4 for a detailed description of disk access methods Examples The following code DEFINE FILE filea END FILE OPEN filea test dba STATUS NEW DEFINE SET rec 1000 Record END SET DEFINE VARIABLE filea dsk pnt A Disk Variable on filea END VARIABLE filea DEFINE VARIABLE pp Record Pointer Scr A dynamic va
286. hard to use if they require the user to create complicated control files On the other hand noninteractive programs are sometimes more convenient than interactive ones since they can run without a user present Interactive applications are typically controlled by commands entered with a keyboard or mouse Such programs conduct a dialog with the user by displaying menus asking questions presenting screens to the user and reacting to the user s responses Interactive programs can be more responsive and permissive than noninteractive ones and they are often easier for non programmers to use effectively 41 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Noninteractive applications usually require only four of the five basic programming tasks data definition program control data manipulation and report generation The fifth basic programming task interface design is optional and is needed only if you want to create interactive applications Interface design involves setting up the screens through which program users can control the program and implementing the structures that control these screens There are two basic actions that an interactive program interface must support displaying information on the screen and getting information from the user These two tasks are often intimately related since the program may display information on the screen in order to instruct the user about what information is required and how it should be
287. hat contains the name of a file in which you want to save the results of output statements Output will also be displayed on the screen even if another device has been selected To use the SELECT OUTPUT statement follow it with a SELECT PRINTER ON statement and any other options you may want to set for text report generation SELECT OUTPUT report out PRINTER ON WIDTH 132 264 Promula Application Development System User s Manual After selecting output most displays produced by PROMULA will be written to the specified disk file The affected statements include WRITE text WRITE variable COPY file WRITE function WRITE table table PLOT in CHARACTER mode WRITE menu WRITE TEXT and the statistical function reports To close the file and inactivate the SELECT OUTPUT statement execute a SELECT PRINTER OFF statement PAGE number to change the value of PROMULA s internal page counter to number The current page count is displayed in display headings produced by the report generator PATH pathspec to indicate what the path of the data drive is Here pathspec is a valid path specification or a string variable whose value is a valid path specification including subdirectory parameters You can turn pathing off by executing a SELECT PATH statement You may locally override the path to pathspec by using an S as a drive designation before file names For example if you enter the statement OPEN file S mydata
288. hat the values of the local variable 1dat1 are also restored since it is virtually related to dat 1 as illustrated in the dialog below WRITE ldatl A 3 dimensional Array PAG 1 COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 ROW 1 111 121 quss 141 ROW 2 211 221 231 241 ROW 3 311 321 331 341 PAG 2 COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 ROW 1 112 122 132 142 ROW 2 212 222 232 242 ROW 3 312 322 332 342 The dynamic variables associated with dat1 are not changed unless an explicit READ DISK or CLEAR variable statement is executed As illustrated in the dialog below WRITE dsv Dynamic Scalar 1 000 WRITE drc Dynamic Array by row and col COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 ROW 1 1 2 3 4 ROW 2 2 4 6 8 ROW 3 3 6 9 12 The READ DISK statement transfers values from disk to memory READ DISK dsv drc WRITE dsv Dynamic Scalar 232 WRITE drc 308 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Dynamic Array by row and col COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 ROW 1 112 122 132 142 ROW 2 212 222 232 242 ROW 3 312 322 332 342 4 1 2 1 Accessing Subsets of Disk Variables The dynamic method for accessing array files described above allows a programmer to access dimensional sections of array variables on disk and to have different orderings for the dimensions of the local and disk variables For example the local variable dpr defined above is a pag by row sectio
289. he DO IF ERRORVALUE statement is used to branch according to location of the currently highlighted field on the data menu If you press Alt H when the cursor is on the field wt which is the 3rd field in the data menu you will get the message Please enter your weight in kilograms which is the 3rd topic in the dialog file dohelp1 hlp ERRORVALUE is an internal PROMULA variable that contains the sequence number of the currently highlighted field in data and pick menus Define a dialog file with help messages DEFINE DIALOG dohelpl hlp Data Entry Help Messages Select the desired message by using the movement keys Press ENTER to access the desired highlighted message Press END to return to the previous menu Press ESC to exit to the PROMULA Main Menu END 194 Promula Application Development System User s Manual TOPIC NAME Please enter your last name in all CAPITAL letters END TOPIC AGE Please enter your age in years END 3 1 OPIC WEIGHT Please enter your weight in kilograms N ND iw Ej i Define a procedure for editing a data menu and providing field specific help for the data variables in the data menu DEFINE VARIABLE name User Name TYPE STRING 12 age User Age years wt User Weight Kilograms END VARIABLE DEFINE MENU data Data Entry Menu Name Q
290. he user to show a table of growth rates in time series data for a previously defined time series variable n is an integer constant that specifies the number of time units with which each change is associated A time series dataset or array is one which is subscripted by a time series set The growth rate for time t is computed from values for time t and t 1 114 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Following the keyword GROWTH a real number within parentheses is required and stands for the number of time units between each pair of values for which growth rate will be computed Internally it is divided by the difference in time values for selected t and t 1 Suppose the user has selected 1970 and 1975 and wishes to show annual growth rates GROWTH 1 The growth rate for 1975 is computed as a quotient value for 1975 divided by value for 1970 raised to the power 1 5 1 0 1975 1970 One is subtracted from this quantity to get a growth rate and a factor of 100 gives the final result as a percent rate from 1970 to 1975 in one year increments In the tabular display the words Growth Rate in are placed in front of the original title unless a TITLE option is specified MOVING n The MOVING option allows the user to show a table of moving averages in time series data for a previously defined time series array Following the keyword MOVING an integer n within parentheses gives the number of single unit time inc
291. he value s of the conversion factor is multiplied times each value to be displayed and the resultant product is shown If var is a multidimensional array the set correspondence is maintained between var and the variable displayed The default value for var is one To deactivate the UNITS option execute a SELECT UNITS statement WIDTH width 266 Promula Application Development System User s Manual to change the width of display lines to width an integer The default width is 80 characters per line The width of CHARACTER mode plots can be controlled by using the SELECT WIDTH statement width is a numeric variable or a numeric constant ZERO BLANK DASHES ON to control the display of zero displays produced by PROMULA When ZERO BLANK zero values in displays are shown as blanks When ZERO DASHES zero values in displays are shown as a pair of dashes When ZERO ON zero values in displays are shown as zeros This is the default 3 7 91 SELECT PULLDOWN Purpose Defines and displays a pulldown pick menu for selection Syntax SELECT PULLDOWN option wind menudesc Remarks option is a variable that will pick up the action code of the selection picked The value of option may be used to determine alternative execution paths wind is the identifier of the window that will be used to contain the menu bar for the pulldown menu The color scheme and border style for wind will also be used by any submenus defined in the
292. his chapter focuses on using array files Readers interested in the other files should refer to Chapter 3 of this Manual For the remainder of this chapter the terms database and array file will be used interchangeably Before discussing the actual syntax of PROMULA s data management language we should review PROMULA s variable storage types Here the phrase variable storage type refers to where PROMULA stores each variable s values There are three storage types for PROMULA variables Fixed Fixed variables are accessed from a fixed space in primary memory RAM They are defined with a DEFINE VARIABLE statement The values of fixed variables may be saved in a segment file on disk by the END SEGMENT END PROGRAM and WRITE VALUE segment statements Computations run fastest when they use fixed variables Scratch Scratch variables are accessed from a scratch space in primary memory They are defined with a DEFINE VARIABLE SCRATCH statement Their values can be cleared from memory with a CLEAR statement to make room for other scratch variables The values of scratch variables cannot be saved in a segment file on disk Computations using scratch variables will be slower than using fixed variables because PROMULA must do more internal calculations to access their values Disk Disk variables are stored on disk in an array file They are defined with a DEFINE VARIABLE file statement Disk variables are also referred to as database variables The values
293. iable statement 3 3 Commas and Blanks Commas or blanks play an important role in the syntax of PROMULA statements They are delimiters and are used to separate the different parts of a statement Multiple delimiters are treated as a single delimiter except when they are part of a character string 3 4 Line Length 93 Promula Application Development System User s Manual An input line in PROMULA may contain up to 255 characters Pressing the Enter key enters the line Given the width of most screens or printers keeping each statement no longer than 80 characters will make your programs easier to read and work with 3 5 Line Continuation If a statement is too long to fit on a single line you may continue it on the next line Continuation of a statement may be indicated in one of three ways depending on context 1 If you are entering a character string then continuation is automatic The first character of the next line is concatenated directly behind the last character of the preceding line except that multiple trailing blanks are reduced to a single blank 2 If you are entering an equation then continuation to the next line is indicated by the last non blank character of the current line which must be a comma or an arithmetic relational or logical operator 3 In all other cases continuation to the next line is indicated by entering a comma as the last non blank character of the current line 3 6 Format of PROMULA St
294. iable statement uses the information in the variable s definition to control the appearance of the report In addition your application can use data menus for data entry Data menus make data entry easier and improve the appearance of the application PROMULA s DEFINE MENU statement lets you create data menus simply by typing them into your source code The EDIT menu statement is then used to help the user interactively edit information in the menu To help the user edit several variables at once you may use the EDIT table statement 2 2 5 4 Multi Page Displays and Windowing The typical computer terminal is only large enough to display 24 or 25 lines of 80 characters This can make it difficult to let the user view large arrays or reports on the screen Fortunately PROMULA has several statements which can make this difficult task easier The BROWSE variable statement can be used to let the program user interactively view a multidimensional array variable This statement manages a display similar to the one generated by the EDIT variable statement except it does not let the user change data values If you want to let the user browse more than one variable on the screen at the same time the BROWSE TABLE or BROWSE menu statement can be used The BROWSE FILE statement can be used to let the program user view multi page free form textual reports contained in external files on disk The RUN EDITOR command can be used to load a text file into the PR
295. icable in the definition of var If is an E the values of var will be displayed in exponential notation base 10 and will show seven digits and six decimal places If omitted w and d are the parameters specified in the TYPE specification for var and p is the width specifications of the row descriptors related to the set subscripting the rows of the display sets is a list of the sets classifying the values of var The order of the sets in this list specifies the structure of the display the first set classifies the rows of the display the second set classifies the columns and the third to last set classifies the pages of the display The keyword ORDER is optional if omitted sets must immediately follow the optional format specification title is any text you wish to show as a title for the table The title may include variables and other format characters according to the rules defined in the WRITE text statement dvar is a variable used to control the display of variable var dvar should be indexed by the set that defines the rows of the display PROMULA will display values of var only for those rows corresponding to elements of dvar that contain nonzero values See Example in the section on the BROWSE variable statement option isone ofthe following BY ROW to edit values by row entering a value moves the bounce bar to the right BY COLUMN to edit values by column entering a value moves the bounce bar down BY VALUE to ed
296. ich they correspond Data menus contain a number of data fields to be displayed by the user In the DEFINE MENU statement each data field is denoted by a series of contiguous at signs or tilde signs equal in number to the desired number of digits in the data field The data fields are ordered from left to right and from top to bottom of the menu template 106 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Upon execution the data menu is displayed in the Main Screen The values of the variables are displayed in the places marked by or characters Execution pauses and the user is allowed to view but not modify the values in the menu When the user is ready to continue he she presses a key or clicks the mouse button The use of the BROWSE menu statement is especially helpful if you want to show a data menu in read only mode 3 7 12 BROWSE SET Purpose Produces a full or partial listing of the sets in a program for browsing Syntax BROWSE SET sets Remarks sets isa list of set identifiers If sets is omitted all the program sets are listed in the order in which they were defined otherwise selected sets are listed in the order specified by sets Upon execution PROMULA clears the Main Screen and lists the identifiers codes and descriptors of the specified sets A prompt appears in the Prompt Screen describing how to browse the list Examples Given the folowing definitions DE
297. ies the columns of the data following the third set classifies the two dimensional pages of the data following the fourth set classifies the three dimensional sections of the data following etc The current order and range of the elements of the sets specified in sets controls the assignment of data to variable values fmt is the format specification for the read operation and has the following syntax piw where 241 Promula Application Development System User s Manual p is an integer indicating the starting position of the read i e the column on each data line where the reading begins The backslash means start reading in column p If omitted the reading begins in column 1 w isaninteger indicating the width of the read operation and it means read the next w columns The format specification may be omitted in which case the data may be entered in free form In free form the values of variables may be entered anywhere on an input line provided they are separated by commas or blanks data are the data values associated with var The data values are entered on input lines which can have a maximum width of 255 characters each The input lines and the data values on them must be arranged so that they agree with the internal structure of the variable as defined by the DEFINE VARIABLE statement or by sets and the format specifications of the READ variable statement see examples below The data may be stored in an external
298. iety of PROMULA s arithmetic functions behave DEFINE VARIABLE xvar xvar avar avar bvar bvar cvar cvar drg Factor Converting Degrees to Radians END drg 3 1415 180 DEFINE PROCEDURE functs cvar 6 avar EXP cvar WRITE The Exponential of cvar 30 0 2 46 avar 0 4 cvar LN avar WRITE The Natural Logarithm of avar 30 0 4 46 cvar 0 4 cvar 30 avar SIN cvar drg WRITE The Sine Function of cvar 30 0 2 degrees 46 avar 0 4 cvar ARCSIN avar drg WRITE The ArcSine Function of avar 30 0 2 46 cvar 0 2 degrees avar COS cvar drg WRITE The Cosine Function of cvar 30 0 2 degrees 46 avar 0 4 cvar ARCCOS avar drg WRITE The ArcCosine Function of avar 30 0 4 46 cvar 0 2 degrees evar 45 avar TAN cvar drg WRITE The Tangent Function of cvar 30 0 2 degrees 46 avar 0 4 cvar ARCTAN avar drg WRITE The ArcTangent Function of avar 30 0 4 46 cvar 0 2 degrees cvar 2 avar SQRT cvar WRITE The Square Root of cvar 30 0 2 46 avar 0 4 avar cvar 0 5 WRITE The 1 2 Power of cvar 30 0 2 46 avar 0 4 bvar 3 avar XMIN bvar cvar WRITE The Minimum of bvar 30 0 1 and cvar 0 1 46 avar 0 2 avar XMAX bvar cvar WRITE The Maximum of bvar 30 0 1 and cvar 0 1 46 avar 0 2 END PROCEDURE functs The output of pro
299. ight format types REAL contains real numbers numbers with decimal digits in the ranges 3 37E 38 8 43E 37 0 8 43E 37 3 37E 38 Reals outside these ranges are not valid and cause underflows or overflows in calculations which result in errors INTEGER contains integer numbers whole numbers in the range 231 3 231 3 about 2 1 billion Integers outside this range cause overflows and cannot be processed by the system STRING contains character values i e strings of characters CODE contains codes Codes are short character strings that are used for set selections For example JAN and FEB may be used to select the months of January and February 84 Promula Application Development System User s Manual MONEY contains money values dollars and cents This type is useful for accounting arithmetic where one cent accuracy is important Money variables maintain ten significant digits of accuracy The range of MONEY type variables is 2 31 3 42 3 3 about 2 1 billion cents or 21 million dollars DATE contains date values Dates are values of the form mm dd yy where mm is a month number dd is a day number and yy is a year number Internally the date value is stored as a numeric quantity equal to yymmdd Alternative date formats e g dd mm yy or mm dd yyyy are available by executing a SELECT DATE statement UPPERCASE contains string values that are automatically converted to uppercase when they are input fr
300. ight hand section of the keyboard allow you to move the cursor to the desired value The PgUp and PgDn keys are used to move up and down the pages of the display Home moves the cursor to the top of the display which is the first value on the screen End press the End key to exit editing mode or to exit browsing mode Examples 1 Given the following definitions 115 Promula Application Development System User s Manual DEFINE VARIABLE a row col page A 3 Dimensional Array ND VARIABLE 1 the statement BROWSE a clears the screen and produces the following display A 3 Dimensional Array PAGE 1 COL 1 COL 2 End Exit Fn Shift Fn PgUp PgDn Home Arrows Browse Pressing the F3 key browses up the page or third dimension as shown in the screen below 116 Promula Application Development System User s Manual A 3 Dimensional Array PAGE 1 COL 1 COL 2 End Exit Fn Shift Fn PgUp PgDn Home Arrows Browse Pressing the Shift and F3 keys simultaneously browses down the third dimension as shown in the screen below A 3 Dimensional Array PAGE 1 COL 1 COL 2 ROW 1 ROW 2 ROW 3 End Exit Shift Fn PgUp PgDn Home Arrows Browse NOTE Pressing the F1 and F2 keys do not have any effect in this example since all elements of both the row and column dimensions of the array fit within the screen 2 The following dialog illust
301. ign to the selected graphics mode and press Enter to select it Select a configuration for HIGH graphics mode or press End Identifier Description CGA medium resolution 3 color graphics CGA high resolution black amp white graphics EGA 16 color high resolution graphics VGA 16 color high resolution graphics IBM Epson printer high resolution landscape IBM Epson printer high resolution portrait IBM Epson printer medium resolution landscape IBM Epson printer medium resolution portrait amp WwW e IBM Epson printer CGA high resolution screen dump IBM Epson printer CGA medium resolution screen dump HP LazerJet II printer high resolution landscape HP LazerJet II printer medium resolution landscape HP LazerJet II printer high resolution portrait HP LazerJet II printer medium resolution portrait VT 330 SIXEL graphics VT 240 REGIS graphics anu Ne oc IBM Epson printer VGA resolution screen dump End Exit Arrows PgUp PgDn Home Move Enter Select After making these two selections your new graphics configuration will be written permanently in the PROMULA configuration file PROMULA PAK and you will be returned to the graphics configuration program main menu where you may exit the program and use PROMULA 323 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 5 1 2 Managing Custom Graphics Configurations You can use the graphics configuration program to create n
302. ile on disk containing segment MAIN 3 7 74 READ set Purpose Reads in labels for a set Syntax READ set opt data 237 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Remarks set is the set identifier data are the data lines for the read One data line is needed for each active element in set opt defines what types of labels are to be read The default value for opt 15 ROW 1 20 opt can be one or more of the following ROW ic 1 to specify that set row descriptors sometimes called stubs are to be read ic is a positive integer defining the initial column on each data line where the stub entry begins The default is ic 1 1 isa positive integer 1c gt or ic defining the last column on each data line where the stub entry ends The default is 1 15 Only one stub per data line is permitted Note that if set was defined with a ROW option the total width of the field may not exceed the width defined in that option COLUMNI ic 1c nc to specify that set column descriptors sometimes called spanners are to be read ic is a positive integer defining the initial column on each data line where the spanner entry begins The default is ic 1 lc isa positive integer 1c gt ic defining the last column on each data line where the spanner entry ends The default is 1 15 nc is a positive integer defining the number of columns or characters including blanks in each section of the spann
303. imem Migration Rate Trend VALUE 1 1 1 1 POPT Total Population BTHS Births per Year DTHS Deaths per Year GNTS Net Migrants per Year POPYR year Total Population BTHYR year Births DTHYR year Deaths GTYR year Net Migrants tj ND VARIABLE DEFINE LOOKUP DRG 3 X 1990 1995 2005 Y 1 0 8 0 7 ND LOOKUP tj DEFINE TABLE tab year FORMAT 20 10 BODY POPYR BTHYR DIHYR MGTYR END REPORT DEFINE PROCEDURE dynaml WRITE CENTER Initial Section Time TIME POPT 100000 RATE BRTYR BRTV MRTYR MRTV WRITE CENTER Rate Section Time TIME DRGV DRG TIME BTHS POPT BR BRTV MGNTS POPT MR MRTV DTHS POPT DR DRGV WRITE POP WRITE BTHS WRITE MGNTS WRITE DTHS WRITE BRTV 4 WRITE MRTV 4 WRITE DRGV 4 EVEL POPYR POPT BTHYR BTHS DTHYR DTHS MGTYR MGNTS WRITE CENTER Level Section Time TIME POPT POPT D BTHS DT MGNTS DT DTHS WRITE POP END PROCEDURE 1 Given the definitions above the statements TIME 1 1990 1993 SIZE 5 0 dynaml SELECT year 1 4 tab TITLE Results for Dynamic Simulation DT 1 Year generate the following report as the population simulation procedure DYNAM1 moves through time
304. imension the F2 key browses up the 2nd dimension and so forth Shift Fn press simultaneously the Shift and Fn keys to browse down the nth dimension of the array The Shift F1 key browses down the 1st dimension the Shift F2 key browses down the 2nd dimension etc Browsing The four movement arrows at the right hand section of the keyboard allow you to move keys the cursor to the desired value The PgUp and PgDn keys are used to move up and down the pages of the display Home moves the cursor to the top of the display which is the first value on the screen End press the End key to exit editing mode or to exit browsing mode Examples 109 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The following program demonstrates the BROWSE TABLE statement DEFINE SET row 5 col 10 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE a row col A Data Set b row col B data set tot col The Total of A and B END VARIABLE DEFINE PROCEDURE brstab SELECT WIDTH 70 BROWSE TABLE col ITLE The Table Title FORMAT 20 10 BODY tot 0 1 The A Values a 0 2 The B Values b END PROCEDURE brstab 1 2 tot SUM r a r c b r c Executing procedure brstab produces the display below The Table Title COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 COL 5 The Total of A and B 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 The A Values End Exit Fn Shift Fn
305. in minx x y z WRITE x x y y MIN x y z END PROCEDURE cmin x 3 4 cmin x 3 y 4 MIN x y 3 153 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Procedure cmin calls into execution procedure minx The calling statement is minx x y z From this you can see that variable x corresponds to parameter a variable y corresponds to parameter b and variable z corresponds to parameter c Procedure stats takes as its argument a two dimensional array of values It displays the values of each column of the array in ascending order and computes and displays the number of values the total and the mean of each column DEFINE SET pnt 5 col 2 END SET EF INE VARIABL D E xval pnt col TYPE REAL 10 2 X VALUES END VARIABLE DEFINE PROCEDURE stats DEFINE PARAMETER vec pnt col Input Table n Number of Values tot Total of Input Vector ave Average of Input Vector END PARAMETER DO col SORT pnt USING vec n col s WRITE CENTER INPUT VECTOR n 2 y DO pnt WRITE CENTER vec 6 2 SELECT pnt tot SUM i vec i n pits ave tot n WRITE CENTER n 5 TOTAL tot 10 2 MEAN ave 10 3 END col END PROCEDURE stats READ xval col pnt 31 11 21 91 41 32 42 52 12 12 Given
306. indexed or subscripted by that set Syntax SELECT TYPE set vec SELECT TYPE set Remarks set is the identifier of the set whose elements are related to the values of the vector vec vec is the identifier of the vector whose values are related to the elements of the set vec is usually a STRING TYPE variable 15 the type of relation between set and vec and may be one of the following ROW to define row descriptors for the set COLUMN to define column descriptors for the set KEY to define codes for the set this type of relation will cause vec to serve as both column and row descriptors for set and will allow you to make selections from set using the values of a CODE or STRING type variable See the example program in the discussion of the ASK ELSE section in this chapter for an illustration of this feature TIME to define time values for the set This type of relation is used in dynamic simulations modeling A relation is not valid unless vec is a vector variable indexed by set 269 Promula Application Development System User s Manual To restore the set relation to that specified in a previous DEFINE RELATION statement use the SELECT type set statement Examples The effect of the SELECT RELATION statement is demonstrated by the following program DEFINE SET year 2 2 Years acnt 3 Profit and
307. ing keys Pressing the arrow keys or the PgUp and PgDn keys moves a highlight bar that highlights the current variable Enter key Pressing the Enter key selects the current variable clears the screen and allows execution to continue End key Pressing the End key allows the user to exit without making a selection See also the ASK ELSE statement and the INDIRECT function 257 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Examples The following example demonstrates the SELECT indirect statement DEFINE VARIABLE indir xval THE VALUE OF X VALUE 10 yval THE VALUE OF Y VALUE 20 zval THE VALUE OF Z VALUE 30 END VARIABLE DEFINE PROCEDURE selvar SELECT indir xval yval zval DO IF END WRITE Goodbye BREAK selvar END IF WRITE indir L indir CLEAR 1 selvar END PROCEDURE selvar Execution of procedure selvar and selection of variable yva1 produces the following displays Description THE VALUE OF X THE VALUE OF Y THE VALUE OF Z End Exit Arrows PgUp PgDn Home Move Enter Select THE VALUE OF Y 20 3 7 89 SELECT menu Purpose Displays a pick menu for making a selection 258 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Syntax SELECT menu option Remarks menu is the identifier of a pick menu option is a variable th
308. ing variable or a quoted string containing the file specification that you wish to search for wild card characters are allowed filespec fname is the name of the string variable that will be assigned each file name that matches the file specification statement is any executable statement including other DO statements except definitions The statements from DO DIRECTORY statement is an example of a DO loop Examples The following example demonstrates the DO DIRECTORY statement Creat DEFIN 1 1 file2 file3 ND t FIL files on disk nr EN filel EN file2 EN file3 fname The DO DIRECTORY loop below finds all files that match the specification 11 passes each one to the string variable VARIABLE ND VARIABLI filel fil S US file2 fil 56 US zZ zx E pd tz tiles fad 5 US filel file2 EAR file3 File Name TYP HH fname and writes the value of fname z E STRING 15 DO DIRECTORY fil INTO fname WRITE fname END DO DIRECTORY The output of the loop above was File Name FILE1 FIL File Name FILE2 FIL File Name FILE3 FIL 186 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 3 7 42 DO file Purpose Accesses sequentially all the records of a text file or a random file Syntax DO file st
309. ion on disk One is by writing fixed format to a disk file using the WRITE file statement The other is by codirecting screen output to a disk file using the SELECT OUTPUT statement Using the WRITE file statement has the advantage that what is sent to the output file is not simultaneously displayed on the screen The disadvantage is that the WRITE file statement cannot be used with PROMULA s automatic report generation statements like WRITE variable and more explicit instructions are required to format the output For example in order to write the values of the expns array to a text file with the WRITE file statement the following code would be required DEFINE FILE tf TYPE TEXT A Text File END FILE OPEN tf expns dat STATUS NEW O mons WRITE tf exps expns mons expns END mons WRITE tf aincom aincom abalns CLEAR tf Jg The contents of file expns dat after execution of the above code is displayed below 409 00 286 44 115 39 97 18 45 00 66 71 409 00 269 90 160 10 81 95 45 00 55 94 409 00 291 50 172 05 77 12 45 00 55 24 409 00 269 86 111 38 95 15 45 00 67 92 409 00 295 66 89 88 96 78 45 00 50 37 409 00 295 24 146 84 94 36 45 00 50 98 409 00 260 47 142 10 DS dT 45 00 52 52 409 00 255 69 141 09 91 46 45 00 56 32 409 00 289 86 87 59 92 76 45 00 65 28 409 00 287 99 135 75 73 38 45 00 64 77 409 00 269 20 96 19 95 47 45 00 61 09 409 00 273 29 145 37
310. it values by single value bounce bar does not move automatically BY VALUE is the default Upon execution the EDIT variable statement clears the Main Screen displays the first page of the array and issues the following message at the bottom of the display End Exit Fn Shift Fn PgUp PgDn Home Arrows Select Enter Edit 212 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The highlighted portions of the message represent the following options Fn press the Fn function key to browse up the nth dimension of the array where n varies from 1 to 10 Shift Fn press simultaneously the Shift and Fn keys to browse down the nth dimension of the array where n varies from to 10 The F1 key browses up the 1st dimension the F2 key browses up the 2nd dimension and so forth The Shift F1 key browses down the 1st dimension the Shift F2 key browses down the 2nd dimension etc Arrows The four movement arrows at the right hand section of the keyboard allow you to move the cursor to the PgUp desired value The Page Up and Page Down keys may be used to move up and down the pages of the display PgDn Home moves the cursor to the top of the display which is the first value on the first page Enter press the Enter key to initiate editing mode This causes the following 1 highlights the first value to be edited with a block cursor 2 issues the following message at the left hand corner of the Prompt Screen Enter value
311. ives you the means to execute a batch file of statements from command mode Syntax RUN COMMAND file Remarks file isaquoted string or a string variable that contains the name of a text file containing PROMULA statements Upon execution PROMULA will compile the code contained in file If the code is well formed and compatible with the current application i e no redefinitions the new executable code will become resident with the current application Using this statement is like escaping the current application and using PROMULA in command mode The main differences are 1 PROMULA reads the statements from a text file instead of from the keyboard and 2 statements are executed in batch mode If you want to add any interactive input or output statements to the running application you should put them in a procedure in a file then process the file using the RUN COMMAND statement The procedure may then be executed by escaping from your application getting into command mode F10 from the Main Menu and entering the procedure name WARNING If there is a DEFINE PROGRAM statement in file you will clear the current application from memory and replace it with the code in ile The last statement in ile should be a STOP This will get you out of batch compilation mode and return control to the calling program Examples The source code of PRM2 PRM is shown below It defines two variables c and The STOP statement returns control
312. ke the appropriate conversions for you For example it is possible to write expressions using variables of type STRING or DATE with variables of the numeric types REAL INTEGER and MONEY If a numeric variable is on the left hand side of an expression any string type variables on the right hand side of the expression containing all numerals will be converted to their numeric values when the result is computed Similarly if a string variable is on the left hand side of an expression the results of numeric expressions on the right hand side are computed then converted to their numeral string values before they are passed to the left hand side DEFINE SET pnt 4 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE strl pnt YPE STRING 20 String Result numl1 pnt YPE REAL 10 3 1st Number num2 pnt YPE REAL 10 3 2nd Number END VARIABLE numl i i 2 num2 i i 3 strl i num1 3 0 i PLUS num2 3 0 i numl 1 2 1 Given the definitions and assignments made above the statement WRITE str1 40 produces the output below String Result PNT 1 2 PLUS 3 5 000 PNT 2 4 PLUS 6 10 00 PNT 3 6 PLUS 9 15 00 PNT 4 8 PLUS 12 20 00 3 1 2 Expression Arithmetic Definition A numeric expression involving at least one arithmetic operator The operands of arithmetic expressions may be variables constants functions and other expressi
313. l display the field descriptions Pulldown menus are displayed in a dynamic system of windows that drop down from a user defined menu bar window The menu bar window the values of the selection field labels and the action codes returned by menu selections are all defined by the parameters of the SELECT PULLDOWN statement when it is executed The field labels and action codes of the SELECT PULLDOWN statement may be variables or constants Pulldown menu selections may only be made by highlighting the desired selection field and pressing enter or by pointing and clicking with a mouse 74 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 3 1 11 2 Data Menus Data menus contain a number of fields to be displayed and or edited by the user Each field in the menu is denoted by a series of contiguous at signs or contiguous tilde characters The number of field characters should be equal to the desired number of characters in the data value that will be displayed in the field The fields are ordered from left to right and from top to bottom of the menu template Fields defined with at signs will be editable and are referred to as data fields fields defined with tilde characters will not be editable and are referred to as display only fields To execute a data menu enter the following statement EDIT menu vars where menu is the name of the data menu and vars is a list of variables that correspond to the fields of the menu The v
314. l empcostmsrvcetdepttaxes SELEC INES 60 ZERO DASHES HEADING OFF COMMA ON MINUS PARENTHESES ia S S ELEC oINES 25 ZERO ON HEADING ON COMMA OFF MINUS LEADING END PROCEDURE wrrep The report produced by running procedure wrrep is shown below ACME Corporation Ten Year Financial Summary 173 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Million Dollars 1978 82 1983 87 1978 87 Net Sales 18 334 7 28 795 2 47 129 9 Costs and Expenses Employment Costs 7 864 1 12 208 4 20 072 5 aterials and Service Tt 140 1 13 476 9 21 217 20 Depreciation 902 1 1 483 2 385 2 Income Taxes 298 6 SILT 670 3 16 804 9 27 540 1 44 345 0 Operating Income 1 529 8 Tyo gel 2 784 9 Other Income Expense Interest Dividends and Other Income 1995419 276 4 472 3 Interest and Other Debt Charges 199 0 389 0 588 0 Estimated Plant Closedown Costs 650 0 650 0 Other Expenses x 51 0 51 0 Income Loss Before Income Taxes 1 526 7 441 5 1 968 2 Income Taxes 630 8 86 2 544 6 Net Income Loss 895 9 B27 7 1 4236 See the WRITE table BROWSE table and EDIT table statements for more details on the use of multi variable reports 3 7 37 DEFINE VARIABLE Purpose Defines a local variable Syntax DEFINE VARIABLE SCRATCH file var sets des
315. lement codes and element descriptors for a set Syntax WRITE set Remarks set is the identifier of the set being shown Examples DEFINE SET month 12 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE mc month Month Codes TYPE STRING 3 END VARIABLE DEFINE RELATION ROW month mc END RELATION READ mc JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC Given the above definitions the statement WRITE month lists the members or elements or entries of the set month as shown below Identifier Description 1 JAN 2 FEB 3 MAR 4 APR 5 MAY 287 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 6 JUN 7 JUL 8 AUG 9 SEP 10 OCT 11 NOV 12 DEC 3 7 107 WRITE TABLE Purpose Writes a table of several variables on an output device Syntax WRITE TABLE sets TITLE title FORMAT rw cw BODY text1 varl fmt1 text2 var2 fmt2 al Remarks sets is a list of the identifiers of the sets classifying columns and pages of the variables in the table The first set will classify the columns of the table the other sets if any will classify the pages of the table Sets dimensioning table variables which are missing from the list will classify the rows of the table The sets list sets must contain at least one set or the number 1 for writing a group of scalar variables and must be missing those set i
316. les The syntax for such direct reference of disk variables is file var where file is the array file containing the variable var that you wish to access Disk variables may also be accessed directly off an array database by using the COPY file IMAGE command 3 1 24 Window Basic PROMULA lets you split the screen into two sections The upper section is called the Action window it is used for interactive displays such as data editing and selection menus and lists the lower section is called the Comment window it is normally used for providing comments about what is happening in the Action window The default length of the Action window is 25 lines the default length of the Comment window is 0 lines To set the length of the Comment window use a SELECT COMMENT n statement where n is the number of lines desired in the Comment window 87 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Windows provide the means for writing tutorial programs In such programs you show the execution of something in the Action window and provide comments about it in the Comment window The statements of Basic Windowing are SELECT COMMENT n starts windowing mode sets the length of the Comment window to n lines where n is an integer in the range 1 to 22 and splits the screen by drawing a dividing line that is n spaces from the bottom SELECT COMMENT 0 gets you out of Basic windowing mode and closes the Comment window WRITE COM
317. les in a two dimensional 12 x 3 array The rows of this array are classified by the months of the year the columns of the array are classified by the three output categories Income Expenses and Balance The statements required to define this array are shown below DEFINE SET mons 12 Months colm 03 Report table Columns END SET DEFINE VARIABLE 37 Promula Application Development System User s Manual rtabl mons colm YPE REAL 15 2 Summary Table monsn mons YPE STRING 4 Month Names END VARIABLE READ colm KEY 1 10 10 INCOME EXPENSES BALANCE READ monsn 4 JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC SELECT KEY mons monsn The DEFINE SET and DEFINE VARIABLE statements above define a two dimensional variable called rtabl1 and a variable for the month labels called monsn A READ set statement is used to assign labels to the elements of set colm A READ variable statement is used to read in labels for the elements of set mons Finally a SELECT RELATION statement relates the month labels to the set mons After computing the values of the output variables they can be passed to the variable rt ab1 using the following equations rtabl m 1 incom m rtabl m 2 expnm m rtabl m 3 bains m The three equations above initialize all 36 values of variable rtab1 the first column picks up the values
318. lication from memory before compiling file In addition RUN can be executed from inside a procedure RUN COMPILER cannot The RUN SOURCE file statement can be used for compiling PROMULA source codes only It behaves like the RUN statement in this role except that RUN SOURCE displays the compilation listing on the screen The RUN COMMAND file statement can only be used for compiling PROMULA source codes RUN COMMAND behaves like the RUN statement except that it does not suspend execution of the current application or hide its information The statements in file may use but not redefine structures defined in the current application and any structures defined in file remain resident with your application after its compilation is complete and control is returned to the current application Examples The statement RUN program prm will compile the PROMULA program stored in the source file program prm The compilation listing will not be shown on the screen but PROMULA will pause on errors To have more control over the compilation of PROMULA source codes from the command line use the RUN COMPILER statement 3 7 79 RUN COMMAND Purpose 246 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Compiles a PROMULA source code from within a running application This allows you to temporarily perform equations read in data and define procedures variables and other PROMULA structures while running a PROMULA application The RUN COMMAND g
319. line plot and is described above in Syntax 1 btype specifies the type of bar plot and is described above in Syntax 2 set V isa special notation for the vector of values associated with the time series set set tvar isthe identifier of a variable subscripted by a time series set Syntax 4 PLOT type or btype func option Remarks Syntax 4 produces plotted displays of PROMULA functions Both line and bar plots can be specified by Syntax 4 In line plots the X values of the function will be the x coordinates of the points being plotted and the Y values of the function will be the y coordinates In bar plots the X and Y values will be plotted on the same graph type specifies the type of line plot and is described above with Syntax 1 btype specifies the type of bar plot and is described above with Syntax 2 func isthe identifier of a function defined by the DEFINE FUNCTION or DEFINE LOOKUP statement Syntax 5 PLOT PIECHART vary TITLE text Remarks Syntax 5 produces pie charts vary isthe identifier of the array variable whose values define the size of the sectors of the pie chart Up to nine sectors may be displayed on a given pie chart The row descriptors of the set that subscripts vary will appear in a legend for the chart the percent of the pie for each sector will also be computed and displayed in the legend 226 Promula Application Development System User s Manual NOTE Printing pie charts on some hi
320. llowing ROW specifies the variable whose values will serve as the primary descriptor for a set s elements The primary descriptor values are used to label rows of values classified by the set in WRITE BROWSE and EDIT statements They are also used in bar plots page headings and displays of the set itself COLUMN specifies the variable whose values will serve as the column descriptor for a set s elements The column descriptor values are used to label columns of values classified by the set in WRITE BROWSE and EDIT statements KEY specifies the variable whose values will serve as the codes for a set s elements If no ROW relation for the set is specified the code values also referred to as keys are used as the primary descriptors for the set If no COLUMN relation for the set is specified the code values are used as column descriptors In addition set codes may function as set element identifiers in displays of the set and in coded set selections TIME specifies the variable whose values will serve as the time values for a set s elements If no ROW relation for the set is specified the time values also referred to as keys are used as the primary descriptors for the set If no COLUMN relation for the set is specified the time values are used as column descriptors In addition time values may function as set element identifiers in displays of the set and in coded set selections If a set has a TIME relation it becomes a Time Series Set
321. lmt Lower Limit value mv mn Monthly values ND VARIABLE E mv 1 i 10 DEFINE PROCEDURE null WRITE Enter the Lower Limit READ lmt SELECT mn IF mv GT lmt DO IF END There are no months with value greater than lmt WRITE Try again null END IF END WRITE mv 40 191 Promula Application Development System User s Manual END PROCEDURE null A dialog with procedure nu11 is shown below null Enter the Lower Limit 200 There are no months with value greater than 200 ry again Enter the Lower Limit 100 Monthly values MN 11 110 MN 12 120 3 7 45 DO IF ERROR Purpose Executes a group of statements if a specific error is generated by the previous statement Syntax DO IF ERROR n statement END Remarks n is the number of the error The error messages and their numbers are listed in Chapter 6 of this manual statement is any executable statement no definitions including another DO statement If the specified error occurs during execution of the statement immediately preceding the DO IF ERROR statement PROMULA will execute the group of executable statements between the DO IF ERROR and the END then re execute the statement immediately preceding the DO IF ERROR statement Example Procedure chkval uses the DO IF ERROR statement to detect an arithme
322. lso used with most keystrokes of the PROMULA Text Editor The Backspace Del and Ins keys are used in line editing The Ins and Del keys are also used in tagging and untagging elements of lists during execution of the SELECT SET statement The Return or Enter key is the end of record line feed signal and completes each PROMULA statement or data record The Arrow keys Home PgUp and PgDn keys are used to move through selection lists data menus array variable displays and for file browsing The End key is used to end most interactive processes such as variable browsing and editing menu editing selection lists etc See the description of Line Editing and the interactive PROMULA statements for more information on PROMULA s keyboard conventions PROMULA displays a prompt describing the relevant key actions whenever an interactive statement is executed 2 1 4 1 Esc Escape to the PROMULA Main Menu The Esc key enables you to suspend a PROMULA application and return to the PROMULA Main Menu The information in your working space at the point of interruption is still available to you and you may access it in command mode by selecting Main Menu option 10 While the program is suspended you may browse the PROMULA tutorial show intermediate results perform various debugging operations or even add new procedures and variables to the interrupted application by typing them in or by using the RUN COMMAND statement to read them from a file
323. m User s Manual PROMULA what to do A PROMULA instruction is called a statement or a command END TOPIC Lesson 2 In this lesson we discuss the DEFINE VARIABLE statement which is used to define the variables in your program END END DIALOG 3 7 24 1 Executing the BROWSE DIALOG Statement The statement BROWSE DIALOG b dialog tut produces the following display PROMULA Primer The primer is a series of topics Each topic contains text that you can browse Introduction Lesson 1 Lesson 2 End Exit Arrows Home Select Enter Browse In this menu the topic Introduction is highlighted first Use the movement keys to select a topic and press the Enter key to pick a topic for browsing If you select the Lesson 2 topic the screen below is displayed 135 Promula Application Development System User s Manual In this lesson we discuss the DEFINE VARIABLE statement which is used to define the variables in your program Press any key to continue 3 7 24 2 Executing the BROWSE TOPIC Statement The BROWSE TOPIC statement displays a specific topic from a dialog file To display the first topic in the dialog file use the following statement BROWSE TOPIC b dialog tut 1 This produces the following display 136 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The primer is a series of lessons The lessons are designed to show you how to write PROMULA programs Though
324. m User s Manual values need only be separated by blanks or commas or be on separate lines and there must be enough values to fill all active cells of the variable For example the 12 values of the monthly bonus variable defined in Figure 2 8 could be loaded with the values 100 200 300 1200 using any of the following READ variable statements READ bonus V5 READ bonus JAN 100 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 FEB 200 MAR 300 800 900 1000 1100 1200 APR 400 MAY 500 READ bonus JU 600 100 200 300 JUL 700 400 500 600 AUG 800 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 SEP 900 OCT 1000 READ bonus NOV 1100 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 DEC 1200 The READ variable statement may also be used for scalars For example the worker s Hourly Wage Rate hr variable wager and the fraction of Pay Lost to Taxes variable taxes could be read in with the following two statements READ wager 10 0 READ taxes 0 30 Or both scalar variables could be read in with a single statement READ wager taxes 10 0 0 30 Reading in a multidimensional array like variable expns is a little trickier As mentioned in the section on defining variables PROMULA uses the order of sets in an array variable s definition to control how its data values are read in by a READ variable statement The first set is assumed to index the rows of data values The second set is assumed to index the columns of data values Th
325. mation in the database Filex which is defined in the MAIN segment gt The storage allocation for the segments is summarized below Segment Begins at Value Definition MAIN Segl 5 911 Seg2 Seg3 Figure 4 4 Storage Allocation Statistics for SEGMENT XEQ Notice that the level n segments begin where their parent level n 1 segments end The segment MAIN starts with the DEFINE PROGRAM statement and ends with the END PROGRAM statement Each of the other segments starts with a DEFINE SEGMENT statement and ends with an END SEGMENT statement Variable var is a disk variable its values are stored on the array file Filex and thus do not take up any RAM space This saves you 200 Kilobytes of working space without compromising your ability to access the values of var in your program The other four variables vari var11 var2 and var3 occupy fixed spaces in your working space and are called fixed variables Each of these variables requires 20 Kilobytes of RAM and is available to you only if you are working in the program segment where the variable is defined For example vari is available in segments Seg1 and Seg11 var11 is available only in Seg11 var2 is available only in Seg2 and var3 is available only in Seg3 If all four fixed variables were in RAM simultaneously they would require 80 Kilobytes of memory Separately however they each require 20 Kilobytes only for a maximum requirement of 40
326. means that the rows of the variable are the expense category dimension They are a set of six elements the expense categories rent food car service utilities car insurance and phone The vector s values would be difficult to interpret if the vector and its rows were not well defined Finally consider the table of values below Monthly Expenses by Category RENT FOOD CAR SERVICE UTILITIES CAR INS PHONE JAN 409 00 286 64 143 71 86 87 45 00 57 30 FEB 409 00 276 76 166 28 84 78 45 00 50 21 MAR 409 00 280 81 134 35 96 84 45 00 65 53 APR 409 00 294 05 99 55 98 06 45 00 61 30 MAY 409 00 286 98 88 13 86 77 45 00 58 03 JU 409 00 275 43 152 85 98 06 45 00 56 45 JUL 409 00 269 81 103 88 87 47 45 00 56 45 AUG 409 00 289 93 127 67 72 28 45 00 50 61 SEP 409 00 261 35 171 10 76 47 45 00 55 64 OCT 409 00 258 71 127 52 88 28 45 00 58 33 409 00 250 12 105 25 91 41 45 00 69 28 DE 409 00 272 28 93 81 93 93 45 00 50 67 Figure 2 7 A Two dimensional Array Variable The 72 values above could also be contained in a single PROMULA variable Variables with this row by column structure are sometimes referred to as two dimensional arrays You may be familiar with the two dimensional worksheets that most spread sheet and financial modeling programs manipulate The array values above are classified by month and expense category The rows of the variable are the month dimension they are a set of 12 el
327. men e PLE CISION cet ret te rera ra ples eia Mesa DE Enea 75 EE EE IS V PAPAMELER RR mE 76 OP N AAA 111 EARE EE E AE Em CE 76 PLO GUAM acces ER ERRARE E EAE 76 UTEM NITITUR EE 77 BS I7 ac re e e E E RE HE RH ERE E PORE 78 SS MEA ie onde ee Lorem te eie ec teet eti 78 32 DS LALEMENE eee tete e cem es E ee RE E cere EP EO E EGRE eti 81 SELMA EC ETE 82 31 27 IDEE 83 3 4 22 Time P ramelets cu 83 SINAI PEE 64 3 1 24 Window edad ee Eee eee nce cue x eH eee SREE 87 3 4 25 Window Advanced E R a 90 3 2 STATEMENT FORMAT AA EET R A O IE A REA AE ORS EERE weedeat ee 93 3 3 COMMAS AND BLANKS E eR A E A Ere Ee I Pepe Ue E 93 3 4 LINE LENGTH iere e NGHE D HH RH RR I eR POE 93 3 5 EINE CONTINUATION 4522 erret erroe eee PER ERE ET RUE MIR RE reU RETE ESSET ORS Era eee Prec Ee Ee ESSE 94 3 6 FORMAT OF PROMULA STATEMENT DESCRIPTIONG cscsescssccececsesssaecceececsessasscecccecseseaeaececcesensasaeceesesesennsaeeeeeeeeees 94 3 7 THE PROMULA STATEMENTS erre rented e rra HERE eer ere aee 95 3 4 1 ASK CONTINUE Eua eite uec T ERE 95 3 422 AS KXCEDSE eee e te ed e
328. ment textil is any text that you wish to use as a subtitle for the values of var1 This text may not contain variables 171 Promula Application Development System User s Manual varl is the identifier of the first variable in the table fmt1 is the desired format for the values of var1 Usually this is used to specify the number of decimal digits for varl text2 is any text that you wish to use as a subtitle for the values of var2 This text may not contain variables var2 is the identifier of the second variable in the table fmt 2 is the desired format for the values of var2 rw is the width in characters for row descriptors cw is the width in characters for table columns A table definition includes a structure specification in terms of sets a body and an optional title and format The body of the table contains the names of the variables whose values will be displayed as the body of the table You may include as many variables as you wish in the body of a table The format specifies the width of the row descriptors and columns of the table Typically the values of the variables in a table are classified by a common set which will classify the columns of the table To define a table of scalars let sets equal 1 To display a table use the table s identifier as a program statement By default tables defined by the DEFINE TABLE statement are written to the output device screen or printer when they are called i e th
329. ment BROWSE VARIABLE produces the following display 112 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Description The A Value The B Value The C Value Press any key to continue 3 7 18 BROWSE variable Purpose Displays a multidimensional variable on the screen and lets you browse its values by page Syntax BROWSE var fmt ORDER sets TITLE title DISPLAY dvar option TRANSPOSE Remarks var is the identifier of the variable you wish to browse fmt is a format specification indicating the width of row descriptors the width of the columns displayed and the number of decimals in real values as follows where p is an integer specifying the width in characters for row descriptors The default width is the width specifications of the row descriptors related to the set subscripting the rows of the display w is an integer specifying the width in characters for each column of values The default is the width specification in the definition of var A negative width parameter left justifies the values of var in each column 113 Promula Application Development System User s Manual d is an integer specifying the number of decimals to display for real numeric values The default is the decimal specification if applicable in the definition of var If d is an E the values of var will be displayed in exponential notation base 10 and will show seven digits and six decimal pl
330. ment are satisfied if a user response matches one of the allowed responses specified either by the ASK statement or by one of the ELSE statements included in the ASK A user response is checked against the responses of the ASK statement sequentially from top to bottom When a match occurs program execution proceeds to the statements following the matched response until the next ELSE or END statement whichever comes first The SET set option allows the user to make set selections Appropriate user responses are set sequence numbers set codes or scalar variables with values in the set range The SELECT SET SELECT ENTRY and SELECT VARIABLE statements provide alternative means of helping the user make a set selection The VARIABLE indir option allows the user to select a program variable for input output purposes by entering the variable identifier The SELECT variable statement and the INDIRECT function are also useful tools for helping the user select a variable and working with interactive variable selections A null ELSE statement i e one with a blank response is executed only if all the other preceding ELSE statements fail For this reason the null ELSE statement is usually the last one NOTE The ASK statement is not case sensitive 96 Promula Application Development System User s Manual ASK statements may be nested to any depth ASK statements are allowed only inside procedures Examples 1 The following is a procedur
331. ments can be saved and loaded for later use Segment files contain not only the executable code of a program but also the values associated with the variables of the program By breaking a program into segments you partition both the code space and the data value space for the variables in the code thus extending both The OPEN SEGMENT statement opens a segment file on disk The DEFINE PROGRAM and DEFINE SEGMENT statements mark the beginning of a program segment The READ SEGMENT statement reads the information in a segment file from disk The END PROGRAM and END SEGMENT statements write a segment file to disk The READ VALUE and WRITE VALUE statements allow you to retrieve and update the variable values in a program segment without explicitly accessing the variables themselves 3 1 9 3 Dialog Files Dialog files are on line help files that can be accessed in a menu driven or random manner A dialog file is defined as a collection of topics Each dialog topic definition consists of 70 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 1 A short title up to 25 characters 2 The topic text which can have as many characters as you wish Upon execution a dialog file will display its contents to the user in a menu driven conversational format hence its name Dialog files provide a powerful method of generating on line conversational help systems for your applications They provide a menu driven framework for tutorials
332. monochrome and color display monitors as well as a variety of printers and plotters It is even possible to capture plotted displays on disk High resolution color graphics are available for EGA and VGA monitors 1 3 9 Command Mode In command or direct mode PROMULA accepts a statement converts it to executable instructions which are executed by the computer then proceeds to the next statement You can interrupt a program dialogue perform local operations in command mode and return to the same place you left the program Not only is this a very useful debugging feature but it also adds flexibility to your applications and greatly increases the accessibility of the data and results You can use PROMULA to generate reports and graphics or do calculations with the data of your application without having to alter and recompile the program code Promula Application Development System User s Manual 1 3 10 Compilation Mode In indirect or compilation mode PROMULA compiles a group of statements as a procedure or a program that can be run later A procedure can be run by other procedures including itself 1 3 11 Conversational Mode You can interact with a PROMULA program either in command mode or by responding to conversational prompts and menus Conversational prompts and menus help you make it easy for others to use your program 1 3 12 Multidimensional Data Structures Unlike the two dimensional view of spreadsheets PROMULA supports mul
333. mployment by Industry 1990 1991 1992 1993 TRANSPORTATION 1 2 3 4 AGRICULTURE 2 4 6 8 INFORMATION 3 6 9 12 BANKING 4 8 12 16 3 7 24 DEFINE DIALOG Purpose Defines a dialog file for later use as on line help or menu driven documentation Syntax DEFINE DIALOG filespec intro END TOPIC titlel textl END TOPIC title2 text2 END END DIALOG Remarks filespec 15 the name of the physical disk file that will store the dialog file This name is formatted according to the file naming conventions for your operating system intro is the text introducing the dialog menu titlel is the title for the first topic up to 25 characters textil is the text of the first topic 133 Promula Application Development System User s Manual title2 is the title for the second topic text2 is the text of the second topic The keyword END must be entered starting in column 1 and must be capitalized You may specify as many topics as you wish provided the resultant dialog file menu fits in the Help Screen that will be active when the dialog file is browsed Dialog files are PROMULA programs which consist of text organized into one or more topics Each topic consists of 1 A short title up to 25 characters 2 topic text The BROWSE DIALOG statement allows you to browse a dialog file Upon execution of the BROWSE DIALOG statement the topic titles form a menu from which you may brows
334. ms or multidimensional arrays You can specify as many variables per record as you wish within the capacity of your 137 Promula Application Development System User s Manual working space You can include as many records as you wish within the capacity of your disk space INVERTED n for random access file of user specified keys associated with the records of a random file An inverted file provides a fast and efficient way to search a random file with symbolic keys n is an efficiency parameter that should equal your best estimate for the number of records that will match a given key The safest but probably not the most efficient value for n is the number of records in the random file Inverted files with a larger n require more disk space but they usually require less time to search If the TYPE clause is omitted from the file definition the file will be assumed to be an array file desc is a file descriptor This descriptor is only useful for program documentation purposes it is an inline comment For an ARRAY or RANDOM file the variables whose values are stored on file are defined by means of the DEFINE VARIABLE file statement The OPEN file statement physically opens a file to the place on disk where the data that you want to access through file is stored Existing files should be opened STATUS OLD new files should be opened STATUS NEW A file must be opened before it can be used The CLEAR file statement closes the disk
335. mula Application Development System User s Manual The program batche prm shown below will be used as an example for the batch run OPEN SEGMENT BATCHE XEO STATUS NEW DEFINE PROGRAM BATCH TEST DEFINE VARIABLE opt menu option b b variable TYPE REAL 12 3 a a variable TYPE REAL 12 3 x x variable TYPE REAL 12 6 ND VARIABLI LH DEFINE WINDOW sw 01 01 28 20 WHITE BLACK FULL SINGLE WHITE BLACK mw 32 01 78 20 WHITE BLACK FULL SINGLE WHITE BLACK pw 01 23 78 23 WHITE BLACK FULL SINGLE WHITE BLACK END WINDOW DEFINE MENU picmnu POPUP SW PW NEDITN NCOMPUTEN NDISPLAYN NQUITN END FIELD 1 SELECT E HELP 0 ACTION 1 EDIT VALUES END FIELD 2 SELECT C HELP 0 ACTION 2 COMPUTE VALUES END FIELD 3 SELECT D HELP 0 ACTION 3 DISPLAY VALUES END FIELD 4 SELECT Q HELP 0 ACTION 4 QUIT END END picmnu DEFINE ENU datmnu ENTER INPUTS A B END batche prm continued DEFINE PROCEDURE ctrl SELECT picmnu opt DO IF opt EQ 4 REAK ctrl E opt EO 1 DIT datmnu a b E opt EQ 2 a b E opt EO 3 RITE CENTER a b p x
336. n after the read are displayed below Month Names MONS 1 JA MONS 2 FEB MONS 3 MAR MONS 4 APR 5 MAY 6 JUN MONS 7 JUL MONS 8 AUG MONS 9 SEP MONS 10 OCT MONS 11 NOV MONS 12 DEC Third relate the variable monsn to the set mons using a DEFINE RELATION statement DEFINE RELATION ROW mons monsn END RELATION There are four types of relations between sets and variables in PROMULA ROW COLUMN KEY and TIME These are described in the discussion of the DEFINE RELATION statement in Chapter 3 The ROW relation is used to specify the primary descriptor for a set s elements The values of the primary descriptor are used to label the elements of the set in displays of the set and in displays of variables whose rows are classified by the set Now create labels for the elements of set exps First define a vector variable to contain the set element labels DEFINE VARIABLE expsn exps TYPE STRING 16 Expense Categories END VARIABLE Second assign values to be used as labels for the elements of set exps In this case we will do this with equations expsn 1 RENT expsn 2 FOOD expsn 3 CAR SERVICE expsn 4 UTILITIES expsn 5 CAR INS expsn 6 PHONE Third relate the variable expsn to the set exps using a DEFINE RELATION statement DEFINE RELATION COLUMN mons monsn END RELATION
337. n of the drow by dcol by dpag disk variable dat 1 Sometimes in addition to accessing dimensional sections and reordering the structure of related disk and local variables the programmer wants the local variable to be smaller than the disk variable In other words the programmer wants to bring in a subrange of values from one or more dimensions of the disk variable The syntax of the DISK option described in the previous section is not flexible enough to support a floating subrange within a dimension Consider for example the disk variable defined below DEFINE SET af dsub 500 Survey Subject dqst 100 Survey Question dyer 10 Survey Year ND SET DEFINE VARIABLE af data dsub dqst dyer Survey Responses by Subject Question and Year END VARIABLE Suppose the programmer wants to be able to dynamically access the data for all dsub elements a single arbitrary dyer element and a range say 20 of the dqst elements In addition the programmer wants to access the data through a local question by subject array With the notation discussed thus far he she might try to define the local array as follows DEFINE SET sub 500 Survey Subject qst 20 Survey Question END SET DEFINE VARIABLE yp Year Pointer ldata qst sub Survey Responses DISK af data sub qst yp END VARIABLE The problem with this notation is that it will only all
338. n optional descriptor for the segment statement is any PROMULA statement including other segment definitions Segments may be nested to any desired level of nesting proc is a procedure defined within the segment This procedure is automatically called into execution when the segment is read into your working space Segments are the components into which a large program is organized in order to fit within a limited amount of working space The segments of a program are stored on disk Together with array database files program segmentation provides the means for constructing large programs that are not limited by the size of your working space A segment contains both executable code and data The data is stored in the variables of the segment The code of the segment stores the equations and procedures that act on the segment variables The END SEGMENT statement serves three purposes 1 It marks the end of the segment started with a previous DEFINE SEGMENT statement 2 It writes the segment onto the disk file specified previously by an appropriate OPEN SEGMENT or DEFINE PROGRAM statement 3 It specifies the identifier of a procedure that will be executed by default when the segment is read in To bring a segment into your working space from disk use the OPEN SEGMENT and READ SEGMENT statements This brings in both the executable code and the data values stored in the variables of the segment If the segment you wish to bring in is part
339. n screen window and displays the field description for the currently highlighted field in the menu s field description window The last selected option is highlighted The first time the menu is executed the first selection is highlighted Popup pick menu selections may be made by using the arrow keys to highlight the desired field and then pressing the Enter key To minimize keystrokes you may enter a char as defined in one of the SELECT char parameters of the menu definition The SELECT menu statement does not distinguish between upper and lower case alphabetic keypresses thus if SELECT A the user may select the field either by pressing the A or a key When a popup menu selection is made the value of code as defined in the appropriate ACTION code parameter of the menu definition will be returned to PROMULA If code is the name of a submenu defined in the popup menu the submenu will be displayed for selection If code is a number its value will be stored in the variable option and execution will continue with the statement following the SELECT menu statement The user may return from a popup pick menu submenu by pressing the End key If your system supports a pointer device such as a mouse you may make a pick menu selection by positioning the pointer in the desired selection field and clicking the pointer mouse button Examples An example of the SELECT menu statement is given with the discussion of the DEFINE MENU statement A thir
340. nd Exit Arrows Home Select Enter Edit EDIT Edit Input Values Here the bounce bar is highlighting the ten spaces following the text Name By pressing the Enter key you may introduce a particular name for this data field By using the movement keys you may edit the rest of the data fields to produce the following display After editing you will return to the menu below from which you can calculate the product of A and B and display results in the Main Screen 3 7 29 DEFINE PARAMETER Purpose Defines numeric parameters for procedures Parameters are used to transfer data values to and from procedures Syntax DEFINE PARAMETER param sets desc TYPE type END Remarks param is the parameter identifier sets isalist of sets that define the structure of the parameter desc is a parameter descriptor type is the type of the parameter and may be one of the following REAL to specify real values 152 Promula Application Development System User s Manual INTEGER to specify integer values MONEY to specify money values Other types of parameters are allowed but they are of limited use because their values cannot be passed to or from the actual arguments of the procedure A parameter is a numeric variable which is used locally within a procedure Parameters may be scalars or multidimensional arrays A parameter identifier cannot be defined or referenced outside a procedure A pr
341. ned to take explicit advantage of the FORTRAN data structure multidimensional arrays of primarily numeric homogeneous data It is a portable C program and offers the same character based functionality on a number of platforms PC DOS and DOS Extended 386 486 UNIX RS 6000 AIX VAX VMS and Apple Macintosh As an application development tool PROMULA supports the following functions Data management organize and selectively manipulate data Data analysis establish relationships in the data using an extensive library of mathematical and statistical functions Modeling simulate a problem and possible solutions to it What if analysis compare alternative decisions about the problem Report generation display results in report form Graphics display results in plotted form Promula Application Development System User s Manual Menu management prepare pick pop up and data menus for application prototyping program control data entry data editing and data display in a character based user interface Window management create applications with attractive user interfaces using windows Equation solving solve systems of simultaneous equations PROMULA s high level problem oriented programming language is particularly suited for applications as opposed to systems programmers It is a highly productive and elegant notation for developing analytical decision support or simulation applications in all kin
342. next example illustrates how to make a partial copy of your database in a separate disk file The first copy uses the EXCLUDE option to exclude variable a from the copy The second copy uses the INCLUDE option to include only variables coln and recn in the copy Notice that without the DATA option the values in the original file are not copied into the new file DEFINE FILE prtcpy TYPE ARRAY Partial Copy of Original Database END FILE OPEN prtcpy prtcpy dba STATUS NEW COPY orignl INTO prtcpy EXCLUDE a After the copy the statement COPY prtcpy DATA may be used to verify the results as displayed below DEFINE FILE PRTCPY TYPE ARRAY END OPEN PRICPY PRTCPY dba STATUS NEW DEFINE SET PRTCPY REC 4 COL 6 END DEFINE VARIABLE PRTCPY B REC COL TYPE REAL 10 1 The B Matrix RECN REC TYPE STRING 10 COLN COL TYPE STRING 10 END DEFINE RELATION PRTCPY ROW REC RECN COLUMN COL COLN END 129 Promula Application Development System User s Manual READ B 12 E 0 000000E0 0 000000 0 0 000000E0 0 000000E0 0 000000 0 0 000000E0 0 000000E0 0 000000 0 0 000000E0 0 000000E0 0 000000 0 0 000000E0 0 000000E0 0 000000 0 0 000000E0 0
343. ng batch execution the command line buffer is not active so the use of these keys to control it is not supported 4 The exclamation point may be used to indicate that the Return or Enter key is to be pressed when PROMULA is waiting for a keypress The enter command is useful for putting PROMULA into data entry mode during batch execution of an EDIT statement Use of the exclamation point to signify the return used to enter a record is not required or allowed Notice that the batch commands are printable characters and therefore look like records If the program is expecting a record and you want to enter a keypress precede the keypress code with a pound sign For example if the program is expecting a record and you want to escape from the application to the main menu enter m If you put just an m the program will read m as the value of the record There is one exception to these guidelines if the program is expecting a keypress that is also used as a batch command you must precede the keypress with a pound sign For example if the program has a popup pick menu option with selection key m and you want to select the option in your batch script put a m on the next line of the batch script If you put just an the program will escape to the main menu instead of selecting the program menu s m option The easiest way to prepare a batch script is to run the program interactively and make careful notes of the keypresses and records
344. ng execution of this statement is described below Browsing keys Pressing the arrow keys or the PgUp and PgDn keys moves a highlight bar through the list of set elements Enter key Pressing the Enter key selects the currently highlighted set element clears the screen and allows execution to continue End key Pressing the End key allows the user to exit without making a selection 251 Promula Application Development System User s Manual See also SELECT set SELECT VARIABLE and SELECT SET statements Examples The following example demonstrates the SELECT ENTRY statement DEFINE SET dir 4 4 Directions END SET DEFINE VARIABLE dirn dir ROW LABELS TYPE STRING 10 END VARIABLE READ dirn 8 ORTH SOUTH EAST WEST DEFINE PROCEDURE selent SELECT ROW dir dirn SELECT ENTRY dir WRITE dir END PROCEDURE selent Execution of procedure selent and selecting the first element of set dir produces the displays below Identifier Description i NORTH 2 SOUTH 3 EAS 4 WES Exit Arrows PgUp PgDn Home Mov Enter Select Identifier Description 1 NORTH 252 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 3 7 86 SELECT FIELD Purpose Vary the information associated with a pick menu field Syntax SELECT FIELD menu FIELD
345. ng the file set notation For example the following code creates a database with three sets DEFINE FILE af TYPE ARRAY END OPEN af test dba STATUS NEW DEFINE SET af 1000 1 8 pag 10 END SET af The rest of the database definition e g variables and relations CLEAR af The sets in file test dba can be manipulated by PROMULA by opening the array file STATUS OLD then using the ile set notation For example af is the identifier of the 1000 element set in the array file test dba 3 1 19 Statement Definition A complete instruction in a PROMULA program Remarks There are two types of statements line and structured Line statements are entered on a single line which may be continued to additional lines according to the rules of line continuation Structured statements on the other hand require more than one line of code they start in one line and end in another with a number of other lines in between A structured statement may contain other line or structured statements in it All structured statements end with an END statement Examples The statement WRITE a is a line statement 81 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The statement DEFINE VARIABLI a b END F is a structured statement All PROMULA statements begin with one of the verbs of the language except for eq
346. ng the procedure identifier optionally preceded by the word DO When a procedure is called its statements are executed sequentially in the same order as they are defined Procedure execution ends after the last statement of the procedure is executed or when a BREAK procedure statement is executed After ending execution continues with the statement after the original procedure call that started the procedure 3 1 15 Program A PROMULA program is an ordered set of statements that allows you to transform input data to output information A statement is a complete instruction in a PROMULA program Input data is given or known information which you read into the program output information is what the program computes and writes out for you A PROMULA program has two states source and executable When you first write it the program is in its source state From its source state the program is transformed to its executable state by the process of compilation In its source state a program can be modified with a text editor and compiled but not executed The computer can execute a program only if it has been successfully compiled and is in an executable state The two main operations of the PROMULA system are program compilation and program execution Both of these operations can be performed either directly with interactive input from the console Options 10 and 6 of the Main Menu or indirectly with batch input from disk Options 5 and 8 of the
347. ng with their definitions DEFINE FILE ORIGNL TYPE ARRAY END OPEN ORIGNL ORIGNL dba STATUS NEW DEFINE SET ORIGNL COL 6 REC 4 END DEFINE VARIABLE ORIGNL COLN COL TYPE STRING 10 RECN REC TYPE STRING 10 END DEFINE RELATION ORIGNL COLUMN COL COLN ROW REC RECN END READ COLN 10 COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 coL 4 coL 5 6 READ RECN 10 ROW 1 ROW 2 ROW 3 ROW 4 Example 2 Full Copy array file to array file The next example illustrates how to make a full copy of the database in a separate disk file This option is most useful for making working or backup copies of your databases The copy will behave exactly as the original The DATA option is required to have the values in the original file copied with the definitions After copying orignl into fulcpy the COPY statement is used to display the contents of fulcpy on the console DEFINE FILE fulcpy TYPE ARRAY Full Copy of Original Database END FILE OPEN orignl original dba STATUS OLD OPEN fulcpy fullcopy dba STATUS NEW COPY orignl INTO fulcpy DATA After copying orignl into fulcpy the COPY statement is used to display the contents of fulcpy on the console COPY fulcpy DATA DEFINE FILE FULCPY TYPE ARRAY
348. nt of memory capacity available to the text editor is limited by the amount of memory used by the application you are running Thus if you want to edit a very large file it is best to clear your application from memory before using the editor Examples 1 The statement RUN EDITOR demo prm or RUN EDITOR demo prm will load the file demo prm into the editor for editing 2 Similarly the following statements will bring demo prm into your work space for editing DEFINE VARIABLE fname YPE STRING 20 END VARIABLE fname demo prm RUN EDITOR fname Where fname is a string variable 3 7 83 RUN PROGRAM Purpose Runs a PROMULA executable file Syntax RUN PROGRAM file Remarks file is a string optionally in quotes or a string variable containing the name of the file where the program that you wish to execute is stored the extension XEQ is assumed if none is specified The RUN PROGRAM statement clears the current application from memory before executing ile Control returns to PROMULA command mode when the execution of i1e is complete Alternatively a STOP PROMULA statement in the application may be used to exit to the operating system The RUN PROGRAM statement cannot be executed inside a procedure Examples The statement RUN PROGRAM program xeq 250 Promula Application Development System User s Manual will clear the current application from memory and execute the PRO
349. nt to write quotation marks begin a new page begin a new line suppress automatic carriage return must be the last character of text This allows you to concatenate the output of several WRITE text statements var Np w d write value of a variable var starting in column p Allow w spaces for the width of the value and d spaces for decimals A negative w left justifies the value of var If w and are both zero no trailing blanks will be displayed This is especially useful for writing string type variables that may contain unknown numbers of trailing blanks set write the value of the current primary descriptor of set variable I write the identifier of a variable variable L write the descriptor of a variable variable D write the identifier of a variable followed by a colon a space and the descriptor for the variable param is any or all of the following LEFT to left justify the output default RIGHT to right justify the output CENTER to center the output CLEAR s to pause s seconds clear the screen then continue A negative s causes a pause until the user strikes any key and then clears the screen CURSOR type to specify the type of the cursor Three cursor types are possible OFF no cursor STANDARD blinking dash default BLOCK blinking block GOTOXY x y to specify x and y screen coordinates for the next write The visible part of the screen contains values for x between 0 at the left and 79 at the right and valu
350. nth and the correspondence between the month elements of these two vectors and those of variable incom is maintained automatically by PROMULA when the equation is processed Thus the single equation above is equivalent to the following 12 equations incom 1 payhr 1 wager l taxes bonus 1 incom 2 payhr 2 wager l taxes bonus 2 incom 3 payhr 3 wager 1 taxes bonus 3 incom 4 payhr 4 wager l taxes bonus 4 incom 5 payhr 5 wager l taxes bonus 5 incom 6 payhr 6 wager l taxes bonus 6 incom 7 payhr 7 wager l taxes bonus 7 incom 8 payhr 8 wager l taxes bonus 8 incom 9 payhr 9 wager l taxes bonus 9 incom 10 payhr 10 wager 1 taxes bonus 10 incom 11 payhr 11 wager 1 taxes bonus 11 incom 12 payhr 12 wager 1 taxes bonus 12 The income equation tells PROMULA that the monthly income is equal to the number of hours worked per month payhr times the hourly wage wager adjusted for taxes plus the monthly bonus Another example of an equation that uses implicit subscripting is the calculation of the difference between the monthly income and monthly expense values to give the monthly balance figures balns incom expnm An important point to remember when writing equations is that a variable may appear on both sides of an equation In such equations the value of the ex
351. nu command except that the READ menu puts the user in batch or automatic edit mode where he she is not allowed to pick the data fields to edit He She must edit the data fields sequentially and in the order that they appear on the menu After the last field is edited execution of the program automatically proceeds with the statement following the READ menu statement 3 7 73 READ SEGMENT Purpose Reads an executable program segment into your working space for execution A program segment includes both code and data To read data values only use the READ VALUE segment statement Syntax READ SEGMENT seg DO proc Remarks seg is the identifier of the segment as it appears on the corresponding DEFINE SEGMENT and END SEGMENT statements The default identifier of the top segment of any program is MAIN proc isthe identifier of a procedure in seg Upon execution this procedure is executed automatically The segment seg is read in from the disk file specified on the OPEN SEGMENT statement Examples The following statements open and read in for execution the segment seg1 OPEN SEGMENT a program xeq STATUS OLD READ SEGMENT segl If segment seg1 is subordinate to another segment say MAIN then the following sequence must be entered OPEN SEGMENT program xeq STATUS OLD READ SEGMENT MAIN READ SEGMENT segl where program xeq is the name of the segment f
352. o command mode depending on how the program was started Examples OPEN SEGMENT sample xeq STATUS NEW DEFINE PROGRAM A Sample Program DEFINE PROCEDURE start WRITE CENTER Hello World ND PROCEDURE start ND PROGRAM DO start The code above defines a short hello world program The program will be saved on disk as the file sample xeq The title Sample Program will appear with the current date and a page number at the upper right hand corner of all subsequent displays produced by the WRITE variable statement unless you turn it off with the SELECT HEADING OFF statement 3 7 32 DEFINE RELATION Purpose Defines a relation between the elements of a set and the contents of a vector variable structured by that set Syntax DEFINE RELATION file 160 Promula Application Development System User s Manual type set vec END Remarks file 15 the identifier of an array file that has been opened to a location on disk with the OPEN file statement If file 15 specified the relation will become part of the array file structure set is the identifier of the set whose elements are to be related to the values of the vector vec vec is the identifier of the vector variable whose values are to be related to the elements of the set type isthe type of relation between set and vec and may be one of the fo
353. ocedure demo produces the following screen 92 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Edit the values below according to the instructions in the prompt at the bottom of the screen or press End to continue THE VALUES OF VARIABLE A COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 COL 5 10 00 10 00 10 00 10 00 10 00 10 00 10 00 10 00 10 00 10 00 10 00 10 00 10 00 10 00 10 00 10 00 10 00 10 00 10 00 10 00 End Exit Fn Shift Fn PgUp PgDn Home Arrows Select Enter Edit 3 2 Statement Format In general PROMULA is a free form language Its statements may start anywhere on the input line and as many blanks or commas as desired may be inserted between the various parts of the statement to improve readability PROMULA statements are not identified by line number thus PROMULA programs have no GO TO statements Comment lines may be inserted almost anywhere in the source code and are identified by having an asterisk in column 1 It is possible to include in line comments with some statements for example after the procedure name in a DEFINE PROCEDURE statement Full line comments i e those introduced by an asterisk in column 1 are not recognized as comments in two places free form text blocks like those used for the DEFINE MENU and BROWSE WRITE TEXT COMMENT statements and in the data lines for the READ variable statement The slash character in column one may be used to insert comments into the data lines for the READ var
354. ocedure proc with parameters a b c may be called into execution by simply entering its name and specifying an ordered list of variables often referred to as the actual arguments of the procedure corresponding to the parameter list The type and order of variables in the variable list must agree with the type and order of the parameters as defined in procedure proc proc x y Z If the parameters are multidimensional arrays the variable arguments of the procedure must be followed by the identifiers of the sets that dimension them proc x seti set2 y setl set2 z setl set2 NOTE The values of parameters do not use any storage nor do they retain their values between procedure calls Examples The procedure minx defined below has three parameters DEFINE PROCEDURE minx DEFINE PARAMETER a Value to be compared with b b Value to be compared with a G Min of a b END PARAMETER DO IF b LT c c b END IF END PROCEDURE minx The purpose of this procedure is to compare the value of b with the value of a and to return the minimum of the two values in parameter c This procedure when called by another procedure cmin compares two variables x and y and returns the minimum of the two in variable z as shown in the dialog below DEFINE VARIABLI 2 ND VARIABLI Fl rs LH DEFINE PROCEDURE cm
355. of FORTRAN variables usually in the form of multidimensional arrays which are manipulated by the FORTRAN computations on the one hand but can also be used independently by PROMULA for other operations data input data edit report generation graphics etc PROMULA is a transition bridge from third to fourth generation approaches in applications development Because of its powerful programming capabilities it is a superior alternative to using spreadsheets or pure database managers in large scale applications development 1 3 PROMULA Language Highlights 1 3 1 Total Programming Environment You can develop complete turnkey applications with PROMULA The system is designed to capitalize on existing applications written in a variety of languages and to minimize programming time in developing new applications PROMULA is largely self contained with its own screen editor language compiler and operating system interface 1 3 1 Structured Notation PROMULA is a structured language especially useful for developing applications quickly Its elegant notation structured concepts and built in functions will help minimize the time required to develop serious mainframe size applications on your desktop computer For you the problem solver this means that PROMULA is easier to learn easier to use and apply in problem solving and thus faster in producing results In problem solving the choice of the right notation is almost half the sol
356. of the currently open segment file only READ SEGMENT statement is needed To bring only the data values of a segment into your working space use the READ VALUE segment statement To write to disk the data values of a segment use the WRITE VALUE segment statement Examples The following program skeleton DEFINE PROGRAM A Segmented Program OPEN SEGMENT prog xeq STATUS NEW statements of MAIN DEFINE SEGMENT segl statements of segl DEFINE PROCEDURE one statements of one END one END SEGMENT segl DO one DEFINE SEGMENT seg2 statements of seg2 END SEGMENT seg2 END PROGRAI STOP 164 Promula Application Development System User s Manual defines a program with the following segment structure This program is physically stored on a disk file whose file name is prog xeq The program is entitled A Segmented Program and has three components the top segment MAIN and the two segments seg1 and seg that are subordinate to MAIN That is whereas MAIN can call into execution seg1 and seg2 seg1 and seg2 cannot call into execution MAIN Neither can the segments seg1 and seg2 be in your working space simultaneously When seg1 is in working space with MAIN seg2 remains on disk in the segment file prog xeq and vice versa When seg1 is read into working space by MAIN the procedure one is automatically called into execution
357. of variable incom the second column picks up the values of variable expnm and the third column picks up the values of variable balns The output report variable is now loaded and ready to be displayed The final report is produced by the WRITE variable statement below WRITE rtabl OTAL mons ITLE Budget Summary aincom L aincom aexpnm L aexpnm abalns L abalns The WRITE variable statement above includes the TITLE and TOTAL options The TOTAL option tells PROMULA to report the specified totals along with the variable s values In this case only the totals over set mons are desired so the mons set is indicated in parentheses following the keyword TOTAL The TITLE option tells PROMULA to replace the default title for the variable 1 the variable s descriptor with the title specification enclosed in the parentheses In this case a five line title is specified the first line of the title contains the words Budget Summary the second line of the title is blank as indicated by the two slashes a slash character tells PROMULA to go to the next line the third fourth and fifth lines of the title contain the descriptors and values separated by equal signs of the three annual average variables aincom aexpnm abalns The notation aincom L is used to identify the descriptor of the variable aincom in titles and other WRITE statements A typical budget program report produced by the statement ab
358. olution portrait BM Epson printer medium resolution landscape BM Epson printer medium resolution portrait BM Epson printer CGA high resolution screen dump BM Epson printer CGA medium resolution screen dump P LaserJet II printer high resolution landscape P LaserJet II printer medium resolution landscape P LaserJet II printer high resolution p9ortrait P laserJet II printer medium resolution portrait T 330 SIXEL graphics T 240 REGIS graphics BM Epson printer VGA resolution screen dump I I I I I I H H H H V V I End Exit Arrows PgUp PgDn Home Move Enter After selecting a template configuration you can edit its descriptor to give it a unique name Edit the description of graphics configuration 19 CGA high resolution black amp white graphics Enter value or End NEW CGA HI RES SMALL PLOT Last enter the parameters associated with the new configuration using PROMULA s interactive data editor on the screen below 327 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Edit the parameters of graphics configuration 19 NEW CGA HI RES SMALL PLOT Device type 0 video 1 3 raster 2 4 vector Horizontal text pixel width Horizontal text pixel height Vertical text pixel width Vertical text pixel height Total width width in pixels Total height in pixels Total width in standard units Total height in standard units COLOR CODES 01 BLACK Background color code LINE COLORS 1 End E
359. om the keyboard set contains integers from 0 to N If the values of the set type variable are within the range of set the descriptors of set are displayed otherwise the variable is assigned and displays the value 0 This type of variable is useful for helping the user enter or verify categorical data Details and examples of using the various format types are presented with the discussion of the DEFINE VARIABLE statement The descriptor of a variable is a string of characters that will be used as a default title when the variable is displayed by the report generator Variable descriptors and identifiers can be displayed in write statements and in titles through use of the L L D operators The notation variable I can be used to indicate that the identifier of a variable is to be displayed The notation variable L can be used to indicate that the descriptor of a variable is to be displayed The notation variable D can be used to indicate that the identifier followed by a colon a space and the descriptor for the variable is to be displayed These operators may be used with indirects to display the identifier and or descriptor of the variable that the indirect is pointing at For example given the following definition DEFINE VARIABLE pop POPULATION SIZE END VARIABLE the following relations are true pop L POPULATION SIZE pop D POP POPULATION SIZE The storage type of a va
360. omula Application Development System User s Manual INCLUDE vars specifies a partial copy to i1e2 that includes only selected variables from ile1 Where vars is the list of variables in filel EXCLUDE vars specifies a partial copy to i1e2 that excludes selected variables from i1e1 Where vars is the list of variables in ilel If varspec is omitted all the variables in the dataset are included in the copy The varspec option may only be used with array files DATA indicates that both the structure and values of selected variables in file1 are to be copied Here structure means the set variable and relation definitions in ilel When making a text copy of an array file using the DATA option local set selections are obeyed and the relevant SELECT set statements are written in the output See Example 5 RAW indicates that you wish to make a raw copy of 1 1 in 1 2 This copy works like your operating system s generic file copy command This is the quickest mode of the COPY statements and may not be used with any other options Syntax 2 COPY file IMAGE Remarks file isthe identifier of the array file containing the data you wish to access Syntax 2 reads the set variable and relation definitions of an array file into memory giving PROMULA direct access to the information in the file This is an alternative to using local variables to virtually access disk variables in an array file Although this feat
361. on Development System User s Manual 2 Using Sets as Subscripts to Define Array Variables DEFINE VARIABLE md month ND VARIABLE Data by Month and Account 3 Selecting Set Elements ELECT VARIABLE md month IF md GT 4 SELECT month 1 6 9 12 SELECT month SELECT SE month SELECT E RY month S S 4 Special Set Notation Some of the special notations for sets set M set R set N set S are illustrated in the dialog below DEFINE SET pnt 4 END SET DEFINE VARIABLI x yl ND VARIABLI fl tj ies pnt ve a Hy ct pl d a H Ej ct x u El ty Fl ct x x pn WRITI 4 DG SELECT pnt 3 2 4 x pnt S 3 WRITE pnt S 3 x pnt S 3 4 DO pnt x pn WRI x pn WRI END pnt S set N pnt N pnt s pnt N pnt S x E ct pd ct pnt N x 3 Note that within a DO set loop the size of the set 1 is one element 2 1 80 Promula Application Development System User s Manual pnt S 4 pnt N 1 x pnt N WRITE x x 5 Using sets directly from a database Sets may be defined as part of the structure of an array file see DEFINE SET These disk sets may be accessed directly without having the database definition in memory by usi
362. on Results FORMAT 50 10 BODY cf 4 tv 4 se 4 sd 4 rs 4 END PROCEDURE doregr The output of procedure doregr is displayed below Regression Analysis Results 1 to 12 GRP 1 Term Coefficient T Valu SiH IV1 6 592777 LLb2357 4 859254 IV2 4 503562 4 204 1 071156 CONS 415 113000 5 031 82 517400 Variance 598 0237 Standard Deviation 24 45452 Adjusted R Square 0 7164 GRP 2 Term Coefficient T Valu Bis IV1 6 592777 1 357 4 859254 IV2 4 503562 4 204 1 071156 CONS 415 113000 5 031 82 517400 Variance 598 0237 Standard Deviation 24 45452 Adjusted R Square 0 7164 Regression Results IV1 GRP 1 GRP 2 Coefficients of the Regression Terms 6 5928 6 5928 T Value for the Coefficients of the Regression Ter 1 3567 1 3567 Stderr Errror for the Coefficients of the Regressi 4 8593 4 8593 Standard Deviation of Regression Model 24 4545 24 4545 R Square of Regression Model 0 7164 0 7164 IV2 GRP 1 GRP 2 Coefficients of the Regression Terms 4 5036 4 5036 T Value for the Coefficients of the Regression Ter 4 2044 4 2044 Stderr Errror for the Coefficients of the Regressi 1 0712 1 0712 Standard Deviation of Regression Model 24 4545 24 4545 R Square of Regression Model 0 7164 0 7164 CONS GRP 1 GRP 2 Coefficients of the Regression Terms 415 1130 415 1130 T Value for the Coefficients of the Regression Ter 5 0306 5 0306 Stderr Errror for the Coefficients of the Regressi
363. on of a dynamic procedure 2 It declares the endogenous time series variables to be computed and stored at the fixed time points of the time series sets classifying the output time series 220 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Syntax LEVEL otsl evl ots2 ev2 Remarks otsl is an output time series i e an array variable that is indexed by a time series set evi is an endogenous variable that is used explicitly in the LEVEL and or RATE sections of a dynamic procedure ots2 is an output time series variable for a second LEVEL statement equation ev2 is an endogenous variable for a second LEVEL statement equation The equations of the LEVEL statement form a list of correspondence between output time series and endogenous variables that are used locally in the equations of the LEVEL and or RATE section of a dynamic procedure Based on this equivalence the values of the output time series will be computed and stored at the fixed time points of the time index classifying the series Only those endogenous variables that are intended to be saved for later use as a time series need to be included in the endogenous variables list of the LEVEL statement The values of an output time series at each time point of the time series set are set equal to the values of the local endogenous variable corresponding to the nearest simulation time point plus or minus DT 2 where DT is the time paramet
364. on on the DEFINE SET statement is one way to specify that row labels stubs are to be associated with set elements The information supplied with the ROW option specifies the maximum width in characters of each stub and optionally the location of those stubs on a database Stubs may get their values from a diskopt parameter a READ set statement or a relation to a variable on disk or in the program via the SELECT RELATION or DEFINE RELATION statements Set stubs are the primary labels for set elements They are used by the BROWSE EDIT and WRITE variable statements to form titles subheadings and row labels for the various reports They also appear in BAR and PIECHART plots plots of multi dimensional variables and in displays of sets generated by the SELECT ENTRY SELECT SET WRITE set and BROWSE set statements COLUMN v 1 diskopt Where w is the maximum width in characters for column headings associated with the set 1 is the number of lines in each column heading associated with the set diskopt is a reference to a database variable containing the set column heading values The COLUMN option on the DEFINE SET statement is one way to specify that column headings spanners are to be associated with set elements The information supplied with the COLUMN option specifies the width in characters the number of lines for each spanner and optionally the location of those spanners on disk Spanners may get their values from a diskopt
365. ons Remarks The arithmetic operators in order of precedence are OPERATOR EXPRESSION PRECEDENCE MEANING NE 1 Raise A to the B power 50 Promula Application Development System User s Manual a A B 2 Multiply A times 2 Divide A by B A B 3 Subtract B from A A B 3 Add A to B The above precedence may be altered by parentheses In cases of equal precedence the order of evaluation is from left to right The SELECT HIERARCHY ON statement causes operator precedence to be determined by the left to right order of operators in the expression Arithmetic expressions may have other numeric expressions as operands 3 1 3 Expression Boolean Definition An expression involving variables constants functions relational and logical operators and other expressions Boolean expression is either true or false If true it has the value 1 if false it has the value 0 Remarks The relational operators are OPERATOR EXPRESSION MEANING LT ALTB A less than B LE ALEB A less than or equal to B EQ AEQB A equal to B NE ANEB A not equal to B GE A GE B A greater than or equal to B GT AGTB A greater than B The logical operators are OPERATOR EXPRESSION MEANING NOT NOTA if A is false 0 otherwise AND ANDB if A and B are true 0 otherwise OR AORB if A or B is true 0 if both are false A and B may be Boolean variables or Boolean expressions 3 1 4 Expression Characte
366. or E At this point you may change the marked value by entering a new one and pressing the Enter key The cursor moves to the next value to edit and so forth End press the End key to exit editing mode or to exit browsing mode Examples Given the following definitions DEFINE ET DEFINE VARIABLE a row col page A 3 Dimensional Array END VARIABLE the statement EDIT a clears the screen and produces the following display 213 Promula Application Development System User s Manual A 3 Dimensional Array PAGE 1 COL 1 End Exit Fn Shift Fn PgUp PgDn Home Arrows Select Enter Edit To browse up the pages or third dimension press the F3 key to get the following display A 3 Dimensional Array PAGE 2 COL 1 COL 2 End Exit Fn Shift Fn PgUp PgDn Home Arrows Select Enter Edit 214 Promula Application Development System User s Manual You may now begin editing the array The value in cell 1 COL 1 is highlighted Press the Enter key to change the value in this cell The following display results Enter value or End 1 Enter the value 1 and press the Enter key The following display results 215 Promula Application Development System User s Manual A 3 Dimensional Array PAGE 2 COL 1 COL 2 Enter value or End 2 6 The cursor now highlights the value in the ROW 1 COL 2 cell Type the value 2 6 and pr
367. orage used for manipulating dynamic variables This is done by including a PS xx DS yy VS zz switch on the PROMULA command line As mentioned in Chapter 3 see discussion of SELECT MAP PROMULA divides your working space into three partitions each of which can accommodate about 32 Kbytes of storage The three partitions are entitled Value Storage Definition Storage and Procedure Storage The Value partition accommodates data values the contents of variables The Definition partition accommodates the definitions of data structures sets variables menus etc The Procedure partition accommodates executable code the statements of procedures Your program is too large whenever any one of these three storage areas is filled PROMULA s default memory allocation map is shown in Figure 4 2 below This diagram indicates that PROMULA creates a 32K partition for each storage area and that a scratch storage area whose size is hardware dependent is available at the top of memory TOTAL AVAILABLE WORKING SPACE DEFINITION PROCEDURE VALUE SCRATCH 32K 32K 32K Hardware dependent The PS xx DS yy VS zz switch allows you to change the allocation of memory The switch values xx yy and zz are integers between 1 and 32 The switches have no effect on machines that employ a virtual memory system The amount of storage required by your application can be determined by compiling it with SELECT MAP ON and finding the maxim
368. ory map is produced with the listing This is the default When MAP ON a memory map is produced with the listing Each statement line of this listing has four columns of sequence numbers The first number in Column Value is the relative address of the next available word of value storage Depending on the size of your computer system memory this number cannot exceed a certain maximum If it does you have to use program segmentation or database management to make your program fit within your working space see Chapter 4 The second number in Column Def is the relative address of the next available word of definition storage You need concern yourself with this number only if its value exceeds a certain maximum The third number in Column Proc is the relative address of the next available word of procedure storage This too cannot exceed a certain maximum determined by the size of your computer memory The Proc numbers are also reported as the Statement address during execution errors and you may locate the statement generating the error by looking up the statement in a mapped compilation listing The fourth number in Column Line is the sequence number of the statement within the source listing Figure 3 1 shows the output produced by the PROMULA compiler for a source program that has the MAP ON option in effect SELECT MAP ON Storage Allocation
369. ot automatically cleared and the variables are not automatically listed for selection The statements required to implement a variable selection routine using the ASK statement are shown below DEFINE VARIABLI a a b p Fl 43 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Wel indir An Indirect Variable END VARIABLE DEFINE PROCEDURE askvar AUDIT VARIABLE a b c ASK Enter desired variable name or Press End to Exit END BREAK askvar ELSE VARIABLE indir WRITE indir ND ASK ND PROCEDURE askvar Ej H Procedure askvar above uses the AUDIT VARIABLE statement to list the identifiers and descriptors of variables a b and c on the screen The ASK statement supplies the prompt indicating how to select a variable picks up the user s selection and assigns it to indir 2 2 5 2 3 Selecting Set Elements Frequently it is useful to let the user make selections from program sets and there are several PROMULA statements that can be used to implement this type of selection These include the SELECT ENTRY SELECT SET SELECT VARIABLE and ASK statements The SELECT ENTRY statement is the simplest of these and is used to help the user pick a single element of a PROMULA set from an interactive selection list The SELECT SET statement is similar to SELECT ENTRY except it allows the user to pick several elements of a PROMUDLA set from an
370. ot matrix printer high resolution landscape mode To specify the desired graphics mode use the SELECT GRAPHICS statement You may change the default configuration for MEDIUM HIGH and PLOTTER graphics modes for your system and PROMULA even lets you create your own graphics configurations See Chapter 5 for a discussion of configuring PROMULA graphics To print medium and high resolution plots execute the SELECT PRINTER ON statement before you generate the plot the graphic will appear on the screen while it is being printed Examples In the code below the procedure plotdemo when executed produces plots of the following four types 1 A point plot 2 Aline plot with its points marked 3 A parallel bar plot 4 A stacked bar plot These four high resolution plots are shown on the following pages DEFINE SET year 10 228 Promula Application Development System User s Manual END SET DEFINE VARIABL year Year Values ts year Time Series Values YPE REAL 8 1 tl year Log of the Time Series YPE REAL 8 1 name Run name YPE STRING 40 s ND VARIABLI 07 DEFINE RELATION time year yv END RELATION READ yv 70 72 74 76 78 80 82 84 86 88 READ ts 3 id 1 3 2 2 9 4 5 5 1 4 9 4 5 4 1 4 0 3 5 1 LN ts DEFINE PROCEDURE plotdemo PLOT POINTS yv ts tl
371. ove is displayed below Budget Summary Average Monthly Income 1 565 00 Average Monthly Expense 1 001 33 Average Monthly Balance 563 67 38 Promula Application Development System User s Manual INCOME EXPENSES BALANCE Total 18 780 00 12 016 02 6 763 98 JAN 1 580 00 028 52 551 48 FEB 1 490 00 1 032 03 457 97 MAR 1 580 00 1 031 54 548 46 1 580 00 1 006 96 573 04 1 580 00 973 91 606 09 JUN 1 550 00 036 79 513 21 JUL 1 580 00 92 261 608 39 AUG 1 580 00 994 50 585 50 SEP 1 550 00 018 56 531 44 1 580 00 986 85 593 15 NOV 1 550 00 970 06 579 94 DE 1 580 00 964 70 615 30 Figure 2 12 Typical report produced by the Budget Program PROMULA automatically computes and displays the columns totals and centers the title and the table of values on the screen The formatting of the table values 1 a width of 15 characters with two decimal digits is also done automatically according to the format type specified in the definition of variable rt abl It is possible to rotate the dimensions of the WRITE variable display by specifying a set order different from the one used in the definition of rtab1 For example the report table could be displayed with months as the columns and the report categories as the rows by the following statement WRITE rtabl 10 10 mons colm TOTAL mons TITLE Budget Summary aincom L aincom
372. ow the programmer to access the first 20 elements of set dqst The data for dqst elements 21 100 cannot be accessed Of course the programmer could try increasing the size of set qst to 100 but that would define a local variable with 500 x 100 50 000 values 200 Kbytes too large to fit in memory on most platforms The programmer might also try using virtual access but that is slow and does not allow reordering of local sets Finally the programmer might try basepointing the qst dimension of the local array but then he she could only access one dqst element at a time None of these approaches is satisfactory What is required is a means of having a basepoint and a local set corresponding to the same disk set In order to provide for this an extended DISK option syntax is available The extended syntax for defining a dynamic variable that can access a floating subrange of values from a disk variable is described below Syntax DEFINE VARIABLE SCRATCH 309 Promula Application Development System User s Manual var sets desc TYPE type DISK file dvar BASE dsets1 ORDER dsets2 END VARIABLE Remarks var is the identifier of a fixed or scratch variable It is through var that your application will dynamically access the disk variable dvar sets is the list of local set identifiers specifying the dimensions of the variable var desc is an optional descriptor for the variable va
373. ows in this chapter 3 7 67 PLOT Purpose Produces graphic displays of program variables and functions Syntax 1 PLOT type varx varyl vary2 option Remarks There are five different syntaxes for the PLOT statement depending on what type of information you want to plot Syntax 1 produces X Y line plots in which one or more Y variables are plotted against an X variable The maximum number of varys that can be plotted simultaneously is six type 1 the type of line plot desired and may be one of the following LINE for a line plot POINTS fora scatter point plot VALUES fora line plot with only those X Y points marked that coincide with the intersections of the vertical and horizontal tic mark coordinates If type is omitted the result is a line plot with the points marked If you have configured PROMULA s graphics to do so each line in LINE and VALUES plots will be shown in a different color so that the lines may be distinguished from one another If only black and white graphics are available the lines will have different patterns See Chapter 5 for a discussion of specifying line colors and patterns and other aspects of configuring PROMULA graphics varx is the identifier of the variable whose values are the x coordinates of the points being plotted 1 is the identifier of the variable whose values are the y coordinates of the points on the first curve being plotted vary2 is the identifier of the variable whose val
374. page 1 READ a arow acol page 2 3 2 2 3 3 33 a 2 arow acol a 1 arow acol 2 SELECT page DEFINE PROCEDURE test DO page Set IA equal to A Invert IA and display the result DO INVERT arow acol ia WRITE ia arow acol page TITLE INVERT arow acol a Verify result by computing and displaying the matrix product of A and IA um p i k SUM j a p i 3 ia p j k WRITE um brow bcol page TITLE VERIFY UNIT MATRIX END page END PROCEDURE test SELECT HEADING OFF The results of procedure test are displayed in the dialog below test INVERT arow acol a PAG s 1 ACOL 1 ACOL 2 ACOL 3 AROW 1 1 000000 1 000000 0 000000 AROW 2 1 000000 2 000000 1 000000 AROW 3 0 000000 1 000000 0 666667 VERIFY UNIT MATRIX PAG s 1 BCOL 1 BCOL 2 BCOL 3 BROW 1 1 000000 0 000000 20 000000 BROW 2 0 000000 1 000000 20 000000 BROW 3 0 000000 0 000000 1 000000 INVERT arow acol a PAGE 2 ACOL 1 ACOL 2 ACOL 3 AROW 1 0 500000 0 500000 0 000000 AROW 2 0 500000 1 000000 0 500000 AROW 3 0 000000 0 500000 0 333333 VERIFY UNIT MATRIX 199 Promula Application Development System User s Manual PAGE 2 BCOL 1 BCOL 2 BCOL 3 BROW 1 1 000000 0 000000 0 000000 BROW 2 0 000000 1 000000 0 000000 BROW
375. parameter a READ set statement or a relation to a variable on disk or in the program via the SELECT RELATION or DEFINE RELATION statements The set column headings are used by the BROWSE EDIT and WRITE statements to label the columns of multidimensional arrays diskopt The DISK Suboption As discussed above the user has the option to specify a DISK suboption for the KEY ROW or COLUMN options associated with a set definition This suboption is used when the values to be used for the option are located in an array file on disk The syntax of the disk option is DISK filid varid Where filid isthe identifier of an array file varid is the identifier of the vector variable whose values will be used for the stubs spanners or codes for set At run time filid is opened to the array file which contains the variable varid that contains the values to be used for the KEY ROW or COLUMN option Examples 167 Promula Application Development System User s Manual DEFINE SET product 6 6 products month 12 12 Months END SET The set product has six elements and is used to classify the product dimension of data The set month has twelve elements and classifies monthly data The sets product and month classify arrays of data organized by product and or by month For example the statements DEFINE VARIABLE sales product month Monthly Sales by Product msales month Total Monthly Sales ND VAR
376. pment System User s Manual COLN COL TYPE STRING 10 END DEFINE RELATION ORIGNL ROW REC RECN COLUMN COL COLN END READ A 12 E 1 100000E1 2 100000E1 3 100000E1 4 100000 1 5 100000E1 6 100000E1 1 200000 1 2 200000E1 3 200000E1 4 200000 1 5 200000E1 6 200000E1 1 300000 1 2 300000E1 3 300000E1 4 300000 1 5 300000 1 6 300000E1 1 400000 1 2 400000E1 3 400000E1 4 400000 1 5 400000 1 6 400000E1 READ B 12 E 1 100000E1 2 100000E1 3 100000E1 4 100000 1 5 100000E1 6 100000E1 1 200000 1 2 200000E1 3 200000E1 4 200000 1 5 200000E1 6 200000E1 1 300000 1 2 300000E1 3 300000E1 4 300000 1 5 300000 1 6 300000E1 1 400000E1 2 400000E1 3 400000E1 4 400000F1 5 400000 1 6 400000E1 READ RECN 10 ROW 1 ROW 2 ROW 3 ROW 4 READ COLN 10 COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 COL 5 COL 6 Example 5 Partial Copy array file to text file using local set selections The following example shows how to make a partial copy of a database definition in a text file on disk In this case local set selections will restrict which data elements are be output by the DATA option In order to use this feature the sets on the database and the local sets must have the same identifiers DEFINE FILE txtcpy TYPE TEXT TEXT File For Copy END FILE OPEN orignl original dba STATUS OLD OPE
377. portrait IBM Epson printer medium resolution landscape IBM Epson printer medium resolution portrait AlBM Bpson printer CGA high resolution screen dump 10 printer CGA medium resolution screen dump 11 HP LaserJet II printer high resolution landscape 12 HP LaserJet II printer medium resolution landscape 13 HP LaserJet II printer high resolution portrait 14 HP LaserJet II printer medium resolution portrait 15 VT 330 SIXEL graphics 16 240 REGIS graphics 17 IBM Epson printer VGA high resolution screen dump 18 LNO3 Plus Printer landscape PROMULA s default graphics configuration is as follows MEDIUM mode CGA medium resolution 3 color graphics adapter HIGH mode CGA high resolution black amp white graphics adapter PLOTTER mode IBM Epson printer high resolution landscape 5 1 Using the Graphics Configuration Program There are two primary functions of the graphics configuration program 1 Selecting a graphics configuration to be used by one of PROMULA s graphics modes 2 Managing custom graphics configurations 5 1 1 Selecting Graphics Configurations Configuring PROMULA s graphics is a simple two step process First you select the graphics mode you wish to configure Then you select the graphics configuration you want to assign to the selected mode 321 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Although it is possible to assign any de
378. pression on the right hand side of the equals sign is evaluated then passed to the variable on the left hand side of the equals sign For example if the worker plans to work about six hours out of each working day and five days out of each week the number of payable hours each month can be estimated by the following statements READ payhr 31 28 31 31 31 30 31 31 30 31 30 31 payhr 6 payhr 5 7 The first statement above reads into payhr the total number of days in each month The second statement converts the days per month to hours worked per month and stores the results in variable payhr PROMULA equations also may use PROMULA S extensive collection of functional operators One of the most useful of these is the array summation function SUM which can be used to sum up the values of multidimensional arrays For example to compute the monthly total expenditures it is necessary to sum over the expense categories of variable expns and save the results in a vector indexed by month expnm expnm m SUM e expns m e The expression above uses two dummy subscripts to drive the month and expense category dimensions The single equation above is functionally equivalent to the following 12 equations expnm 1 expns 1 1 expns 1 2 expns 1 3 expns 1 4 expns 1 5 expns 1 6 expnm 2 expns 2 1 expns 2 2 expns 2 3 expns 2 4 expns 2 5 expns 2 6 36 Promula Application Development System User s Manu
379. prompt by entering the word PROMULA You may include any PROMUDLA statement after the word PROMULA on the command line Several examples of this are shown below l PROMULA SELECT FOREGROUND GREEN COMMA OFF GRAPHICS HIGH This will load PROMULA set the foreground color to green turn the comma option for numeric displays off and select the HIGH graphics mode PROMULA will start in command mode not with the PROMULA Main Menu Promula Application Development System User s Manual 2 PROMULA RUN COMPILER myprog prm LIST DISK myprog lst PAUSE ON This will load PROMULA and compile the statements in the file myprog prm The statements in myprog prm and any output they generate will be saved on disk in the file myprog 1st After compiling the file PROMULA will be in command mode 3 PROMULA RUN PROGRAM myprog xeq This will load PROMULA and start the PROMULA application contained in the file myprog xeq 2 1 2 The PROMULA Main Menu If you start PROMULA with no command line statement PROMULA will load into memory and display its Main Menu The PROMULA Main Menu is designed to give you direct access to a variety of program development functions PROMULA V3 00 09 01 91 IBM PC Version Function Exit PROMULA Restart PROMULA Run the PROMULA Tutorial Edit a source file Compile a source program Run a program from the console Resume an interrupted program Run a program from a disk file R
380. ps of the operator Menu A screen template designed to help its user either pick from a list of options or view and or edit program variables There are two types of menus pick menus and data menus Parameter A variable that allows the transfer of values between a program variable and a procedure Procedure An ordered set of statements that is compiled and executed as a unit Program An ordered set of statements Relation A relationship between a set and a variable Its purpose is to assign descriptors to the set elements Segment A program segment that may be saved on disk for later execution Segments are usually linked into hierarchical tree structures to form large programs that would not otherwise fit in the working space Set An ordered set of elements Sets are used to dimension the values of array variables Sets are also used for sorting and selecting ranges of array values Statement A complete instruction in a PROMULA program 47 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Table 3 1 The Nouns or Objects of the PROMULA Language System A system of n real equations with n unknowns whose solution is obtained by solving simultaneously for the unknowns The equations may be linear or nonlinear Table A tabular display or report showing the values of several variables Variable A storage structure for information Variables are manipulated by the statements of a program and are related to one another by the equation
381. pulation size is set to 100 000 in the initial section The RATE section computes local variables BRTV and MRTV by linear interpolation of the values of the exogenous time series variables BRTYR and MRTYR and uses these values to compute time specific values for BTHS and MGNTS The value of DRGV is computed via function DRG then used in computing DTHS In the LEVEL section the results are transferred from the endogenous scalar variables POPT BTHS DTHS and MGNTS to the output time series variables POPYR BTHYR DTHYR MGTYR as specified in the LEVEL statement and the value of POPT is computed to reflect the changes that occurred during the last time interval The code required to implement the procedure above to model population values over time is displayed below DEFINE SET timeb 3 Set of Years for Birth Rate Trend IME 1990 1995 2000 timem 4 Set of Years for Migration Rate Trend TIME 1990 1993 year 16 Set of Years to Be Modeled IME 1990 2005 END SET 157 Promula Application Development System User s Manual DEFINE VARIABLI Annual Birth Rate VALUE 0 0065 DR Annual Death Rate VALUE 0 05 R Annual Migration Rate VALUE 0 001 BRTV Birth Rate Trend Value i RTV Migration Rate Trend Value DRGV Death Rate Graph Value BRTYR timeb Birth Rate Trend VALUE 1 0 8 0 8 RTYR t
382. quotes or a string variable containing the name of the disk file where the code that you wish to compile or execute is stored The RUN statement is similar to the RUN PROGRAM statement for executing PROMULA programs from inside a running application and to the RUN COMPILER RUN SOURCE and RUN COMMAND statements for compiling PROMUDLA source codes But there are several subtle differences RUN and RUN PROGRAM may both be used to run PROMULA executable programs When file is an executable PROMULA application the RUN statement will suspend execution of the current application and hide its information before running file Since the current application stays resident there must be enough room for both file and the original application in memory for this to work properly The original application will be automatically reloaded when execution of ile is complete and a STOP statement is executed The RUN PROGRAM statement clears the original application from memory before loading file In addition RUN can be executed from inside a procedure RUN PROGRAM cannot RUN and RUN COMPILER may both be used to compile PROMULA source codes When i1e is a PROMULA source code the RUN statement will suspend execution of the current application and hide its information before compiling file The original application will be automatically reloaded when compilation of ile is complete and a STOP statement is executed The RUN COMPILER statement clears the current app
383. r Definition 51 Promula Application Development System User s Manual A formula consisting of character variables and character operators Remarks A character expression has character operands Some character expressions have character values others have numeric values PROMULA has the following character operators OPERATOR EXPRESSION MEANING Concatenate B to COMPARE COMPARE Compare string to string B return the value 1 if A equals B otherwise return the value 0 Relational Evaluates the relationship between A and B the AEQB ANEB result is 1 if the relationship is true otherwise the ALEB ALTB result is 0 Here A and B are string or numeric expressions If either or B is a character expression the result is the string concatenation of B to A If both A and B are numeric expressions the result is the arithmetic sum of A and B Examples The dialog below illustrates some examples of character expressions and of mixed numeric character expressions DEFINE VARIABLE A YPE STRING 20 B YPE STRING 20 YPE STRING 40 V YPE REAL 8 0 END VARIABLE READ A The cow jumped ov READ B er the moon C A B WRITE C The cow jumped over the moon V 10 C V 20 V WRITE C 210 The equation 52 Promula Application Development System User s Manual V COMPARE A B r
384. r type is the format type of var This type REAL INTEGER STRING etc must match the type of dvar For REAL type variables the width and decimal specifications of var are not required to match those of dvar For all other types the width specifications of var and dvar must match file is the identifier of an array file In order to access dvar through var the disk file specified when file is physically opened must contain dvar dvar is the identifier of the actual disk variable that you want to access through var dsetsi is an optional list of set identifiers scalar variables or integer constants one for each dimension of dvar These define the local sets and pointers which correspond to the disk sets subscripting the dvar dsets2 is an optional list of set identifiers and asterisks one for each dimension of dvar These define the correspondence between the local sets and the disk sets which actually subscript dvar Asterisks are used to indicate which dimensions of the disk variable are basepointed Let s take a look at how to apply this extended syntax to our example The database definition is the same DEFINE SET af dsub 500 Survey Subject dqst 100 Survey Question dyer 10 Survey Year END SET DEFINE VARIABLE af data dsub dqst dyer Survey Responses by Subject Question and Year ND VARIABLE The programmer wants to be able to dynamically access the data
385. r s buffer Up arrow move up line editor s buffer recall previous entries 19 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Down arrow move down line editor s buffer Home clear the input line PgUp move to top of line editor s buffer PgDn move to bottom of line editor s buffer Tab move cursor 8 spaces to the right Shift tab move cursor 8 spaces to the left Right arrow move cursor 1 space to the right Left arrow move cursor 1 space to the left Ctrl Right arrow move cursor to end of line Ctrl Left arrow move cursor to beginning of line Delete delete the character over the cursor Backspace delete character to left and move cursor 1 space to left Insert toggle insert overwrite mode 2 1 6 Printer Control You can send output to your printer by doing the following 1 Issue the command SELECT PRINTER ON This will send all PROMULA output to the printer until you issue the command SELECT PRINTER OFF 2 OnanIBM compatible computer simultaneously press the Ctrl key and the PrtSc key This will send all PROMULA output to the printer until you turn the print toggle off by simultaneously pressing Ctrl PrtSc again 3 OnanIBM compatible computer simultaneously press the Shift key and the PrtSc key This will send to the printer the contents of the current screen Other printer control options are discussed in Chapter 3 under the SELECT option statement Some printer control commands will not work unless your printer is on
386. r segments MAIN and seg1 seg11 OPEN SEGMENT segment xeq STATUS OLD READ SEGMENT MAIN OPEN SEGMENT segl xeq STATUS OLD READ SEGMENT segl OPEN SEGMENT segll xeq STATUS NEW DEFINE SEGMENT 5 911 KKKKKK ck kk ck kk k B gin S gm nt S 911 kckckckckck KK KKK KK DEFINE VARIABLE varll row page Data for Segment Segll ND EFINE PROCEDURE procll WRITE You are in Segment Segll ND 11 UO n SCR era End Segment Segll KKKKKKKKKKKKKK END SEGMENT Segll STOP The STOP statements at the end of all the files are used during multi file compilations they return control to a job file that contains a series of RUN statements that compile the segments of the program in the right order A job file can be a convenient way to automatically compile all segments after you have changed segment MAIN A simple sequential job file is shown below Your own job files can be more elaborate allowing you to select individual segment files for compilation The important thing to remember is that if you compile a parent segment all segments under it must also be compiled in order to insure that the beginnings and endings of Value Definition and Procedure storage for each segment are correct and consistent WRITE RUNNING segment prm RUN segment prm WRITE RUNNING segl prm RUN segl prm WRITE RUNNING segll prm
387. r than dynamic access It seems the programmer must trade off ease of programming for execution speed There is however a way to have the best of both worlds As described in Chapter 3 the OPEN file statement can open array files as STATUS VIRTUAL STATUS DYNAMIC Files opened STATUS VIRTUAL use paged virtual access In this mode large pieces of the database are transferred from disk to memory automatically by PROMULA The efficiency of paged virtual access depends on the structure of the database variables and the way in which the virtual or disk variables are defined and used by the program Files opened STATUS DYNAMIC use automatic dynamic access In this mode the database is read into memory once when the file is opened and then it is written back out once when the file is cleared Of course these methods do not provide the same degree of control that is possible when data access is described via the READ DISK and WRITE DISK statements Furthermore paged virtual and automatic dynamic access can require a great deal of memory and can only be used with small databases or with machines that have a large or virtual memory 311 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 4 1 3 4 Increasing PROMULA s Scratch Storage Area Paged virtual and automatic dynamic access can only be used with small databases or with machines that have a large memory There is however a way to increase the paging space also called scratch st
388. r the set labels may be displayed by the various WRITE statements as shown in the dialog below RITE sta dentifier Description H OHIO L FLORIDA L ILLINOIS ELECT yer 1 RITE a 2 VALUES BY AGE STATE AND YEAR 1920 239 Promula Application Development System User s Manual STATE STATE STATE OF OF OF OHIO FLORIDA ILLINOIS 00 20 5 160 7 664 6 141 21 40 6 456 2 334 5 625 41 60 295 2 024 7 480 WRITE a sta age yer VALUES BY AGE STATE AND YEAR 1920 1 AGE 2 AGE 3 OHIO 5 160 6 456 7 295 FLORIDA 7 664 2 334 2 024 ILLINOIS 6 141 5 625 7 480 See the DEFINE SET DEFINE RELATION and SELECT RELATION statements for more information on set descriptors 3 7 75 READ VALUE segment Purpose Reads the information of a program or program segment from disk Only the values of the segment variables are read To read both code and data values use the READ SEGMENT statement Syntax READ VALUE seg Remarks seg is the identifier of the segment whose values are being read from disk Use the OPEN SEGMENT statement before using the READ VALUE segment statement Examples The code below opens a segment file on disk called wrvalseg xeq This segment is given the default name MAIN since it is a top level segment Segment MAIN contains the single variable a OPEN SEGMENT
389. rates the BROWSE variable options DEFINE SET 117 Promula Application Development System User s Manual yr 5 The Years END SET DEFINE VARIABLE yval yr The Year Values value yr A Time Series TYPE REAL 30 2 END VARIABLE DEFINE RELATION TIME yr yval END RELATION yval y 69 y value 10 y BROWSE value TOTAL A Time Series Total 150 00 70 10 00 71 20 00 72 30 00 T3 40 00 74 50 00 BROWSE value PERCENT yr Percent Distribution of A Time Series Total 100 00 70 6 67 71 13 33 72 20 00 73 26 67 74 33 323 BROWSE value GROWTH 1 Growth Rate in A Time Series 71 100 00 72 50 00 73 33 33 74 25 00 BROWSE value CHANGE 1 Percent Change in A Time Series 71 100 00 72 50 00 73 334 33 74 25 00 BROWSE value MOVING 2 Moving Average for A Time Series 71 15 00 72 25 00 73 35 00 74 45 00 118 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 3 The example below illustrates how to browse a variable directly from an array disk file Suppose you have created an array database and you wish to access one of its variables The name of the database is array dba and the name of the variable is sales The example below shows how to browse the variable sales directly In fact the 11e variable notation may be used to access any variable in an a
390. read values into all the data fields of the menu This command is used when the values of all the data fields in the menu are to be changed A data menu is a screen display which is designed to help its user to edit data The fields in a data menu are previously defined in a DEFINE MENU statement Syntax READ menu vars Remarks menu is identifier of a data menu vars isa list of variable identifiers that contain the values of the data fields being edited The variables in the list must be arranged in the same order as the data fields in the menu to which they correspond Data menus contain a number of data fields to be edited by the user In the DEFINE MENU statement each data field is denoted by a series of contiguous at signs or tilde signs one for each character of the data value The data fields are ordered from left to right and from top to bottom of the menu template Upon execution the data menu becomes a screen display that has the first data field highlighted by the bounce bar The system is now in edit mode and is ready to accept new data for the data fields in the menu To begin editing of the first 236 Promula Application Development System User s Manual highlighted data field press the Enter key and enter the new value as prompted at the bottom of the menu Continue this process until all the data fields have been edited Remarks The use of the READ menu command is similar to the EDIT me
391. relation statement A prompt at the bottom of the Prompt Screen describes how to browse and make selections from the list The keyboard action during execution of this statement is described below Browsing keys Pressing the arrow keys or the PgUp and PgDn keys moves a highlight bar through the list of set elements The current set element is highlighted in cyan if it has not been selected or in red if it has already been selected These default colors can be modified by a DEFINE WINDOW and OPEN WINDOW statement 272 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Ins key Pressing the Ins key inserts a set element into the selection vector and causes its sequence number to be marked by highlighting it in green or in a color defined via a previous DEFINE WINDOW statement Del key Pressing the Del key cancels a previous selection Enter key Pressing the Enter key activates selection of the currently highlighted set elements and allows the execution to continue If no elements are high lighted when Enter is pressed the set remains in the same state it was in before the SELECT SET statement End key Pressing the End key allows the user to exit without making any selections Examples The following example demonstrates the SELECT SET statement DEFINE SET dir 4 4 Directions END SET DEFINE VARIABLE dirn dir ROW LABELS TYPE STRING 10 END VARIABLE READ dirn 8 ORTH SOUTH
392. rements over which the moving average is computed The moving av erage for time t is computed from values for time t t n 1 Where the t s are consecutive time points They are not consecutive time set selections based on a local setting of the time set Rather they are time points as defined by the time values related to the set subscripting var In the tabular display the words Moving Average for are placed in front of the original title unless the TITLE option is specified If the keyword TRANSPOSE is included with the statement and the structure for the display is not explicitly specified the display will be transposed This means that the first and last dimensions of the default display will be swapped Upon execution the BROWSE variable statement clears the screen displays the first page of the array and issues the following message at the bottom of the display End Exit Fn Shift Fn PgUp PgDn Home Arrows Browse The highlighted portions of the message represent the following options Fn press the Fn function key to browse up the nth dimension of the array where n varies from 1 to 10 The F1 key browses up the 1st dimension the F2 key browses up the 2nd dimension and so forth Shift Fn simultaneously press the Shift and Fn keys to browse down the nth dimension of the array The Shift F1 key browses down the 1st dimension the Shift F2 key browses down the 2nd dimension etc Browsing keys The four movement arrows at the r
393. res in this Chapter for more information on these constructs 3 1 23 Variable Definition A place for storing numeric or character information A variable may have a single value or a number of values A single valued variable is called a scalar A variable with many values is called an array Remarks A variable has the following characteristics A unique identifier A structure A value or values A format type An optional descriptor A storage type The identifier of a variable is its symbolic name It may have up to six alphabetic and numeric characters the first being alphabetic No special characters are allowed Any characters over six are ignored Two variables may not share the same identifier The structure of an array variable is defined by the sets or numeric constants classifying its dimensions An array may have up to ten dimensions or subscripts A scalar variable has no internal structure since it only has one value The values of a variable are the pieces of information it contains The number of values in a scalar variable is one The number of values in an array variable is equal to the product of the sizes of the sets structuring it These values are arranged in rows columns and pages The rows are classified by the first set of the variable the columns are classified by the second set the pages by the third set and so forth The Format Type of a variable is the kind of information that it contains PROMULA has e
394. riable determines where it resides in RAM memory or on disk and whether or not its values can be cleared from memory Depending on where their values are stored variables are of three types fixed scratch and disk In addition there are two pseudo storage types virtual and dynamic associated with disk access Additional information about the storage types is presented in Chapter 4 The DEFINE VARIABLE statement creates new variables and databases The READ statements put values into variables from a file or the keyboard 85 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The EDIT statements allow a program user to interactively modify variable values The WRITE BROWSE and PLOT statements display variables in tabular or graphical form Equations modify the values of variables Functions define relationships between pairs of variables Relations define relationships between sets and variables The DO IF DO UNTIL and DO WHILE statements use the values of variables to control program flow The Statistical Functions generate statistical reports based on the values of selected variables Examples 1 Defining fixed variables in memory DEFINE VARIABLE A row col A 2 Dimensional Array B A Scalar A String Variable YPE STRING 8 D A Date YPE DATE 8 M A Money Variable YPE MONEY 10 END VARIABLE 2 Defining scratch variables in memory DEFINE VARIABLE
395. riable for accessing single elements of dsk DISK filea dsk pp END VARIABLE 282 Promula Application Development System User s Manual defines two variables dsk and scr The disk variable dsk is a vector of 1000 elements on the disk file named test dba The variable scr is a dynamic local variable that is related to dsk The READ DISK and WRITE DISK statements transfer a specific value from and to disk as illustrated in the dialog below scr 0 dsk i i pp 4 READ DISK scr WRITE scr A Scratch Variable in Memory 4 scr 6 WRITE DISK scr WRITE dsk L dsk pp A Disk Variable on filea 6 3 7 103 WRITE file Purpose Write data to a text file or a random file Syntax 1 Write a record of data to a random file WRITE file Syntax 2 Write to a text file WRITE file varl fmt1 var2 fmt2 Remarks file isthe identifier of the file you are writing to varl isthe identifier of the variable whose data is first on each data record fmtl 15 format specification for var1 and has the following syntax p isan integer indicating the starting column on each data line where the value for var1 begins The backslash means start writing in column If omitted the value begins in column 1 w is an integer indicating the width of the value and it means write the next w columns A negative width parameter left justifies the v
396. riables defined above Notice how PROMULA uses the type specification and other information in the variable definitions to control the displays generated by the WRITE variable statement WRITE expns Monthly Expenses by Category EXPS 1 EXPS 2 EXPS 3 EXPS 4 EXPS 5 EXPS 6 ONS 1 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 ONS 2 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 ONS 3 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 ONS 4 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 ONS 5 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 ONS 6 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 ONS 7 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 ONS 8 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 ONS 9 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 ONS 10 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 ONS 11 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 ONS 12 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 WRITE payhr Payable Hours per Month hr MONS 1 0 MONS 2 0 MONS 3 0 MONS 4 0 MONS 5 0 MONS 6 0 MONS 7 0 MONS 8 0 MONS 9 0 MONS 10 0 MONS 11 0 MONS 12 0 WRITE taxes Fraction of Pay Lost to Taxes 0 0000 WRITE wager Hourly Wage Rate hr 0 00 Figure 2 9 Display of some of the variables defined in the Budget Program For a more comprehensive discussion of variables refer to Chapter 3 of this manual especially the sections covering the PROMULA Noun Variable and the DEFINE VARIABLE statement 2 2 1 5 Relating Sets and Variables Although the variables defined above are fully functional the
397. rn page headings on plots on or off The headings will only be produced if a SELECT HEADING ON statement has also been executed The default is ON GFORMAT ON OFF to turn the gformat feature of the report generator on or off When GFORMAT ON numeric quantities that are too large to fit in the specified display width are written in exponential notation When GFORMAT OFF numeric quantities that are too large are written as asterisks The default is OFF GRAPHICS CHARACTER MEDIUM HIGH PLOTTER To select the mode for PROMULA graphics When GRAPHICS CHARACTER PROMULA s PLOT statement will produce character plots CHARACTER mode is appropriate for both monochrome and graphics monitors This is the default 261 Promula Application Development System User s Manual When GRAPHICS MEDIUM medium resolution plots are produced The default MEDIUM graphics mode is three color medium resolution CGA graphics When GRAPHICS HIGH high resolution plots are produced The default HIGH graphics mode is monochrome high resolution CGA graphics When GRAPHICS PLOTTER plots will be sent to the printer plotter The default PLOTTER PRINTER graphics mode is high resolution monochrome graphics on an Epson compatible dot matrix printer The actual behavior of each of the graphics modes depends on PROMULA s graphics configuration The information above applies to PROMULA s default configuration See Chapter 6 for a discussion of configuring graphics H
398. roducing displays of input data and output information Once a program has transformed the input data into useful results it is desirable to produce a report The report may be text or graphics displayed on the screen printed with a printer or saved in an external file on disk 5 Interface Design This includes creating a functional attractive interface through which others can use the program easily and effectively In the following discussion these five basic programming tasks and other important concepts of application programming are introduced in the context of a simple example called The Budget Program This simple application helps its user determine how much extra money he she will have after paying all of his her expenses each month The budget program is smaller than the typical PROMULA application but it can serve to illustrate PROMULA s basic programming constructs and techniques 2 2 1 Data Definition KEY TOPICS 1 Variables Scalars and Arrays 2 Planning the Data Structures for an Application 3 Defining Sets 4 Defining Variables 5 Relating Sets and Variables 2 2 1 1 Variables Scalars and Arrays One of the most essential steps in creating an application program is data definition the process of creating a framework for program inputs and outputs that is convenient and logical to work with To do this the programmer must specify the types of information the application will manipulate and must de
399. rogram in batch mode i e via commands in a batch input file on disk In contrast Main Menu option 6 is used to execute a compiled PROMULA program interactively i e directly from the console Selecting Main Menu option 8 results in the sample dialog shown below Enter the filename of the batch input file DEMO INP Where do you want the batch output listing C onsole P rinter D isk D Enter a filename for the batch output listing DEMO OUT Enter the filename of the program to be executed DEMO XEQ DEMO INP is a file containing the responses required by the program DEMO XEQ and its contents are shown below 13200 12100 14800 16200 15200 17200 18060 18960 19900 20900 21950 23050 9200 8600 10400 11300 10700 12100 12700 13350 14000 14700 15440 16210 DEMO OUT is the disk file where the output is saved This file is shown in Figure 2 4 and can be printed later or browsed using a text editor The batch output shown here is the same as the output produced by running DEMO XEQ interactively and spooling the run directly to the file DEMO OUT 12 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Pleas nter the monthly sales figures 13200 12100 14800 16200 15200 17200 18060 18960 19900 20900 21950 23050 Pleas nter the monthly cost figures 9200 8600 10400 11300 10700 12100 12700 13350 14000 14700 15440 16210 Monthly Profit and Loss
400. rom other program segments it is at inheritance level 0 Segments Seg1 Seg2 and Seg3 inherit information from segment MAIN they are at inheritance level 1 Segment Seg11 inherits information from segments Seg1 and MAIN it is at inheritance level 2 Segment inheritance in the context of the diagram means the following to access information in a segment of inheritance level n you must first gain access to the information in the segment at inheritance n 1 that is directly linked to the segment at level n In addition segments at the same level of inheritance cannot share information directly i e they cannot be in memory simultaneously Parallel segments can share information only through a common parent segment and or through shared databases In the program of Figure 4 2 segment inheritance is manifested in terms of the following possible working space configurations 315 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Segment MAIN may exist in working space alone Segment Seg1 can exist in working space with segment MAIN alone or with MAIN and Seg11 Segment Seg11 can exist in working space only with MAIN and Seg1 Segment Seg2 can exist in working space only with segment MAIN Segment Seg3 can exist in working space only with segment MAIN Segments 1 Seg2 and Seg3 cannot be in your working space simultaneously segments share the information in the master segment MAIN thus all segments have access to the infor
401. rray file See Chapter 4 for more information on working with PROMULA s array files DEFINE FILE EI END OPEN f1 array dba Once the array file is opened its variables may be accessed directly using the file variable notation For example the statement BROWSE f1 sales displays the disk variable sales on file 1 as shown below Sales by Year 1000 1 10 000 12 000 13 000 End Exit Fn Shift Fn PgUp PgDn Home Arrows Browse The syntax for such direct reference of disk variables is file var where file is the array file containing the variable var that you wish to access The notation file set may be used to refer to sets on an array file Variables on a disk file may also be browsed directly by using the COPY file IMAGE statement 4 The example below illustrates the DISPLAY option of the BROWSE variable statement There no values shown for rows and 6 of the display because variable avar contains a zero in these rows DEFINE SET tst 2 Tests grd 10 Grade Ranges END SET DEFINE VARIABLE cnt grd tst TYPE REAL 8 1 Frequency by class and grade range grdn grd TYPE STRING 20 Grade Range Names dvar grd YPE REAL 8 0 Display Flag VALUE 1 END DO grd 119 Promula Application Development System User s Manual READ grdn 13 END grd CLASS A 100 75 74 50 49 25 24 0 CLASS B 100 75 74 50 4
402. rs The value zero of course is valid except in denominators of divisions where it does not make sense or in logarithms The PROMULA system can be configured to allow these types of math errors see the SELECT MATHERROR statement Examples 1 Given the following definitions DEFINE VARIABLE A A real value B An integer value TYPE INTEGER 8 END A 10 6 the equation B A rounds the value of a to yield the value 11 75 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 2 Theequation B IFIX A on the other hand truncates the value of a to yield B 10 3 1 13 Parameter Definition A parameter is a numeric variable which is used locally within a procedure and is used to transfer data values to and from the procedure Parameters are used to transfer data values to and from procedures Parameters may be scalars or multidimensional arrays but they cannot be passed as string type variables A parameter identifier cannot be defined or referenced outside a procedure See DEFINE PARAMETER and DEFINE PROCEDURE for more details and examples 3 1 14 Procedure Definition A procedure is a group of statements that are compiled as a unit under a unique identifier for later reference and execution Remarks A procedure definition or compilation is initiated with the DEFINE PROCEDURE statement and is terminated by the END statement Procedure execution is initiated by enteri
403. rth If you have more than ten selection fields then press the Alt or Shift key together with one of the ten Function keys to get up to twenty selections For example pressing Alt F1 picks the 11th selection Popup menus give you the ability to define a network of menus that function as a unit They also allow you to create menus that use any printable key for selections and to define context sensitive help for each selection field A popup menu definition consists of a top level menu definition and zero or more submenu definitions Each menu definition consists of a selection screen and a group of FIELD statements Each selection screen in a popup menu contains a number of selection fields Each selection field in the menu is text that is bracketed by two backslashes V The selection fields are ordered from 1 to n as you go from left to right and from top to bottom of the menu template Each selection field in the selection screen of a popup menu requires a FIELD statement The FIELD statement contains the following information a descriptor for the selection field a key code that allows the user to select the field with a single keystroke an optional reference to field specific on line help and an action code that is used to branch to alternate execution paths depending on the user s selection Dope When defined a popup menu is associated with a pair of windows The first window will display the selection screen s the second window wil
404. s displayed output may consist of one or more of the following COEFF cf to store the regression coefficients in variable cf TVALUE tv to store the Student s t statistic for the regression coefficients in variable tv STDERR se to store the standard errors of regression coefficients in array variable se STDDEV sd to store the standard deviation s of regression model s in variable sd RSQUAR rs to store the R Square s of regression model s in variable rs The output variables should be dimensioned so that they can pick up the desired regression results see the example below 203 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The following values may be reported stored 1 The regression coefficient Bi Student s t statistic and standard error for each independent variable in the model and for the intercept Bo referred to as CONS in the report The overall variance and standard deviation of the regression model The adjusted coefficient of correlation between the observed and predicted values of the dependent variable A title Regression Analysis Results is printed at the top of each page Subtitles consisting of the row descriptors for sets specified in set s appear when more than one report page is produced Examples D EFINE S grp 2 tim 12 trm 3 END SET ET Test Groups Time Points Regression Terms TIME 1 12 Independent Variables
405. s of a program Window _ A display area for program input and or output Basic Windowing supports two functional screens the Action Window upper half of the screen and the Comment Window lower half of the screen Advanced Windowing supports a system of four functional screens Main Prompt Comment and Help The appearance location and behavior of each functional screen is set by defining and opening a specific window for it 3 1 1 Equation Purpose Makes the value or values of a variable equal to the value or values of a numeric or character expression Syntax var subs expression subs Remarks var is a variable identifier subs is a list of set identifiers set element codes or numbers or dummy subscripts These subscripts are usually used with array variables to denote multiple equations that apply to the cells of the multidimensional arrays expression is a numeric or character expression Examples 1 Single valued equations Below a b and c are scalars because there are no sets used in their definitions Each equation is only done once and only one value is assigned DEFINE VARIABLE END VARIABLE ais equal to the sum of b and c a b EXP c ais equal to b times the exponential of c aisequalto 1 if b is less than c otherwise ais equal to 0 2 Multiple valued equations using implicit subscripts 48 Promula Application Development Sy
406. s one of its subscripts thus it cannot be a scalar The variable var may be multidimensional i e it may have additional subscripts other than set In such case the sorting is done over the dimension corresponding to the set with all the other sets dimensioning the array fixed at a single element If not otherwise specified by a SELECT set statement all dimensions other than set are fixed at the first element of their selection vector After a sort operation the sorted order of set remains in effect until a SORT or SELECT SET statement is executed If var is a string variable the elements of set are sorted alphabetically Examples The following program illustrates the SORT statement DEFINE SET row 10 col 5 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE varl row A 1 Dimensional Array var2 row col A 2 Dimensional Array END VARIABLE READ varl 3 45 56 19 21 34 97 89 52 21 READ var2 24 5 56 34 21 98 76 34 27 14 11 23 41 17 32 277 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 541099 2 20 51 49 48 47 46 11 31 33 22 11 33 15 67 22 44 79 21 59 85 69 33 99 1 98 49 The variable values in their default orders may be displayed by WRITE variable statements WRITE varl A l Dimensional Array ROW 1 3 ROW 2 45 ROW 3 56 ROW 4 19 ROW 5 21 ROW 6 34 ROW 7 97 ROW 8 89 ROW 9 52 ROW 10 21 WRITE var2 A 2 Dimensional Array COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL
407. s than y END IF END PROCEDURE doif A dialog with procedure doi is displayed below x doif x 1 20 3 40 x is less than y 2 4 x 4 5 doif x 4 50 y 3 40 x is greater than y x 3 4 doif x 3 40 y 3 40 x is equal to y 189 Promula Application Development System User s Manual In this example the procedure doif checks whether the variable x is less than equal to or greater than the variable y and issues a message appropriately 3 7 44 DO IF END Purpose Executes a group of statements once if the user presses the END key in response to a prompt or pick menu Syntax DO IF END statement END Remarks statement is any executable statement no definitions including another DO statement The group of executable statements between the DO IF END and the END statement are executed if the user presses the END key in response to a prompt or menu typically from a SELECT SET SELECT ENTRY SELECT indirect SELECT variable or SELECT menu statement that uses the End key as an escape This test can help you avoid complications that may come up when the user ends from a selection statement without making a valid selection After these statements are executed PROMULA automatically re executes the statement preceding the DO IF END block Examples 1 The procedure below uses a DO IF END statement to force the user to make a set selection via the
408. s the Prompt Screen If a user defined window is not opened to the Prompt Screen PROMULA displays prompts at the bottom of the Main Screen 90 Promula Application Development System User s Manual If a window is opened as the Prompt Screen it will automatically appear on the screen whenever PROMULA needs to display prompts 3 COMMENT The Comment Screen is used for displaying the output of the WRITE COMMENT and BROWSE COMMENT statements If a user defined window is not opened to the Comment Screen PROMULA displays comments in the Main Screen 4 ERROR The Error Screen is used for displaying execution error messages If a user defined window is not opened to the Error Screen PROMULA displays an error message in the Main Screen 5 HELP The Help Screen is used to display on line help The Help Screen will contain the display produced by the BROWSE DIALOG and BROWSE TOPIC statements In addition on line help in response to an Alt H is displayed in the Help Screen If a window is not opened to the Help Screen PROMULA uses the Main Screen for displaying on line help If a window is opened as the Help Screen it will automatically appear on the screen whenever PROMULA needs to display the output of help statements The window parameter of the OPEN WINDOW statement specifies which user defined window should be assigned to a functional screen A Window is a rectangular section of the screen The name location appearance and pop
409. s useful for displaying output results in menu form Syntax WRITE menu vars Remarks menu is the identifier of a data menu vars isa list of variable identifiers that contain the values of the data fields to be displayed The variables in the list must be arranged in the same order as the data fields in the menu to which they correspond A data menu is a template which is designed to help its user edit and display data The fields in a data menu are previously defined in a DEFINE MENU statement 286 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Data menus contain a number of data fields to be displayed by the user In the DEFINE MENU statement each data field is denoted by a series of contiguous at signs or tilde signs equal in number to the desired number of digits in the data field The data fields are ordered from left to right and from top to bottom of the menu template Upon execution the data menu is displayed on the screen The values of the data fields are displayed in the places marked by or characters Remarks The use of the WRITE menu statement is especially helpful if you want to display output data in menu format You can send the results of a WRITE menu statement to the printer or to a file using a SELECT OUTPUT and SELECT PRINTER ON statement The default length of the output is 25 lines this may be modified by a SELECT lines statement 3 7 106 WRITE set Purpose Shows the e
410. separate file If you choose to do this there are several important rules you must follow 1 In order to use any structures defined in a segment you must first physically open the disk file that contains the segment then read in the segment by executing OPEN SEGMENT and READ SEGMENT statements 2 If you change and recompile a parent segment you must also recompile all the segments under it Lower level segments and parallel segments however can be recompiled without having to recompile their parent segments 3 After returning from a lower level segment you must reopen the parent segment before you can write to it with a WRITE VALUE segment statement Example The following example shows how the source code of SEGMENT XEQ would have to be modified in order for each segment to reside in a separate disk file The file containing segment MAIN is shown below Notice that it contains a DEFINE PROGRAM statement but no DEFINE SEGMENT statement Procedure proc in this multi file version of SEGMENT XEO has been modified by adding the appropriate OPEN SEGMENT statements before the READ SEGMENT statements that execute the lower level segments MAIN OPEN SEGMENT segment xeq STATUS NEW ckckckck ck ck ck ck kc k kk kk kk Begin Main Segment kckckckckck ckckckckckck DEFINE PROGRAM A Segmented Program with a Database 317 Promula Application Development System User
411. sion Functional Definition An expression involving at least one functional operator Remarks The built in functional operators of PROMULA are of three types 53 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 1 Arithmetic functions 2 File management functions 3 The INDIRECT function Also you may define your own functions by using the DEFINE PROCEDURE statement and parameters or by using the DEFINE FUNCTION statement 3 1 5 1 Arithmetic Functions The built in arithmetic functional operators of PROMULA are listed in Table 3 2 below Table 3 2 The Arithmetic Functional Operators of PROMULA Functional Expression MEANING ABS x Absolute value of x ARCCOS x Angle in radians whose cosine is x ARCSIN x Angle in radians whose sine is x ARCTAN x Angle in radians whose tangent is x COMPARE x y Compare string x to string y returns the value 1 if x y otherwise it returns the value 0 Note COMPARE is obsolete use x EQ y COS x Cosine of x x in radians COTAN x Cotangent of x x in radians EXP x Exponential of x eX FLOOR x Integer nearest to x that does not exceed x IFIX x Integer nearest to x that does not exceed the magnitude of x LN x Natural logarithm of x base e e 2 718282 LOG x Common logarithm of x base 10 MAX i x i Maximum element of vector x 1 MIN i x i Minimum element of vector x 1 PRODUCT subs x subs Multiply over the elements of x where
412. skit ND PROCEDURE askit Another simple way of letting the user select from a fixed set of options is with a Pick Menu The code below illustrates how to implement a pick menu that offers the same options as procedure askit above DEFINE VARIABLI choice ND VARIABLI 5 EH DEFINE MENU pickmenu 1 NExit 2 NEdit inputs 3 Calculate 4 NView outputs 42 Promula Application Development System User s Manual DEFINE PROCEDURE menuit SELECT pickmenu choice DO IF PICK EQ 1 BREAK menuit ELSE PICK EQ 2 statements for editing inputs ELSE PICK EQ 3 statements for calculations SE PICK EQ 4 E statements for viewing outputs ND IF enuit ND PROCEDURE menuit ti 3 2 2 5 2 2 Selecting Variables Often it is desirable to help the user select a program variable for input or output operations PROMULA has two constructs that may be used to implement this type of selection The first is an extension of the ASK statement the second is the SELECT indirect statement For example assume your program has three variables a b and c and you want to help the user select one of the variables for display on the screen The simplest way to do this is with a SELECT indirect statement The statements required to use the SELECT indirect statement in this capacity are listed below DEFINE VARIA
413. specification of sets controls the analysis of the variables specified in vars by defining the index of the observations and the order of pages produced The last set in sets specifies the index of the observations the preceding sets specify the order in which pages of the report are displayed The ordering of report pages corresponds to the specification of the sets in sets from left to right left varying the fastest The default value for sets is the reverse of the set specification used in defining the highest dimensional variable in vars with the first set in the definition indexing the observations and the remaining sets heading report pages vars is a list of variable identifiers specifying the arrays to be regressed The list may also contain the time parameter TIME if all the variables in vars have a time series set as one of their indexes The first variable specified in vars will be treated as the dependent variable Y the remaining variables will be treated as the independent regressors Xj vars must contain at least two variables One dimensional arrays vectors are used in regression calculations directly Two and higher dimensional arrays are partitioned into sets of observations and a separate report is generated for each page and column of the highest dimensional array in vars output 18 a list of output specifiers that allow the storage of regression results in program variables If any output is stored in variables no report i
414. ssions of the PROMULA noun Set and the PROMULA statements SELECT set SELECT SET SELECT ENTRY SELECT set IF and SELECT VARIABLE 2 2 3 3 Sorting Sets One of the most common data manipulation tasks is sorting PROMULA provides a straight forward and flexible means of sorting of multidimensional data For example in order to sort the months of the year set mons using the monthly income values variable incom in ascending order the following statement can be used SORT mons USING incom 34 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The statement above tells PROMULA to sort set mons in ascending order using the values of variable incom In order for the SORT statement to work the variable used as the key for the sort must be dimensioned by the set being sorted To sort the set in descending order based on income use the keyword DESCENDING after the word SORT SORT DESCENDING mons USING incom To restore a set to its default order use the SELECT set statement It is also possible to use multidimensional arrays as the key for a sort as well For example in order to sort the months of the year using the monthly food expense values the following statements can be used SELECT exps 2 SORT mons USING expns The first statement above selects the second column of array expns this column of the array contains the monthly food expense values The second statement tells PROMULA to sort set mons
415. statement COMPUTE rec N 10 The set may be restored to its original size by the statements COMPUTE rec R rec M SELECT rec There are many examples of equations in the discussion of the PROMULA nouns Equation and Expression 3 7 23 COPY Purpose 1 Copies the data and structure of an array file into another array file or copies the definition and optionally the data of an array file to a text file or to an output device such as the screen or the printer 2 Copies the definition of an array file into memory so its variables can be directly accessed by PROMULA without having to include the file structure definition or any disk variable definitions in your program See the discussion of data management in Chapter 4 Syntax 1 COPY filel INTO file2 varspec DATA RAW Remarks Syntax 1 is typically used to make full or partial copies of an array database or to generate a listing of its structure and or data filel is the identifier of the source input file This must be an existing array file i e has been opened with STATUS OLD file2 is the identifier of the target output file This must be a new array or text file i e has been opened with STATUS NEW If the INTO i1e2 option is omitted the results of the copy will be written to the current output device s screen and or printer varspec list of variables in file1 to be copied and may take one of the following forms 125 Pr
416. status If STORE DYNAMIC files opened with STATUS OLD or with no explicit status specification are opened with the DYNAMIC status See Chapter 4 for more information TRANSPOSE ON OFF to control the orientation of array variable displays produced by PROMULA Setting TRANSPOSE ON specifies that arrays should be displayed in column major order For example if TRANSPOSE ON a one dimensional array will be displayed across the columns instead of down the rows a two dimensional array will be displayed with its first set dimensioning the columns and the second set dimensioning the rows a three dimensional array will be displayed with its third set dimensioning the rows and the first set dimensioning the pages In other words multidimensional arrays will be displayed as if they had been defined with their first and last sets switched The SELECT TRANSPOSE statement affects the displays produced by the WRITE BROWSE and EDIT variable statements The WRITE BROWSE and EDIT variable statements can take a local TRANSPOSE option to override the global setting of TRANSPOSE locally If an explicit set order is included with any of these statements any global or local TRANSPOSE settings are ignored UNITS var to specify a variable whose value s should be used to perform unit conversions for all numeric data reports displayed by the WRITE variable and BROWSE variable statements var is the identifier of the variable to be used as the conversion factor T
417. stem User s Manual 6 9 The selected months are Month Value 1 June 6 July 7 August 8 September 9 5 7 selmon Select months or LIST or END The selected months Month Value 1 May 5 July 7 3 This example shows how to use the VARIABLE indir option in order to select a program variable Here indir is an indirect variable that serves as a substitute for other selected variables DEFINE PROCEDURE selvar ASK Select variable or LIST or END END ELSE LIST AUDIT VARIABLI selvar S W S En E VARIABLE indir RITE indir elvar ND ask ND PROCEDURE selvar bi E The procedure selvar allows you to select one of the variables of a program by entering the variable s identifier in response to an ASK statement A sample dialog with procedure selvar is shown below DO selvar Select variable or LIST or END LIST Identifier Description MV Month Value MC Month Code MN Month Name X X Value Y Y Value INDIR An Indirect Variable Select variable or LIST or END mv Month Value January February March April May e w PK mP 99 Promula Application Development System User s Manual June 6 July 7 August 8 September 9 October 10 November 11 December 12 Select variable or LIST or END X x Value 5 Select variable or LIST or END end 3 7
418. stem User s Manual Below A and B are both arrays containing six values DEFINE SET row 3 col 2 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE A row col B row col END VARIABLE The equation 1 makes all six values of array A equal to 1 The subscripts row and col are implicit Similarly the equation A B makes all six values of array A equal to the corresponding values of array B It does the same work as the following six equations 1 1 B 1 1 1 2 B 1 2 A 2 1 B 2 1 2 2 B 2 2 A 3 1 B 3 1 A 3 2 B 3 2 3 Multiple valued equations using dummy subscripts The equation A r c B r c makes all six values of the A array equal to the corresponding values of the B array The subscripts x and c are dummy subscripts that stand for the row and co1 sets 4 A Character Equation Given the following definitions and data DEFINE VARIABLE A YPE STRING 20 B YPE STRING 20 C YPE STRING 40 END VARIABLE READ A The cow jumped ov READ B er the moon the equation C A B will put the concatenation of strings A and B into variable c 49 Promula Application Development System User s Manual WRITE C The cow jumped over the moon 5 AMixed Character and Numeric Variable Equation PROMULA is a loose typing language This means that you may mix variables of different types in your expressions PROMULA will ma
419. t t n 1 where the t s are consecutive time points They are not consecutive time set selections based on a local setting of the time set Rather they are time points as defined initially by the time values related to the set subscripting var Suppose the user has selected a five year moving average MOVING 5 based on an annual time series from 1970 to 1990 and he wishes to show only 1975 1980 1985 1990 moving averages The average for 1990 is computed as the sum of values from 1986 to 1990 divided by the number of time points as defined initially by the TIME option on the set definition In the tabular display the words Moving Average for are placed in front of the original title unless the TITLE option is specified Example DEFINE SET row 3 coliz pag 2 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE a row col pag A 3 Dimensional Array END VARIABLE a i j k i j k Given the defintions above the statements WRITE a TITLE Unformatted Display of variable A WRITE a 6 10 2 pag col row TOTAL col TITLE Formatted Display of variable A produce the following output Unformatted Display of variable A PAG 1 COL 1 COL 2 ROW 1 1 2 ROW 2 2 4 ROW 3 3 6 PAG 2 COL 1 COL 2 ROW 1 2 4 ROW 2 4 8 ROW 3 6 12 Formatted Display of variable A ROW 1 Total COL 1 COL 2 PAG 1 3 00 1 00 2 00 PAG 2 6 00 2 00 4 00 296
420. t if you press the Esc key the compilation will end and you will return to the Main Menu If you press any other key the compilation will continue 2 If you respond N for to the question then an error message will be displayed for each error but PROMULA will continue compiling Note that the result of any compilation which was continued despite an error will probably not be well formed A similar dialog occurs if you wish to save the compilation output on a disk file Enter the filename of the program to be compiled DEMO PRM Where do you want the compilation listing N one C onsole P rinter or D isk D Enter a filename for the compilation listing DEMO LST Do you want the compiler to pause on errors Y es or N o Y The objectives of this example are to compile the source program DEMO PRM and to save the compilation listing on a disk file named DEMO LST for later viewing or printing In the compilation example shown above three files are involved 1 The program source file DEMO PRM 10 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 2 The compilation listing saved on file DEMO LST 3 executable file resulting from the compilation was saved on file DEMO XEQ as specified in the OPEN SEGMENT statement of the source file It is this file that you may execute interactively using Main Menu option 6 or execute in batch mode using Main Menu option 8
421. t will classify the columns of the table the other sets if any will classify the pages of the table Sets dimensioning table variables which are missing from the list will classify the rows of the table The sets list sets must contain at least one set or the number 1 for browsing a group of scalar variables and must be missing those set identifiers which will classify the rows of the multidimensional table variables title is text you wish to show as a title for the table textil is any text that you wish to use as a subtitle for the values of var1 This text may not contain variables varl is the identifier of the first variable in the table fmt1 is the desired format for the values of var1 text2 is any text that you wish to use as a subtitle for the values of var2 This text may not contain variables var2 is the identifier of the second variable in the table fmt2 is the desired format for the values of var2 rw is the width in characters of row descriptors cw is the width in characters of table columns Upon execution the BROWSE TABLE statement clears the Main Screen displays the first page of the table and issues the following prompt at the bottom of the Prompt Screen End Exit Fn Shift Fn PgUp PgDn Home Arrows Browse The highlighted portions of the message represent the following keypress options Fn press the Fn function key to browse up the nth dimension of the array where n varies from 1 to 10 The F1 key browses up the 1st d
422. t dimension of the variable is the months dimension it is a set of 12 elements the months January to December The second dimension of the array is the expense category dimension It is a set of six elements the expense categories rent food car service utilities car insurance and phone The column of the array expense category to which each equation applies is indicated explicitly by the number following the subscript m in the parentheses The first column of array expns Rent is constant at 409 month Expense categories 2 3 4 and 6 are random values within different ranges PROMULA s RANDOM function is used with upper and lower limits to simulate random expenditures in these expense categories The fifth column of array expns Car Insurance is assigned to the result of the division of 270 by 6 or 45 per month 35 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Here is a second example The monthly income values will be computed by the budget program using the following equation incom payhr wager 1 bonus The equation above uses implicit subscripting This means that all 12 values of variable incom will be computed from the single equation above without DO loops or dummy subscripts PROMULA knows that it should perform the expression for each month because the incom variable was dimensioned by set mons in its definition Furthermore the variables payhr and bonus are also dimensioned by set mo
423. t is used to define the name location appearance and popup type of a window The OPEN WINDOW statement is used to open a window on a specific functional screen The CLEAR WINDOW statement is used to end the association between a window and a functional screen 91 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Screen areas can also be assigned to serve as the display areas for popup and pulldown pick menus This feature is described in the context of the DEFINE MENU and SELECT PULLDOWN statements respectively Examples The code below is a simple example of Advanced Windowing DEFINE WINDOW cwind 1 1 78 4 WHITE BLACK FU mwind 10 10 69 18 WHITE BLACK FU pwind 1 23 78 23 WHITE BLACK FU ND WINDOW HEAVY WHITE BLACK SINGLE WHITE BLACK BLACK WHITE HEAVY WHITE BLACK BLACK WHITE POPUP tj DEFINE SET row 4 col 5 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE A row col THE VALUES OF VARIABLE A TYPE REAL 9 2 VALUE 10 ND VARIABLE H E PROCEDURE demo cwind COMMENT pwind PROMPT mwind MAIN U Z U zOOOU Fd op H Ej DE Dd Hj 2 2 Edit the values below according to the instructions in the prompt at the bottom of the screen or press End to continue END EDIT A END PROCEDURE demo Pr
424. t procedure Syntax BREAK proc Remarks proc isthe name of the procedure that contains the BREAK procedure statement Upon execution the BREAK procedure statement escapes from the current procedure and returns control to the program unit which called the procedure After returning execution continues with the statement after the procedure call that originally executed proc Examples The following example illustrates use of the BREAK statement to escape from a DO UNTIL loop DEFINE VARIABLE x x ND VARIABLI tj EH DEFINE PROCEDURE proc DO UNTIL x GT 10 1 WRITE x DO IF x GT 5 WRITE Leaving proc BREAK proc END PROCEDURE proc DEFINE PROCEDURE call DO proc WRITE Back from proc 102 Promula Application Development System User s Manual END PROCEDURE call Executing procedure ca11 generates the output shown below DO call x 1 x 2 x 3 4 x 5 x 6 Leaving proc Back from proc 3 7 7 BROWSE COMMENT Purpose Displays text for browsing in the Comment window Basic Windows or the active Comment Screen Advanced Windows Syntax BROWSE COMMENT text END Remarks text is any text that you enter The text will be clipped to the width of the window opened to the Main or Comment Screen or the Comment Window No more than 255 lines
425. t program s inputs and outputs are described in the table below Table 2 2 The DEFINE SET Statement for the Budget Program Set Identifier Number of Elements Size Descriptor mons 12 onths exps 6 Expense Categories Each set definition includes the set s identifier size descriptor and other optional information The set identifier is a short symbolic name for the set and is used to refer to the set in other statements of the program The set size specifies the range of the set indices and the number of items which may be indexed by the set The set descriptor is optional and is used to describe the set for documentation and program interface purposes By default the elements of a set are ordered from 1 to N where N is the size of the set In addition each set element has a Label and a sequence number The default labels for sets are formed from the set identifiers and the element sequence numbers in parentheses as shown below Labels for set mons Labels for set exps ONS 1 EXPS 1 ONS 2 EXPS 2 ONS 3 EXPS 3 ONS 4 EXPS 4 ONS 5 EXPS 5 ONS 6 EXPS 6 ONS 7 ONS 8 ONS 9 ONS 10 24 Promula Application Development System User s Manual MONS 11 MONS 12 The default element labels may be changed to other more or less descriptive ones by reading values into the set or by using a DEFINE RELATION or SELECT RELATION statement to specify user defined labels for
426. tabase they are simply a collection of variable length text records The records of a text file must be accessed sequentially so they may be difficult or inefficient to access and update Furthermore unless the information in the text file is carefully structured into a predictable pattern it will be very difficult to work with The lack of internal structure in text files is an advantage for some applications since the file may be easily extended by simply appending text at its end Random files are more structured than text files Random files are composed of fixed length binary records Each record in the random file is composed of a collection of variables the variables may be scalars or arrays The information in a random file is accessed one record at a time The records may be accessed at random by record number or through selection keys by using an inverted file Random files may be updated by adding records to the end of the random file or by re writing existing records Array files are the most structured type of database Array files are composed of variables usually arrays although scalars may also be present An array file can also contain sets and relations The information in an array file is accessed using sets and variables Array files are ideally suited for the science and engineering applications that PROMULA is typically used for Because of this text and random files are rarely used for database management in PROMULA T
427. tals of the PROMULA language in the context of a simple example 2 1 The PROMULA Application Development System The following sections describe how to create and manage executable applications using PROMULA For example suppose you wish to create a simple application that will let you enter monthly sales and cost figures then compute and report the monthly profits and the average monthly profit We have written such a program for you it is called DEMO PRM and it is on the PROMULA distribution disk The dialog produced by running this program is displayed below Pleas nter the monthly sales figures 13200 12100 14800 16200 15200 17200 18060 18960 19900 20900 21950 23050 Pleas nter the monthly cost figures 9200 8600 10400 11300 10700 12100 12700 13350 14000 14700 15440 16210 Monthly Profit and Loss Figures Sales Costs Profit January 13 200 9 200 4 000 February 12 100 8 600 3 500 March 14 800 10 400 4 400 April 16 200 11 300 4 900 May 15 200 10 700 4 500 June 17 200 12 100 5 100 July 18 060 12 700 5 360 August 18 960 13 350 5 610 September 19 900 14 000 5 900 October 20 900 14 700 6 200 November 21 950 15 440 6 510 December 23 050 16 210 6 840 Average monthly Profit 5 235 00 Figure 2 1 Dialog produced by DEMO XEQ The source code for DEMO PRM is displayed below OPEN SEGMENT DEMO XEQ STATU
428. tatement defines a random file The DEFINE VARIABLE statement defines the record structure i e the variables of a random file The OPEN file statement opens a random file for use The READ file statement reads one complete record of data from a random file The WRITE file statement writes one complete record of data to a random file The CLEAR file statement physically closes a random file saving its current contents The SELECT file statement allows you to access at random any record in the file by specifying the desired record number It is this feature that distinguishes random files from text files The DO file statement allows you to access all records of a random file in sequential order from Record 1 to Record N where N is the last record of the file PROMULA random files may be used directly by programs written in languages such as FORTRAN and C For example the FORTRAN READ statement can read PROMULA random files provided you specify three parameters the file name or number the record number and the record length in bytes The length of a record is simply the number of values in the variables of the record multiplied by 4 note that each character in a STRING type variable is considered as a value so that a variable with TYPE STRING 10 has a length of 40 bytes 3 1 9 1 3 Inverted Files Inverted files offer a means to make rapid selections from a random file based on the values of variables in the records of the random
429. tement no definitions including another DO statement The DO IF NULL statement can be used to detect a null set selection resulting from a SELECT set IF statement It may also be used to detect if the GETDIR function did not find any files matching the search specification A SELECT set IF condition statement results in a null condition if the selection condition is false for all elements of the set When this occurs PROMULA does not select a null set it selects the complete set The DO IF NULL statement allows you to detect the null selection and take appropriate action and prevent subsequent abnormal calculations or other undesirable effects A GETDIR function results in a null condition if no files matching the search specification are found After the statements in the DO IF NULL block are executed the SELECT set IF or GETDIR statement that caused the null selection is re executed Examples The following example illustrates the use of the DO IF NULL statement to detect a null set selection DEFINE SET mn 12 12 Months END SET DEFINE VARIABLE lmt Lower Limit value mv mn Monthly values END VARIABLE DEFINE PROCEDURE null WRITE Enter the Lower Limit READ lmt SELECT mn IF mv GT lmt DO IF NULL WRITE There are no months with value greater than lmt WRITE Try again null END IF NULL WRITE mv 40 END PROCEDURE null
430. termine an efficient framework for storing this information The basic unit of information storage in PROMULA and most other computer programming languages is called a variable The information stored in a variable may be in the form of letters numbers or other characters and may be a single value or a group of values Consider for example the value shown in Figure 2 5 below Average Monthly Expense 1 001 33 21 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Figure 2 5 A Scalar Variable The value 1 001 33 could be stored in a single PROMULA variable A single valued variable like this one is sometimes referred to as a scalar A numeric scalar variable is the simplest and smallest type of variable that can be defined in PROMULA Now consider the list of values shown below Average Expenses by Expense Category RENT 409 00 FOOD 275 24 CAR SERVICE 126 18 UTILITIES 88 44 CAR INSURANCE 45 00 PHONE 57 48 Figure 2 6 A One dimensional Array Variable The six values above could also be stored in a single PROMULA variable Since this variable contains a group of values it is referred to as an array Variables with a one dimensional list structure like the one shown above are sometimes called vectors You may be familiar with statistical analysis packages that treat all variables like vectors The values of this vector are classified by expense category This
431. text file if the FROM option is used file isthe identifier of a logical file of type TEXT that contains the data for variable var You must open file to the text file on disk that contains the data before executing the READ variable statement You may read data for more than one variable in a single read operation by using the READ variables statement Examples 1 Given the definitions row 4 col 3 page 2 END SET DEFINE SET DEFINE VARIABLE a row col page A 3 Dimensional Array END VARIABLE You may enter data in array a via the following READ statement EAD a II 121 131 221 231 321 331 421 431 122 132 222 232 322 332 422 432 BS N P IN IO Sd NNNNFREFR This order of the data entry is according to the order of the sets defining array a You may verify this by using the WRITE a Statement WRITE a A 3 Dimensional Array PAGE 1 COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 ROW 1 111 121 131 ROW 2 211 221 281 242 Promula Application Development System User s Manual ROW 3 311 321 331 ROW 4 411 421 431 PAGE 2 COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 ROW 1 112 122 132 ROW 2 212 222 232 ROW 3 312 322 332 ROW 4 412 422 432 2 You may read by col the same data as in Example 1 by using the following statement READ a col row page 111 211 311 411 121 222 321 421 131 231 331 431 112 212 312 412 122 222 322
432. th a variable This list must contain at least two variables Inclusion of TIME will include the time series value vector as one of the variables in the correlation matrix One dimensional arrays vectors are used in correlation calculations directly Two and higher dimensional arrays are partitioned into sets of observations and a separate matrix is generated for each active page and column of the highest dimensional array in vars The variables specified in vars should have at least one set in common A title Correlation Matrix is printed at the top of each page Subtitles including the row descriptors for sets specified in sets appear when more than one report page is generated Examples The following code illustrates the DO CORRELATE statement DEFINE SET grp 2 Test Groups tim 10 Time Points TIME 0 9 END SET DEFINE VARIABLE rspv tim grp Response by Group and Time dosv tim grp Dose at Each Time Point END VARIABLE READ dosv grp tim 0 5 1 0 Les 24 0 2 59 15 07 17 5 20 07 22 5 25 0 0 5 1 0 229 2 0 2 5 15 0 17 5 20 0 22 5 25 0 READ rspv grp tim 1 3 2 1 3 5 6 0 6 6 6 1 6 0 11 2 Sd 5a 0 3 1 9 3 6 6 2 5 3 333 25 10 7 9 9 9 7 Given the definitions above the statement DO CORRELATE grp tim dosv rspv TIME produces the display below Correlation Matrix 0 to 9 GRP 1 DOSV RSPV TIME DOSV 1 000 0 581 0 948 RSPV 0 581 1 000 0 6
433. that are entered Next translate the keypresses into batch commands using the relationships in Table 2 1 Each record is placed on a line in the script just as it would be typed during interactive execution Optionally some data records may be replaced by PROMULA commands For example instead of trying to use batch commands to respond to an EDIT statement escape from the application and use equations READ statements and procedure calls to assign values to the variables Of course this method requires that you know the names of the items contained in the program There should be a close parallel between the interactive keypresses and records entered during interactive mode and the commands and data in the batch script Plots are the one exception to this rule during an interactive run PROMULA pauses for a keypress after generating a plot however during a batch run PROMULA does not pause after a plot so no keypress is needed There are two ways to run an application in batch start the application using Main Menu option 8 or compile the statements that start the application using Main Menu option 5 or a RUN statement For example compiling the following statements start a batch run of the application contained in the segment file test xeq execution starts with the first statement of the procedure called proc OPEN SEGMENT test xeq STATUS OLD READ SEGMENT MAIN DO proc batch commands Example 16 Pro
434. the defintions above the statement stats xval pnt col produces the report below INPUT VECTOR 1 11 00 21 00 31 00 41 00 91 00 n 5 TOTAL 195 00 MEAN 39 000 154 Promula Application Development System User s Manual INPUT VECTOR 2 12 00 12 00 32 00 42 00 52 00 5 TOTAL 150 00 MEAN 30 000 3 7 30 DEFINE PROCEDURE Purpose Defines a group of statements for later execution as a single unit Syntax DEFINE PROCEDURE proc comment statement END comment Remarks proc is the procedure identifier statement is any executable statement comment is optional text you wish to enter as an in line comment Definitions are not allowed within procedures except for the DEFINE PARAMETER statement which defines procedure parameters Similarly data for a READ statement is not allowed in a procedure A procedure is executed by the DO procedure statement i e by simply entering its name PROMULA supports recursive procedures i e a procedure can call itself into execution A procedure can call other defined procedures into execution Examples 1 The following statements DEFINE PROCEDURE hello write a greeting WRITE Hello there ND PROCEDURE hello define the procedure hello whose sole purpose is to issue the message Hello there as shown in the dialog below DO hello Hello
435. the disk variables in the database filea dba which was built in the last section 301 Promula Application Development System User s Manual DEFINE S row 3 col 4 pag 2 END SET Define fixed variables to use as pointers to disk variable dimensions DEFINE VARIABLE rr A Row Pointer Column Pointer pp A Page Pointer ND VARIABLI LH Define fixed variables that will access disk variables virtually EFINE VARIABLE ldatl row col pag A 3 dimensional Array DISK filea datl ldatb row col pag A 3 dimensional Array DISK filea datb ldat2 1 2 dimensional Array DISK filea dat2 ND VARIABLE tj Define fixed variables that will access disk variables dynamically DEFINE VARIABLE dsv Dynamic Scalar DISK filea datl rr cc pp drv row Dynamic Vector by row DISK filea dat1 row cc pp col Dynamic Vector by col DISK filea dat1 rr col pp dpv pag Dynamic Vector by pag DISK filea dat1 rr cc pag drc row col Dynamic Array by row and col DISK filea dat1 row col pp dpc pag col Dynamic Array by pag and col DISK filea dat1 rr col pag dpr pag row Dynamic Array by pag and row DISK filea dat1 row cc pag 1 ND VARIABLE Define scratch variables that will access disk variables dynamically DEFINE VARIABLE SCRATCH sdatl
436. tic overflow or underflow DEFINE PROCEDURE chkval WRITE Please enter a value READ val ans 100 val DO IF RROR 538 WRITE Please enter a nonzero value Error 538 is caused by an READ val arithmetic overflow or underflow END IF ERROR WRITE The answer is ans 8 3 END PROCEDURE chkval Ed E 192 Promula Application Development System User s Manual A dialog with procedure chkval1 is shown below DO chkval Please enter a value 0 Please enter a nonzero value 2 The answer is 10 000 3 7 46 DO IF ESCAPE Purpose Executes a group of statements if the user pressed the Esc key in response to a prompt generated by the previous statement Syntax DO IF ESCAPE Statement END Remarks statement is any executable statement no definitions including another DO statement If the user presses Esc in response to a prompt or selection menu PROMULA will execute the group of executable statements between the DO IF ESCAPE and the END statement then re execute the statement immediately preceding the DO IF ESCAPE statement This statement is usually used to help prevent complications that can result if the user escapes from an application instead of giving a valid response to a prompt Example Procedure noesc uses the DO IF ESCAPE statement to trap and escape DEF
437. tidimensional data structures Data arrays in PROMUDLA can have up to ten dimensions making it easy to define and manipulate highly structured information Many PROMULA statements have the capability to manipulate multidimensional variables implicitly leading to great economies of notation The information of PROMULA program is structured into variables and sets Variables are multidimensional structures of information constructed from and subscripted by sets Variables store the information and sets define the structure of variables PROMULA variables can be as large as your disk space allows 1 3 13 Array or Matrix Equations PROMULA equations are written in standard algebraic notation The equation operands may be scalars vectors or multidimensional arrays Implicit and dummy subscripting allows a condensed notation for array equations This feature is comparable to a similar capability of the APL language 1 3 14 Equation Solver PROMULA s equation solver gives you solutions to systems of simultaneous equations both linear and nonlinear 1 3 15 Variable Management System In PROMULA a program is information not just a computational box In addition to computations each PROMULA program has a database The database contains the input and output variables of the program as well as other supporting information You can use the program database independently of the program code and even interrupt a running program to work with its datab
438. tion Development System User s Manual ss END Remarks prompt is a message or prompt for the user response is a possible user response to prompt Possible responses are of three types WORD 7 coae SET set VARIABLE indir vars where code is a string of characters which must be entered in upper or lower case to qualify as a valid response PROMULA recognizes only the first six characters of code as a valid response the rest are ignored set is a set identifier and allows the user to make set selections see Example 2 below indir is the identifier of an indirect variable which acts as a pointer to other variables and allows the user to select a variable for subsequent input output operations You must put an asterisk after the identifier of indir in its definition to tell PROMULA that it will be used as an indirect variable Calculations with indirect variables are not allowed See Example 3 below vars is a list of variables from which the user is expected to make a selection The selected variable is transferred to indir for the input output purposes of the ASK statement only If this list is omitted all variables in the program are included in the list See Example 3 below statement is any executable statement i e no definitions including other ASK statements The ASK statement behaves like the DO IF statement i e it provides an alternative path of execution if a condition is met The conditions of an ASK state
439. to show a table of growth rates in time series data for a previously defined time series dataset or array A time series dataset or array is one which is defined by a time series set The growth rate for time t is computed from values for time and t 1 where and c 1 are defined as above Following the keyword GROWTH a real number within parentheses is required and stands for the number of time units between growth rates Internally it is divided by the difference in time values for selected t and c 1 Suppose the user has selected 1970 and 1975 and wishes to show annual growth rates GROWTH 1 The growth rate for 1975 is computed as a quotient value for 1975 divided by value for 1970 raised to the power 2 1 0 1975 1970 One is subtracted from this quantity to get a growth rate and a factor of 100 gives the final result as a percent rate from 1970 to 1975 in one year increments In the tabular display the words Growth Rate in are placed in front of the original title unless the TITLE option is specified MOVING The MOVING option allows the user to show a table of moving averages in time series data for a previously defined time series array Following the keyword MOVING an 295 Promula Application Development System User s Manual integer n within parentheses gives the number of single unit time increments over which the moving average is computed The moving average for time t is computed from values for time
440. tring 22 Raster end of plot string Items 16 through 22 are used to control raster devices e g printers See your printer manual for the values of these parameters 23 Vector Draw line string 24 Vector Write Horizontal Text String 25 Vector Write Vertical Text String 26 Vector draw Circle String Items 23 through 26 are used to control vector devices e g pen plotters See your plotter manual for the values of these parameters After determining the values of the items to include in a custom graphics definition you may use the graphics configuration program to create a configuration that matches these specifications First load the program and select option 2 off the main menu This brings up the custom graphics management menu shown below rom this menu you can create a new custom graphics configuration or modify or delete an existing one To create a new donfiguration select option 2 from this menu This will bring up the configuration selection screfn lext select a configuration to use as the basis for the new one 326 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Select a configuration to use as the basis for the new one or press End Identifier Description CGA medium resolution 3 color graphics CGA high resoluti9on black amp white graphics EGA 16 color high resolution graphics VGA 16 color high resolution graphics BM Epson printer high resolution landscape BM Epson printer high res
441. ts argument and returns the file name takes a file specification in quotes or a string variable containing a file specification as its argument and returns the file path takes the identifier of a random file as its argument and returns the number of records in the file takes a file specification in quotes or a string variable containing a file specification wild card characters work here as its argument and generates a selection list in the main screen if any files are found The users selection is stored in the string variable that is assigned to the function This value can be systematically disassembled into its components by the FILEEXT FILENAME and FILEPATH functions The FILEEXIST FILEDELETE and FILESIZE functions are illustrated by the examples below Create and open two array files and one random file DEFINE FILE filel YPE ARRAY file2 YPE ARRAY file3 YPE RANDOM END FILE OPEN filel filel dba STATUS NEW OPEN file2 file2 dba STATUS NEW OPEN file3 file3 ran STATUS NEW DEFINE VARIABLE fexist File Exist Status fdelete File Delete Status records Number of records in a random file fname TYPE STRING 20 File Name END VARIABL Check whether or not a file exists The FILEEXIST Function fname filel dba fexist FILEEXIST fname WRITE fexist File Exist Status 1
442. ts of Action B ELSE PICK EQ 4 Statements of Action C END IF recurs lt Here the procedure recurs calls itself END PROCEDURE recurs Notice that the last statement in procedure recurs is a call to itself The DO condition for the recursion loop becomes false when the user selects option 1 from the menu The recursion loop is broken when the BREAK procedure statement is executed All other menu selections will allow the procedure to be called recursively For more information on looping see the DO WHILE DO UNTIL DO set and DO file statements in Chapter 3 2 2 3 Data Manipulation KEY TOPICS 1 Reading in data 2 Selecting the Elements of a Set 3 Sorting the Elements of a Set 4 Writing Equations Data manipulation is another fundamental programming task that includes loading information into program variables and manipulating them to create output information 2 2 3 1 Reading in Data Getting data into its variables is a basic requirement of all computer programs One of the easiest ways to read a fixed amount of information into a variable is to use PROMULA s READ variable statement This statement is used to read free format data from the source code of your program or from the keyboard into a variable Free format means that the format of the data values does not have to be specified and the values may be in a variety of arrangements For numeric data the 31 Promula Application Development Syste
443. ttern for the vary2 line and so forth The defaults are defined by PROMULA s graphics configuration program OVER set to automatically create a multi line or multi bar plot for a y variable dimensioned by set Up to six lines or bars one for each dataset corresponding to an active element of set will be displayed POINT pnt1 pnt2 to define alternative line patterns for marked point plots Here pnt1 is a string variable or quoted string containing 1 character which defines the character to use for marking points of vary1 pnt2 defines a point character vary2 and so forth The default characters are amp and TITLE text to display a title for the plot This title may include variables text and other formatting characters according to the rules described in the WRITE text statement The default title is the descriptor of vary1 For plots of two or higher dimensional arrays the descriptors of all sets except the set classifying the x axis dimensioning the variables plotted are also part of the title For plots of time series variables the beginning and ending values of the time interval associated with the time series are appended to the title of the plot XLABEL x1labe1 to display a label for the x axis 1 1 may include variables and or quoted text The default is no x label YLABEL y1abel to display a label for the y axis 1 1 may include variables and or quoted text The default is no y label
444. tures to control the sequence of events that take place during program execution The efficiency of a program and the accuracy of its results are highly dependent on the correct implementation of these structures Fortunately only three types of control structures are needed to handle the control requirements of any application program These are Linear Flow structures Conditional Branch structures and Looping structures In addition a fourth type of control structure the Procedure is often used to help modularize the activities of a program into subunits that work together 2 2 2 1 Procedures A large computer program is like a complex machine it can have many parts The most fundamental of these parts are the program s statements Each statement performs a specific predefined task In addition to the statements that are available in the PROMULA language it is possible to create your own In PROMULA a programmer defined statement is called a Procedure A procedure is a set of statements that are executed as a group when the procedure s name is used as a program statement This is referred to as calling or invoking the procedure Defining procedures gives programmers the ability to break the programming process into simpler steps Each procedure creates a functional program unit that can later be integrated with the other procedures to create the full program 28 Promula Application Development System User s Manual When PROMULA en
445. uations which begin with the optional verb COMPUTE procedure execution statements which begin with the optional verb DO and data lines All definition statements are structured They begin with the verb DEFINE and end with the verb END PROMULA statements have no line numbers and may begin anywhere on an input line Blanks or commas must be used to separate distinct statement parts A statement may be as long as you wish however if it is longer than 80 characters it is good style to continue the statement on the next input line by using a comma at the end of the current line You may use as many continuation lines as you wish 3 1 20 System Definition A system of n equations and n unknowns A system has a name n parameters or unknowns and n equations The number of equations in a system n can be as large as you can fit in your working space The system is defined by the DEFINE SYSTEM statement Equations are written in the usual algebraic notation f xl X2 g xl XxX2 where and g are arbitrary real continuous functions of x1 x2 The solution of a system is obtained by an iterative process which you start by making an initial guess for all of the unknowns A system sys with parameters x1 x2 may be solved by simply entering its name and specifying an ordered list of scalar variables al a2 corresponding to the parameter list The number and order of variables in the variable list must agree with the num
446. ucture of the database 3 Initialize the variables as desired 4 Close the file Note you may add new sets variables and relations to an existing database by opening it with STATUS OLD then following steps 2 through 4 as desired 4 1 2 Program 2 Access an Old Database After building the database file is on disk and it may be used by other programs Using a database makes it possible for your application to manipulate very large array variables even if they are too large to fit in primary memory Another advantage is that database files store a permanent copy of program information separate from the program s segment file and this copy may be shared by other applications including programs written in other languages such as C or FORTRAN or even accessed from PROMULA s command mode Although it is not required the program used to build and initialize a database is usually kept in its own file This database build program need be run only once Programs that use the database variables are defined in independent source files and the database variables are accessed virtually or dynamically using local variables The first step in creating a program to use an array database on disk is to define an array file to access the database using the DEFINE FILE statement DEFINE FILE filea Array file for database filea dba TYPE ARRAY END FILE Next define program variables and relate them to the database
447. ues are the y coordinates of the points on the second curve being plotted varx andthe vary s must be subscripted by the same set Syntax 2 PLOT btype varyl vary2 option Remarks Syntax 2 produces bar plots in which one or more variables are used to form a display of bars whose lengths are proportional to the magnitude of the variables values The maximum number of variables that can be plotted simultaneously is six The number of bars displayed depends on the resolution of the monitor The ROW descriptors of the set that subscripts the first variable being plotted will appear as labels for the x axis tic marks btype is the type of bar plot desired and may be one of the following 225 Promula Application Development System User s Manual BAR for a parallel bar plot STACK for a stacked bar plot varyl is the identifier of the variable whose values define the lengths of the first set of bars plotted vary2 isthe identifier of the variable whose values define the lengths of the second set of bars plotted Syntax 3 PLOT type or btype set V tvar option Remarks Syntax 3 produces plots of variables which are subscripted by a time series set Both line and bar plots can be specified by Syntax 3 The difference is that line plots can be generated without specifying a variable to scale the x axis the values of the time series set will be used to define the x coordinates of the points being plotted type specifies the type of
448. um value attained by the storage counters For example the listing shown in Figure 4 2 indicates that the application requires a minimum of 10 011 bytes of value storage 668 bytes of definition storage and 92 bytes of procedure storage A safe set of allocation switches for this program would be VS 11 DS 1 PS 1 For example entering the command line PROMULA VS 11 DS 1 PS 1 RUN PROGRAM segment xeq will start PROMULA and load the application stored in the file segment xeg PROMULA will allocate a total of 13 Kbytes for the standard memory partitions and at least 83 Kbytes for scratch storage as diagrammed below TOTAL AVAILABLE WORKING SPACE SCRATCH Hardware dependent 4 1 3 5 Automatic READ DISK PROMULA performs an automatic READ DISK operation whenever a dynamic variable is encountered on the right side of an equation or displayed with a WRITE or BROWSE statement unless the variable has already been read into memory The automatic READ DISK does not automatically move pointer variables but it does ensure that dynamic variables have default values The default for the basepointed dimensions of dynamic variables is the element indexed by the value of the pointer related to the disk set PROMULA never performs an automatic WRITE DISK of a dynamic variable 4 1 3 6 Overlap Mapping It is possible to use a single n dimensional local variable to virtually access several n 1 dimensional disk variables The
449. un a menu of applications Use the PROMULA Language Press desired key or move bounce bar and press ENTER Copyright 1988 91 PROMULA Development Corporation ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Application Management System To begin the desired function simply press the corresponding function key On the IBM Personal Computer the function keys are the ten shaded keys at the left or at the top of the keyboard Alternatively you may press the numeric keys on your keyboard or highlight the desired option and press the Enter key 2 1 2 1 F1 Exit PROMULA Selecting Main Menu option 1 gets you out of PROMULA and returns control to the operating system All PROMULA files which are open at this time are automatically closed Any PROMULA information contained within the memory of the computer which has not been saved on a disk file is lost In addition to closing its open files PROMULA clears the screen before ending Promula Application Development System User s Manual 2 1 2 2 F2 Restart PROMULA Selecting Main Menu option 2 restarts PROMULA Before the restart PROMULA closes all application files clears all application information from the memory of the computer and clears the screen This is a convenient feature to use when you wish to move from one PROMULA application to another without having to go back to the operating system 2 1 2 3 F3 Run the PROMULA Tutorial The PROMULA Tutorial is the reference chapter of this User
450. up type of the rectangle are specified by a DEFINE WINDOW statement The popup type of window determines what happens to information on the screen that is covered when the window is opened There are two popup types Static and Popup When a static window is associated with a functional screen it is immediately displayed on the screen Any text that gets covered by the static window is lost and cannot be restored unless it is written to the screen again A static window including its borders and contents will remain on the screen even after it is closed by CLEAR WINDOW statement This feature makes static windows useful for creating a backdrop for your application or displaying instructions or comments about a running program A window will be static if it does not have the optional keyword POPUP in its definition When a popup window is associated with a functional screen it is not immediately displayed A popup window is only displayed while the functional screen associated with it is in use The window is opened whenever a statement that uses the associated functional screen is executed After execution of such a statement the window is removed from the display and any text that was covered by the window is automatically redrawn Popup windows are useful for displaying on line help or other messages that will only be shown briefly A window is of type Popup if it has the optional keyword POPUP in its definition The DEFINE WINDOW statemen
451. ure requires less programming it does not give you full control over how large array variables are paged into memory for processing The variables remain on disk and are accessed directly i e the values of the variables are accessed on disk and are not read into memory In summary the COPY statement allows four types of copy operations 1 Copy from one binary data file to another This is an efficient way to make copies of binary array and random files for direct use by PROMULA If a full copy of structure and data is desired use the RAW option for maximum copying speed 2 Copy from an array to a text file This is a way to convert binary data files into text data files that may be used as text data by other PROMULA programs or by other software 3 Copy an array file to an output device the console or printer 4 an array file definition into memory for direct access using an IMAGE copy Examples The following examples of the COPY statement make copies of a database called original dba The definition of this database is shown below 126 Promula Application Development System User s Manual DEFINE FILE orignl TYPE ARRAY Original Database END FILE OPEN orignl original dba STATUS NEW 4 col 6 END SET orignl DEFINE SET orignl DEFINE VARIABLE orignl a rec col TYPE REAL 10 1
452. ution Promula Application Development System User s Manual PROMULA programs are easy to write and maintain because PROMULA s English like notation and logical constructs make them almost self documented 1 3 2 Language Tutorial This reference aid is an on line menu driven tutorial that allows you to obtain information about PROMULA while you are programming or using an application 1 3 3 Language Course This learning aid is a series of PROMULA source codes designed to demonstrate the PROMULA language constructs nouns and the PROMULA commands verbs 1 3 4 Tutorial Writer A tutorial writer lets you create your own menu driven application specific tutorials by simply typing them in It converts whole books or reports into on line menu driven tutorials and or context specific on line help for your applications 1 3 5 Menu Manager PROMULA s menu manager prepares pick and data menus for user friendly applications Menu preparation is as easy as writing the menus on the screen 1 3 6 Data Editor A full screen data editor facilitates data entry and update Using techniques similar to those found in spreadsheet programs PROMULA lets you browse through the pages of multidimensional arrays to change their values 1 3 7 Report Generator The WRITE commands of the language let you display information in a variety of report formats 1 3 8 Graphics PROMULA supports business graphics point plots x y plots bar plots etc for both
453. variables by including a DISK option in their definitions 300 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The DISK option of the DEFINE VARIABLE statement is used to relate local variables to disk variables The syntax for this option is described below Syntax DEFINE VARIABLE SCRATCH var sets desc TYPE type DISK file dvar dsets END VARIABLE Remarks var is the identifier of a local variable It is through var that your application will virtually or dynamically access the disk variable dvar sets isthe list of set identifiers specifying the dimensions of the variable var desc isa descriptor for the variable var type isthe format type of var This type REAL INTEGER STRING etc must match the type of dvar For REAL type variables the width and decimal specifications of var are not required to match those of dvar For all other types the width specifications of var and dvar must match file is the identifier of an array file In order to access dvar through var the physical file specified when file is opened must contain dvar dvar isthe identifier of the actual disk variable that you want to access through var dsets is optional list of set identifiers scalar variables or integer constants one for each dimension of dvar These define the local sets and or pointers which correspond to the disk sets subscripting dvar The access method is defined by the spe
454. vice to any graphics mode only configurations supported by your hardware will perform properly If you misconfigure PROMULA s graphics it is likely that plots on screen or on the printer will not look right or your computer may lock up when PROMULA tries to produce a plot If either of these events occurs first try pressing the Esc key if that does not help reboot your computer and reconfigure PROMULA s graphics for a device that is supported by your hardware The following screens illustrate this sequence of steps First you run the program PCONFIG XEQ The screen below shows the main menu of the graphics configuration program PROMULA GRAPHICS CONFIGURATION PROGRAM MAIN MENU Fl Exit to PROMULA Main Menu F2 Create Modify or Delete Custom Graphics Configurations F3 Configure Graphics Modes F4 Test PROMULA Graphics Choosing the third option off the main menu will bring up the graphics mode selection screen shown below Use the arrow keys to highlight the graphics mode you wish to configure and press Enter to select it 322 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Select the graphics mode you wish to configure or press End Identifier Description MEDIUM HIGH PLOTTER End Exit Arrows PgUp PgDn Home Move Enter Select After selecting a graphics mode to configure the graphics configuration selection screen is displayed Use the arrow keys to highlight the graphics configuration you want to ass
455. which is designed to help its user to either pick from a list of options or view and or edit the values of program variables Depending on content and intended use there are two kinds of menus 1 Pick menus for helping the user select an option 2 Data menus for helping the user view and or edit program variables Menus are manipulated by several statements DEFINE MENU Defines a menu SELECT menu Helps the user make a selection from a pick menu EDIT menu Helps the user enter information into a data menu READ menu Helps the user enter information into a data menu WRITE menu Displays a data menu BROWSE menu Draws a data menu then pauses until the next user event keypress or mouse click SELECT PULLDOWN Creates and displays a pulldown pick menu for selection SELECT FIELD Modifies the selection fields of a simple or popup pick menu 3 1 11 1 Pick Menus Depending on thier definition and behavior there are three types of pick menus 1 Simple one window pick menus defined with a basic DEFINE MENU statement 2 Popup two window pick menus defined with a DEFINE MENU POPUP statement 3 Pulldown pick menus defined with a SELECT PULLDOWN statement Simple and Popup pick menus are executed by the statement 73 Promula Application Development System User s Manual SELECT menu option where menu is the name of the menu and opt ion is a variable that will contain the number of the selection picked Pulldown pick menus
456. write PROMULA applications It is your reference chapter for the structural elements of the PROMULA language its nouns and verbs and it describes the syntax and use of PROMULA statements The chapter is divided into two sections 1 PROMULA Nouns This section defines the nouns or objects of PROMULA and gives some information about their use in PROMULA programs 2 The PROMULA Statements This section discusses the purpose syntax and other information relevant to the PROMULA statements Most of the statements are illustrated by examples The contents of each section are presented in alphabetical order 3 1 The PROMULA Nouns The nouns or objects of the PROMULA language are listed in Table 3 1 These are the structural elements of PROMULA programs The information of a PROMULA program is stored in these elements Table 3 1 The Nouns or Objects of the PROMULA Language Equation An identity relationship between one variable and an expression of other variables and or constants involving arithmetic relational functional and logical operators File A place on disk for storing information PROMULA uses three types of files data files for storing variables segment files for storing code segments and dialog files for storing tutorials Function An intrinsic or user defined operator which returns a single value depending on the values of its arguments The returned value is computed according to the functional relationshi
457. xamples 1 The statement SELECT month 1 6 9 selects the Ist 6th and 9th element of the set month i e the months January June and September All subsequent calculations or input output instructions involving variables subscripted by month will be restricted to the selected months 271 Promula Application Development System User s Manual 2 The statement SELECT month JAN JUN selects the first six months January through June of the set month Here JAN and JUN are codes that have been related to the month set by a KEY relation 3 The statements x 1 6 SELECT month x y have the same effect as the statement of Example 2 Here x and y are real variables that select the first six months January through June of the set month 4 The statement SELECT month JAN JUN year 1980 1984 selects the elements of more than one set 5 The statement SELECT month year resets the sets month and year to their default sizes and orders 3 7 94 SELECT SET Purpose Allows the user to make several selections from a list of set elements Syntax SELECT SET set Remarks set is the identifier of a set Upon execution the SELECT SET statement clears the Main Screen and displays the elements of set for browsing The display contains the set element codes numbers and their descriptors as defined by a DEFINE RELATION or a SELECT
458. xit Fn Shift Fn PgUp PgDn Home Arrows Select Enter Edit The custom configuration management menu also offers the options of modifying or deleting existing custom graphics configurations If you choose to modify an existing configuration the list of existing custom graphics configurations will be displayed and you may select one for editing If you choose to delete an existing configuration the list of existing custom graphics configurations will be displayed and you may select one to be deleted 5 1 3 Testing PROMULA Graphics The graphics configuration program also offers the opportunity to test graphics configurations Selecting the fourth option from the configuration program s main menu brings up the plot testing control screen From this screen you may change the graphics modes or generate the various types of PROMULA plots 328 Promula Application Development System User s Manual Select the style of plot you wish to view or press END CURRENT GRAPHICS MODE IS HIGH 0 CHANGE GRAPHICS MODE NORMAL LINE SCATTER BAR STACK PIECHART VALUES Cn 4 rS or press End to Exit 329
459. xtn 4 WRITE CLEAR 1 filefunc END PROCEDURE filefunc 61 Promula Application Development System User s Manual The GETDIR function searches the specified directory for files that match the search mask If any files are found the Main Screen is cleared and the files are displayed for selection The user can browse up and down this list then press the enter key to select a file 2 DOC PLTARR TXT DOC DEFSET2 TXT DOC PIE TXT DOC FIG1A TXT DOC HDRFTR TX1 DOC BIFUNC TX1 DOC SUMOPR2 TXT DOC AX TXT DOC FILEFUNC TXT DOC FILFUNC2 TXT DOC FILFUNC3 TXT DOC INDIR TXI DOC FU RS TXT DOC RAI TXI DOCVSUMOPR1 TXT DOC SUMOPR3 TXT DOC OW 1 DOC MODFUNC TXT DOC OW C2 TXT DOC NEWSTAT TXT es Cs Cz C Cs Cz e Ge Cz es ep Cs es Cs Cs Cs Cs Cs Cs End Exit Arrows PgUp PgDn Home Move Enter Select You can use the DO IF NULL statement to test if any matches for the GETDIR search were found and you can use the DO IF END statement to test if the user pressed the End key instead of pressing Enter to make a file selection Assuming the user selects NEWSTAT TXT from the list the filename functions will break down the selected file specification into its component parts and return the results to string variables on the left hand side of the equations The WRITE statements in procedure ilefunc display the following results

PROMULA - Great Migrations

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents